JP2019042561A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To eliminate a gap into which a fraudulent member such as a piano wire can be inserted, and sufficiently prevent a fraudulent act performed by inserting the fraudulent member.SOLUTION: A game board 26 having a game area 27 and a game frame (comprising a front frame 5 and a glass door 6), which includes attachment parts (metal fittings 101 for fixing one-way screws) for attaching the game board 26 thereto, and a transparent member 28 covering the front face of the game area 27 when attaching the game board 26 to the attachment parts, are fastened integrally by using the one-way screws. By integrating the game board 26 having the game area 27 and the game frame, it is possible to eliminate a gap into which a fraudulent member such as a piano wire can be inserted, prevent the game board 26 and the game frame from being detached without a trace, and sufficiently prevent a fraudulent act performed by inserting the fraudulent member.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 14

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine which allows a player to play a predetermined game.

  As a game machine, when a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device as a game medium, and the game ball wins in a prize area such as a prize port provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is one that has been configured. Furthermore, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying (also referred to as "variation") identification information is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result. Are configured to provide the player with

  The prize value is to pay out a prize ball or to give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball to the prize area. In addition, with the game value, when the specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is easy to hit the ball, It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state, and to be in a state where it becomes easy to establish the conditions for award ball payout.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, a specific display mode defined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) which is started in the variable display unit based on the game ball having won the start winning opening. When it is done, a "big hit (specific game state)" occurs. In addition, derivation | leading-out display is making a symbol stop display. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a transition is made to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball tends to be won. Then, in each open period, when there is a winning to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of opening of the special winning opening is fixed at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Note that an open time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each open, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the open time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Among such gaming machines, there are some gaming machines for which measures have been taken to prevent an illegal act performed by inserting an illegal member such as a piano wire (see, for example, Patent Document 1). For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the touch panel display unit of the front operation unit provided at the lower part of the front frame main body extends in the left and right direction on the upper surface wall of the upper component and has an inverted L shape. An insertion preventing member is formed. With such a configuration, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, by providing the insertion preventing member, a gap is not generated in the front operation unit provided at the lower part of the front frame main body, It is prevented that incorrect members, such as a cell and a piano wire, are inserted from between front component members.

JP 2005-261571 A (paragraph 0133, FIG. 20)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, no measures for preventing fraud are taken at places other than the front operation unit provided at the lower part of the front frame main body in the gaming machine, and a piano wire etc. It can not be said that it can be sufficiently prevented that the fraudulent acts performed by inserting the fraudulent member of. For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the glass door is opened, there is no change in the structure capable of inserting an unauthorized member such as a piano wire into a gap in the gaming area. It is not possible to sufficiently prevent fraudulent acts performed by inserting unauthorized members such as piano wires.

  In view of the above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of sufficiently preventing an illegal act performed by inserting an illegal member by eliminating a gap into which an illegal member such as a piano wire can be inserted.

(Means 1) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a predetermined number of gaming media are enclosed, the gaming media is made to enter the gaming area, and the gaming media having passed through the gaming area are recovered through the recovery unit and recovered. A gaming machine that circulates media to enter the gaming area again, and has a gaming board (for example, gaming board 26) having a gaming area (for example, gaming area 27), and an attachment portion (for example, for attaching the gaming board) 14 and 15, and a transparent member (for example, transparent member 28) covering the front of the game area when the game board is attached to the attachment portion. , The glass frame 6 and the front frame 5, and as shown in FIG. 15, the game frame and the play frame attached with the transparent member 28), and the game board and the game frame can not be removed without a trace. It has been that (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, is fixed to be integrated with the one-way screw on bracket 101 of the one-way screw-fixing) be characterized. With such a configuration, by unifying the game board having the game area and the game frame, there is no gap in which an unauthorized member such as a piano wire can be inserted, and the game board and the game frame can be removed without trace. It is possible not to do so, and it is possible to sufficiently prevent the fraudulent acts performed by inserting the fraudulent member.

(Means 2) In Means 1, the game board and the play space are fixed so that a space of a predetermined interval (for example, 2 cm) is generated between the front surface of the game area and the transparent member. The change member (for example, the nail 90) for changing the flow direction of the game medium flowing down the game area is provided, and the change member is disposed vertically standing on the front surface of the game area (for example, in FIG. 13) As shown, the nail 90 is disposed upright on the front of the game area 27), changing means for changing the length of the portion of the change member that protrudes from the front of the game area ( For example, it may be configured to include a second layer 26c) movable in the back direction direction of the gaming board 26 shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, even when the game board and the game frame are integrated, when the game medium gets stuck in the change member and can not flow down, it is possible to easily eliminate the jam of the game medium. it can.

(Means 3) In Means 1, the game board and the play space are fixed so that a space of a predetermined interval (for example, 2 cm) is generated between the front surface of the game area and the transparent member. The change member (for example, the nail 90) for changing the flow direction of the game medium flowing down the game area is provided, and the change member is arranged vertically standing on the front surface of the game area (for example, in FIG. 12) As shown, the nail 90 is disposed upright on the front of the game area 27), the movable surface member movable toward the transparent member while avoiding the change member on the front side of the game area For example, moving surface members 267a to 267e may be provided. According to such a configuration, even when the game board and the game frame are integrated, when the game medium gets stuck in the change member and can not flow down, it is possible to easily eliminate the jam of the game medium. it can.

(Means 4) In the means 2, the changing means is operable from the side opposite to the side having the game area in the gaming board (for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the back side of the gaming board 26) The second layer 26c of the game board 26 can be moved and slid by means of the rail member 26d. According to such a configuration, since the change means can be operated from the opposite side of the game board, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally touching the change means during a normal game.

(Means 5) In the means 3, the gaming machine is provided with moving means (for example, bolts 269a to 269e for moving a moving surface member), and the moving means is the side of the game board having the game area Is configured to be operable from the side opposite to (for example, as shown in FIG. 12, it is operable to the bolts 269a to 269e for the hexagonal wrench from the back side of the game board 26) It is also good. According to such a configuration, since the moving means can be operated from the opposite side of the gaming board, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally touching the moving means during the normal game.

(Means 6) In any of means 1 to 5, the gaming machine has a predetermined number (for example, 50) of gaming media (for example, gaming balls) used in one gaming machine enclosed in the enclosed area The game medium is made to enter the game area, and the game medium having passed through the game area is collected through the collection unit (for example, each winning opening, out port 145, far ball return port 150) provided on the game board A game machine that circulates collected game media in the enclosed area to enter the game area again, and the game medium is transferred to the game area from the entry opening (for example, the discharge port 276a) provided on the game board Through an entry means (for example, a hitting and launching apparatus) to enter, an entry connection (for example, a launching path 276 for connecting the launching port and the hitting and launching apparatus) connecting the entry means and the entry opening, and a recovery unit Game media A recovery connection unit (for example, a recovery mechanism after the ball recovery chamber 189) to be recovered, and a recovery connection unit (for example, winning ball flow down path 147, merging path 702) connecting the recovery means and the recovery unit The unit and the recovery connection are integrated and attached (for example, the launch port 276a, a part of the launch path 276 connecting the strike launch apparatus, the strike launch apparatus and the launch port, a recovery unit, a recovery means, a prize ball The downflow path 147 and the merging path 702 may be configured to be integrated and attached in a manner covered by the cover member 268c and the cover member 272). According to such a configuration, in the enclosed ball type game machine, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally adding a game medium, and to prevent the act of fraud more reliably.

(Means 7) In any one of means 1 to 6, the game board has a presentation opening (for example, an opening for attaching the liquid crystal display 264) for attaching a presentation means (for example, the liquid crystal display 264). ), And a protection member (for example, a glass plate member 266) covering the effect opening may be provided on the front side of the game area. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an injustice that is performed by inserting an unauthorized member from the back side of the effect opening using the effect opening.

It is a front view showing a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which closed the glass door and front frame of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view showing the concrete structure of a game board. It is the front view which looked at the game board from the front. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a perspective view showing a game board unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from diagonally upward on the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from diagonally upper side of a back side in the state which fixed the game board unit to the play space. It is the rear view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side in the state which fixed the game board unit to the play space. It is an explanatory view for explaining an aspect in a case of moving a moving surface member provided in a game area. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the other method of eliminating ball clogging. It is an explanatory view for explaining a case where it is constituted so that a game board and a game slot may be unified and stuck. It is an explanatory view for explaining a case where it is constituted so that a game board and a game slot may be unified and stuck. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining various data memorized in the card unit side and a pachinko machine side and its transmission and reception. It is an explanatory view explaining an outline of a command and response performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a recovery demand. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a recovery response. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a recovery response. It is an explanatory view for explaining recovery processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a communication start demand. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a communication start response. It is an explanatory view for explaining contents of operation directions. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing details of each bit of an operation request in an operation instruction command. It is an explanatory view showing the details of each bit of CU state in the command of operation directions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the error content shown by CU error state in the command of operation instruction | command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decision timing of the operation | movement request | requirement seen from CU side, and the response at the time of being denied by P stand. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of operation response. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of operation response. It is an explanatory view showing the meaning and decision point of the number of various balls included in the response of an operation response. It is an explanatory view showing the meaning and decision point of the number of various balls included in the response of an operation response. It is an explanatory view showing the details of each bit of the game machine state 1 included in the response of the operation response. It is an explanatory view showing the details of each bit of the game machine state 2 included in the response of the operation response. It is explanatory drawing which shows the error content shown by the game-game error state in the response of an operation | movement response. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a communication disconnection request. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a communication disconnection response. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a card insertion request. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a card insertion response. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a card return request. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a card return response. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a mode change request. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of mode change response. It is a figure which shows the aspect of transmission / reception of the command and response between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of detecting communication disconnection by the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of detecting a communication disconnection by the pachinko machine side. It is a figure showing an example of processing with a card unit and a pachinko machine at the time of power supply starting. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when the communication connection of a card unit and a pachinko machine is reconnected. It is a figure which shows an example of a process in the time of the standby which operation of a card unit and a pachinko machine is not performed. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the number of game balls in a pachinko machine runs out during a game. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card | curd is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine at the time of a replay. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine at the time of consuming the balance of a prepaid card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case of performing subtraction of the number of game balls by the instruction | indication of the card unit side. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning a card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking and opening the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when releasing and unlocking the cell (front frame) of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a banknote is inserted into CU and money_receiving | payment is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when performing mode change of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine is not connected when starting a power supply in the state in which a card unit is holding card | curd. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the operation instruction | command (non-request | requirement operation | movement) from a card unit does not reach a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response (response with respect to request | requirement absence) from a pachinko machine does not reach a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction | command (response with respect to an addition request | requirement) from a card unit does not reach a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response (response with respect to an addition request | requirement) from a pachinko machine does not arrive at a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction | command (subtraction request | requirement) from a card unit does not reach a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response (response to a subtraction request | requirement) from a pachinko machine does not reach a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of addition refusal with respect to the addition request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of subtraction refusal with respect to the subtraction request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns a clear refusal response with respect to a clear instruction | indication request | requirement of a card unit. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where the pachinko machine returns a permission denial response to the game permission request of the card unit. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where the pachinko machine responds to the gaming prohibition request of the card unit in response to the prohibition refusal. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of glass door open refusal to the glass door open request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of cell (front frame) open refusal with respect to the cell (front frame) open request | requirement of a card unit. Card unit when power is cut off or communication connection is disconnected during the operation instruction interval period during normal play, and when the same CU and P units are connected and return from the power cut or communication break It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process of and a pachinko machine. A card in the case where power cut or communication connection disconnection occurs in the state where the operation instruction has not been reached during normal play, and the card is restored from the power shutdown or communication disconnection in the same CU and P units connected It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a unit and a pachinko machine. A card when power failure or communication connection disconnection occurs in a state where the operation response has not been reached during normal play, and when the same CU and P units are connected and recovered from the power failure or communication disconnection It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a unit and a pachinko machine. Card unit when power is cut off or communication connection is disconnected during the operation instruction interval period during normal play, and a different CU and P units are connected and the card unit is restored from the power cut off or communication cut off It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process of and a pachinko machine. A card in the case where power cut or communication connection disconnection occurs in a state where the operation instruction has not been reached during normal play, and the card is restored from the power shutdown or communication disconnection in a state where different CUs and P units are connected It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a unit and a pachinko machine. A card in the case where a power failure or communication connection disconnection occurs in an operation response unreached state during normal play, and a card is recovered from a power disconnection or communication disconnection in a state in which different CUs and P units are connected It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a unit and a pachinko machine. Card unit when power is cut or communication connection is disconnected on the CU side before the addition request is reached, and the same CU and P units are connected and recovered from the power or communication cut It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process of and a pachinko machine. When power failure or communication connection disconnection occurs on the CU side at the stage before reaching the operation response to the addition request, and when the same CU and P units are connected and return from the power failure or communication disconnection It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit of and a pachinko machine. Card unit when power is cut off or communication connection is disconnected on the CU side before the addition request is reached, and a different CU and P units are connected and recovered from the power supply or communication break It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process of and a pachinko machine. When power failure or communication connection disconnection occurs on the CU side at the stage before reaching the operation response to the addition request, and recovery from power failure or communication disconnection with different CUs connected to P units It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit of and a pachinko machine. Card unit when power is cut or communication connection is disconnected on the CU side before reaching the subtraction request, and when the same CU and P units are connected and return from power or communication cut It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process of and a pachinko machine. The power was cut off or communication connection was cut on the CU side before the arrival of the operation response to the subtraction request. The same CU and P units were connected and recovered from the power or communication cut. It is a figure showing an example of recovery processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case. Card unit when power is cut off or communication connection is disconnected on the CU side before reaching the subtraction request, and when a different CU and P units are connected and power is restored or communication is restored It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process of and a pachinko machine. Power was cut or communication connection was cut on the CU side before the arrival of the operation response to the subtraction request, and power was restored from the power or communication cut when different CUs and P units are connected. It is a figure showing an example of recovery processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case. Card unit when power is cut or communication connection is disconnected on the CU side before reaching the clear request, and the same CU and P units are connected and recovered from power or communication cut It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process of and a pachinko machine. The power was cut off or communication connection was cut on the CU side before the operation response to the clear request was reached, and power was restored from the power cut or communication cut when the same CU and P units are connected. It is a figure showing an example of recovery processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case. Card unit when power is cut or communication connection is cut on the CU side before reaching the clear request, and the unit is restored from the power or communication cut with different CUs and P units connected It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process of and a pachinko machine. The power was cut off or communication connection was cut on the CU side before the arrival of the operation response to the clear request, and it was recovered from the power cut or communication cut when different CUs and P units are connected. It is a figure showing an example of recovery processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the operation state displayed interlockingly with processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine in a case where ball sharing processing for dividing and transferring game balls (sharing balls) is performed during a game in which a card is inserted. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the ball sharing process which carries out the division | segmentation transfer (ball sharing) of a game ball is performed during the game in which the visitor card was inserted. FIG. 17 is a view showing another example of the process of the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where the ball sharing process of dividing and transferring the game balls (sharing balls) is performed during the game in which the member card is inserted. It is a screen figure of a display when ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when ball sharing processing is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of a display when wagon service is performed. It is a transition screen figure in FIG. It is a screen figure of a display when wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of a display during insertion of a member card. It is a screen figure of a display during insertion of a member card. It is a screen figure of a display during card return. It is a screen figure of a display during card return. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine which shows another example. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a payout control board. 6 is a flowchart showing game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows payment control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the threshold value for determination at the time of abnormality. It is a flowchart which shows an example of abnormality determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of abnormality determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the threshold value change process for abnormality determinations. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control release process at the time of abnormality. It is a flowchart which shows an example of control instruction | command output processing of discharge | emission and transport. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the threshold value table update process for abnormality determination. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a signal transmission / reception process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an abnormality alerting | reporting screen and a radiation | emission stop alerting screen. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display screen which displays the number of enclosed balls. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other specific example of the threshold value for determination at the time of abnormality. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another specific example of the threshold value for abnormality determination. It is a flow chart which shows payment control main processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the threshold value for abnormality determination in 2nd Embodiment. It is the front view which looked at the game field of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a circuit structure of the delivery control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the threshold value for abnormality determination in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the threshold value change process for abnormality determinations in 3rd Embodiment.

Embodiment 1
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, referring to FIG. 1, a plurality of enclosed circulation type pachinko machines (abbreviated as pachinko machines or P units hereinafter) 2 as an example of a game machine are juxtaposed to each game island (not shown) arranged in plurality in the game arcade The card unit (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as CU) 3 of one example of the gaming apparatus is installed at a side position on the predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2 in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 There is. This card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who is not registered as a member, or a member player who has registered as a member in the game arcade. A member's card, which is a game recording medium to be played, and a corresponding pachinko machine using a game value (for example, a card balance, a ball count, a ball count, etc.) owned by a player specified by record information of those cards. It has a function to make the enclosed ball in the machine 2 be bombarded and to be able to play a game. The visitor card and the membership card are constituted by an IC card.

  The pachinko machine 2 has a predetermined number (50 in the present example) of game balls used in the pachinko machine 2 enclosed in the enclosed area (in the present example, the pachinko machine 2). The game ball is made to enter the provided game area 27, and the game ball passed through the game area 27 is collected through the collection portion (in this example, each winning opening, out port 145, far ball return port 150) and collected. It is a filled ball type gaming machine that circulates in the enclosed area in order to make the played ball enter the game area 27 again. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 encloses game balls as an example of a game medium, and the player operates the bat operating handle 25 to drive the bat firing motor 18 (see FIG. 2). It is configured to be able to play a game by inserting the sealing ball into the game area 27 on the front of the game board 26 one by one.

  In addition, as long as the game ball used in the pachinko machine 2 is enclosed in the enclosed area, it is not limited to the one enclosed in the pachinko machine 2 as shown in this embodiment, for example, pachinko A game may be performed by circulating the game balls enclosed in a predetermined area across the aircraft 2 and part of the island facility. Moreover, if it is a game machine of the enclosed ball type, it may apply not only a pachinko machine but a parrot machine of an enclosed ball type, for example.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first-class pachinko machine, and although illustration is omitted, the starting opening 1 and the starting opening 2 in which game balls driven into the game area 27 can win And a variable display device for variably displaying on the basis of a detection signal of a start winning ball in each of the starting openings, and specific identification information in which the display result of the variable display device is previously determined. A variable winning ball device (also referred to as a big winning opening) etc. that is opened by becoming a combination of (for example, all eyes, that is, a combination of symbols in a state where left, center and right are the same symbol). . The starting opening 2 is composed of an electric tulip which can be changed to a first state (for example, open state) which is advantageous for the player and a second state (for example, closed state) which is disadvantageous for the player.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that two variable display devices (a variable display device (1) and a variable display device (2)) capable of changing and displaying symbols are provided. Then, the variable display of the variable display device (1) is executed based on the start winning on the starting opening 1, and the variable display of the variable display (2) is executed based on the starting winning on the start opening 2 Shall be

  It becomes big hit state by the variable winning a prize ball device opening. In addition, the combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, the left middle, the right and the same odd pattern are aligned in the left odd pattern) of the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information of the combination of big hit symbols (all eyes) By becoming a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777), a probability variation big hit state occurs, and a probability fluctuation state (high probability state, that is, a probability variation state) occurs with an increase in the probability of occurrence of big hit after the end of the big hit state. Do. Two large winning openings are provided, one for large winning opening 1 and the other for large winning opening 2. For example, when a big hit occurs on the basis of a winning on the starting opening 1, the big winning opening 1 is in the first state, and on the basis of a winning on the starting opening 2, the big winning opening 2 is in the first state It becomes. Furthermore, in the game area 27, four normal winning openings 1 to 4 are provided.

  In this embodiment, when the large winning opening, the starting opening and the normal winning opening are comprehensively expressed, it is also simply referred to as a winning opening.

  The game balls driven into the game area 27 are collected in one of the winning openings or collected in the out opening 145 (see FIG. 2) without any winning. The game balls that have won the winning opening and the game balls collected in the out port 145 are returned to the hitting position through the collection path in the pachinko machine 2 again. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the game ball at the hitting position is hit again into the playing area 27.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting a bill, a projecting portion 305 which is formed to project forward from the device front, and a card insertion / ejection slot for inserting a membership card or visitor card 309 and the like are provided. The membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309 is received by the card reader / writer 327 (see FIG. 3), and the information recorded in the card is read. In the above-mentioned projecting portion 305, the display card and the number of balls specified by the member card ID and the member ID recorded on the member card are accepted on the side facing the player when the member card is received. Replay button 319 for carrying out a replay game and an IR light receiving unit 315 which receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by a clerk (game clerk) of the game arcade, converts it into an electronic signal and outputs it. (Not shown in FIG. 1) is provided.

  The display unit 312 displays a prepaid balance (also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded in the inserted game recording medium (card), but the number of game balls to be described later and various other information While being displayable, the surface is configured of a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display unit 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, when the number of balls acquired by the player is recorded in the inserted card, it is possible to withdraw from the number of balls and play a game with a pachinko machine, When the played card is a membership card and the number of balls is not recorded and the balls are recorded in the hall management computer 1 or the like, the pachinko machine 2 can play a game by withdrawing from the balls.

  The "reserved balls" are game media deposited in the game arcade, and are generally managed by the hall management computer 1 or other management computer installed in the game arcade. On the other hand, the “number of balls held” is the number of game balls owned by the player as a result of the player playing a game with the gaming machine recorded on the card, and has not been deposited in the game arcade yet It is the number of balls. Generally, the number of balls the player has acquired on the day at the game arcade is referred to as "bearing ball", and the number of balls acquired by the player before the previous day is the number of balls deposited in the game arcade "pool ball". Say.

  The number of balls held may be managed by a management device for number of balls management set in the game arcade. In short, the difference between “balls” and “balls” is the number of balls deposited in the game arcade after the operation for depositing the ball in the game arcade, or is still deposited in the game arcade It is a point of whether it is the number of balls of the stage not being.

  In this embodiment, the ball storage data is not directly recorded in the member card but stored in the higher-level server such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the member card number, and the corresponding balls can be searched based on the member card number. It is done. On the other hand, balls are recorded directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the upper server in association with the card number.

  The bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 302 is taken in by the money discriminator 344 to identify the authenticity and the bill type.

  Further, a lending button 321 and a return button 322 are provided on the front side of the card unit 3. The lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation to withdraw the balance recorded in the inserted card and use it for playing a game by the pachinko machine 2. The return button 322 is an operation button that is operated when the player ends the game and causes the inserted card to store the number of confirmed game balls at the end of the game and discharge it.

  At the lower position of the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2, a display 54, a chance button 56 and a jog dial 57 are provided. The display 54 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and displays a display screen as will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 or FIG. The jog dial 57 is used to select and designate various display items (icons) and the like on the display screen displayed on the display 54 when the player rotates. When the player turns the jog dial 57, the various display items on the display screen displayed on the display 54 are sequentially moved and displayed, and the jog dial 57 is turned. When the player presses the chance button 56 after designating the display item which the player desires to select, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is decided.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2, and here mainly describes the circulation path of the enclosed circulation type game ball.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a turning lever 100 for attaching a game board, and the turning operation of the turning lever 100 enables the game board 26 to be detached. On the other hand, all winning balls winning from the winning opening and the variable winning ball device provided in the game area 27 are collected by the winning ball set cover member 144 and flow down the winning ball flow path 147. On the other hand, the out ball entering the out port 145 joins the winning balls flowing down the winning ball flow-down path 147 and flows down the merging path 702. A merging path detection switch 32 is provided in the merging path 702, and balls flowing down the merging path 702 are detected. Therefore, all the game balls that have entered each winning opening (large winning opening, starting opening, normal winning opening) and the out opening 145 are detected by the merging path detection switch 32.

  On the other hand, the foul ball is discharged from the far ball return port 150 and then detected by the far ball detection switch 33. Thereafter, the foul ball enters the merging path 702. The game balls having flowed down the merging path 702 are guided to the ball collection bag 189.

  From the above, the total number of the game ball number detected by the merging path detection switch 32 and the game ball number detected by the foul ball detection switch 33 passes through the game area 27 after being shot to the game area 27. This is the total number of the game balls collected (the total number of game balls winning in each winning opening, the number of game balls entering the out port 145, and the number of game balls discharged from the far ball return port 150).

  The game balls guided to the ball collection bag 189 are pumped up by the pumping device 190. The lift device 190 incorporates a lift screw which is rotated by a lift motor 40. The rotation of the lift screw causes the game balls to be lifted. On the back of the pumping device 190, polishing members 200a and 200b (200b can not be seen in the drawing) for polishing the gaming balls by contacting with the gaming balls being pumped are provided, and the gaming balls are pumped The surface is polished while being done.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41 b is provided on the ball inlet side (lower side) of the lift device 190, and a ball raising switch (upper) 41 a is provided on the ball discharging side (upper side). A game ball to be pumped is detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a and the ball raising switch (lower) 41b. The game balls which are lifted by the lifting device 190 and detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a are guided to the firing ball guiding path 153 and supplied from the hitting ball outlet 149 to the ball feeding device (not shown). The ball feeding device has a function of feeding the next game ball to the ball hitting position every time the player operates the ball hitting operation handle 25 to hit the game ball once. A game ball fed by the ball feeder is detected by a shot detection switch (not shown), and the shot detection signal is input to the payout control board 17 as described later.

  Furthermore, the game ball excess / min detection switches 42a and 42b are provided in the middle of the circulation path of the game balls (see FIG. 16), and it is detected whether or not the predetermined number (50, for example) of game balls in the circulation path is reached. Do. The game ball excess detection switches 42a and 42b are provided, for example, at predetermined positions of the ball collection rod 189 shown in FIG. 2 (for example, the game ball excess detection switch 42a is separated by a predetermined interval in the ball collection rod 189). And the game ball excess / short detection switch 42b), or when the game ball excess / short detection switch arranged on the downstream side (closer to the shootable area) of the ball collecting rod 189 can not detect the game ball It is determined that the number of game balls is insufficient, or the game ball excess / short detection switch of the one arranged on the upstream side (closer to each winning hole and out hole 145 and far ball return hole 150) of the ball collecting rod 189 When a ball is detected, it may be determined that the number of game balls is excessive.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the floating ball number counter is used to collect the number of gaming balls fired in the game area 27 and any of the winning openings, the out opening 145, and the far ball return opening 150. The difference value with the number of game balls is the number of floating balls (the number of game balls in the state of floating the game area 27 before being collected by the winning opening and the out port 145 and the far ball return port 150 after firing) Is counted, and the value of the floating ball number counter is determined as a threshold to perform abnormal control. Therefore, since excess or deficiency of the number of game balls can be recognized based on the value of the floating ball number counter, it is not necessary to provide the game ball excess / minimacy detection switches 42a and 42b. Also, conversely, for example, instead of the floating ball number counter described later, based on the detection result of the game ball excess and deficiency detection switch 42a, 42b, may be performed abnormal control described later.

  Next, referring to FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a front frame (also referred to as a cell) 5 so as to be openable and closable with respect to the frame-like wooden frame 4 with its left edge as a swing center. There is. Further, a glass door 6 is provided to the main body frame including the wooden frame 4 and the front frame (cell) 5 so as to be openable and closable with the left edge thereof as a swing center. Further, in the present embodiment, the front frame 5 and the glass door 6 constitute a play space. Therefore, it can be said that the pachinko machine 2 is attached to the wooden frame 4 so as to be openable and closable with the left edge thereof as the swing center.

  In this embodiment, as described later, since the transparent member 28 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the game board 26, the glass door 6 may not be provided.

  Near the end edge of the front frame 5 opposite to the swinging center, a pair of upper and lower engagement protrusions 6a and 6b are provided. The engagement protrusions 6a and 6b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b of the wooden frame 4, respectively. By pressing the open front frame 5 against the wooden frame 4, the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b get over the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b, and in a state of getting over the engagement reception pieces 7a and 7b, the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b move downward due to the biasing force of the spring. Move and lock.

  A front frame opening solenoid 11 is provided on the back surface side of the front frame 5, and the front frame opening solenoid 11 is excited to resist the biasing force of the spring, thereby engaging the pair of upper and lower engagement protrusions 6a and 6b. Is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement of the engagement projections 6a and 6b with the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b is released and the lock is released, and the front frame 5 is opened.

  Further, the front frame 5 is also provided with an engagement projection 8 for the glass door 6, and an engagement hole 9 is provided in the portion of the glass door 6 facing the engagement projection 8. The engagement projection 8 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and by pressing the open glass door 6 against the front frame 5, the engagement projection 8 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engagement hole 9 By riding over, the engaging projection 8 is pushed down by the biasing force of the spring, and the engaging projection 8 and the engaging hole 9 are engaged and become in a locked state. In this state, by exciting the glass door opening solenoid 10 provided on the back surface of the front frame 5, the engagement projection 8 is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement projection 8 and the engagement hole 9 And the lock is released, and the glass door 6 is opened.

  A front frame closure detector 13 is provided at a position in the upper portion of the wooden frame 4 in contact with the front frame 5, and it is detected that the front frame 5 is pressed against the wooden frame 4 to be in a locked state. Moreover, the glass door closure detector 12 is provided in the contact part with the glass door 6 in the upper part of the front frame 5, and the glass door 6 is pressed against the front frame 5 and becomes a locked state. It is detected by the closure detector 12.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing a specific structure of the game board 26. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, on the front side of the game board 26 (the side on which the game area 27 is formed), a transparent member 28 formed of an acrylic plate or the like is attached to cover the game area 27. The transparent member 28 is provided with a launch path attachment portion 281 into which a launch port 276a and a launch path 276 described later are fitted. In addition, the transparent member 28 is a fitting for fitting and fixing the transparent member 28 in fitting holes 262a to 262h provided on the game board 26 (two in total in the vicinity of each corner). Protrusions 282a to 282h are provided.

  Further, the upper, lower, left and right edges 261 of the game board 26 are slightly recessed relative to the surface of the game area 27, and when the transparent member 28 is attached to the game board 26, the upper, lower, left and right edges of the transparent member 28 are It engages with the upper, lower, left and right edges 261 of the game board 26. The game board 26 is provided with two (eight in total) fitting holes 262a to 262h in the vicinity of each corner, and the respective fitting projections 282a to 282h provided on the transparent member 28 The game board 26 and the transparent member 28 can be integrated and fixed by being fitted into the fitting holes 262 a to 262 h provided in 26.

  When the transparent member 28 is fixed to the game board 26, a space of a predetermined distance (for example, 2 cm) is generated between the surface of the game board 26 on which the game area 27 is provided and the transparent member 28. Therefore, by providing such a space, a game ball can be launched from the ball striking device and the game ball can be inserted into the game area 27, and the game ball flows down the game area 27 to play a game. Can.

  FIG. 5A shows, as an example, a cross section of a portion of the transparent member 28 in which the fitting projection 282 h is fitted in and fixed to the fitting hole 262 h of the game board 26. In addition, the cross section of the part which inserts and fixes other fitting protrusion 282a-282g in fitting hole 262a-262g is also the same. As shown in FIG. 5A, a metal member 263h including a fitting hole 262h is attached in advance to the game board 26 side, and the fitting projection 282h of the transparent member 28 is fitted to the metal member 263h. It is fixed by being fitted into the hole 262 h. As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the tip of the fitting projection 282h has a bowl-like shape, and the fitting hole 262h is wider at the deepest part than the other parts, and the fitting projection By pushing 282 h into the fitting hole 262 h to the deepest portion, the tip end portion of the fitting projection 282 h is fixed in a state of being caught in the deepest portion of the fitting hole 262 h.

  Therefore, once the fitting projection 282h is fitted and fixed in the fitting hole 262h, the transparent member 28 can not be removed from the game board 26 unless the fitting projection 282h is cut or the like, and the game board 26 and the transparent member 28 can not be removed without a trace. Further, in this embodiment, since the transparent member 28 is integrally fixed to the game board 26, it is possible to eliminate a space into which an unauthorized member such as a piano wire can be inserted into the gaming area 27 It is possible to prevent the fraud that is inserted and performed.

  In addition, "sticking" is fixing in the aspect which can not be removed without a trace when removed. In addition, as long as it is a method which can not be removed without such a trace, the fixing method may be any method. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the gaming board 26 and the transparent member 28 are integrally fixed, the fitting projections 282a to 282h on the transparent member 28 side are fitted to the fitting holes 262a to 262h on the game board 26 side. By means of being fitted and fixed, etc., it is not possible to remove the gap where the illegal member such as the piano wire can be inserted into the game area 27 and to remove the game board 26 and the transparent member 28 without trace. In addition, the method of integrally fixing the game board 26 and the transparent member 28 is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, for example, fixing the transparent member 28 to the game board 26 using a one-way screw or the like. May make it impossible to remove the game board 26 and the transparent member 28 without a trace. For example, you may fix by welding or adhesion | attachment, and you may fix by a rivet or pinning. Alternatively, for example, the game board 26 and the transparent member 28 may be integrated and fixed by fixing them using a breaking screw (in this case, after fixing using a breaking screw, a thread of the breaking screw is provided) The game board 26 and the transparent member 28 can not be removed by breaking the part that is being cut). Also, for example, a method of sticking a sealing seal may be used, and a method such as inserting and fitting a projection for fitting into a hole for fitting by the method as described above may be used. . In addition, when the game board 26 and the transparent member 28 are fixed, a method using a fixing member such as the one-way screw or the break screw as described above may be used, or the fixing, welding, adhesion, etc. may be used. You may use the method of fixing without using a member.

  5B shows a cross section of a portion of the game board 26 to which the liquid crystal display device 264 is attached. As shown in FIG. 5B, in the game board 26, various decoration members 265 are attached from the front side of the game board 26 (the side on which the game area 27 is formed). In addition, a glass plate member 266 is provided on the front side of the game area 27 so as to cover an opening for attaching the liquid crystal display device 264. In addition, as shown to FIG. 5B, the glass plate member 266 is being fixed to the various decoration members 265 grade | etc.,.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, since the glass plate member 266 is provided to cover the opening for attaching the liquid crystal display device 264, for example, for the liquid crystal display device 264 from the back side of the game board 26. The opening portion of the above can be used to prevent a fraudulent act such as that performed by inserting a fraudulent member.

  FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board 26 as viewed from the front. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the transparent member 28 is fitted in and fixed to the game board 26. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, a liquid crystal display (LCD) 264 is provided near the center of the game area 27. As described above, in this embodiment, it is assumed that two variable display devices are provided, and the liquid crystal display device 264 has a variable display area and a variation of a symbol corresponding to the variable display device (1). It is assumed that a variation display area of a symbol corresponding to the display device (2) is provided.

  Further, below the liquid crystal display device 264, there is provided a winning device having a starting opening 130 (starting opening 1) capable of winning game balls. Further, below the winning device having the starting opening 130, a variable winning ball device 140a having a starting opening 140 (starting opening 2) capable of winning game balls is provided. The variable winning ball device 140a is opened by a solenoid. When the variable winning ball device 140a is in the open state, the game ball can be paid to the starting opening 140 (or it becomes easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 140a is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win at the starting opening 140 than at the starting opening 130. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 140a is in the closed state, the game ball does not win (or is hard to win) the starting opening 140. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 140a is in the closed state, the game ball is more likely to win in the starting opening 130 than in the starting opening 140.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, below the variable winning ball device 140a, a special variable winning ball device 120 that forms a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 120 has an opening and closing plate, and a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display (1) or the variable display (2) The opening / closing plate is controlled to be in the open state by the solenoid, so that the big winning opening which becomes the winning area is opened. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the special variable winning prize ball device 120 is formed with two big winning prize openings of the special winning prize opening 1 and the special winning prize opening 2.

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, it is assumed that four ordinary winning openings 1 to 4 are also provided in the game area 27 (not shown).

  Further, as described above, when the transparent member 28 is fixed to the game board 26, a space of a predetermined distance (for example, 2 cm) is generated between the front surface of the game area 27 of the game board 26 and the transparent member 28. However, in the space, a plurality of nails 90 are provided in the game area 27 for changing the flow direction of the game balls flowing down the game area 27. The nails 90 are arranged in a state of being erected vertically to the front surface of the game area 27, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in the game board 26, there are holes for passing the nails 90 on the front side of the game area 27 while avoiding the nails 90 (ie, the moving surface members 267a to 267e). The moving surface members 267a-267e are movable so that they do not interfere with the respective nails 90 by opening the holes 90 so that the nails 90 pass through them in the direction of the transparent member 28 (forward from the player) Plate-like moving surface members 267a-267e are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, five moving surface members 267a to 267e are provided, and when the game board 26 is viewed from the front, all the nails 90 are either moving surface members 267a to Moving surface members 267a-267e are provided to be included in 267e.

  In addition, holes 270a for fixing the actual game board 26 to the front frame 5 of the game space by inserting the protrusions 274a to 274c provided on the front frame 5 side of the game space to be described later into the game board 26. 270c is also provided.

  FIG. 7 is a rear view of the game board 26. As shown in FIG. In the vicinity of the center on the back side of the game board 26, a cover member 268a which covers the liquid crystal display device 264 from the back side is attached. Further, below the cover member 268a, there is attached a cover member 268c which covers the respective prize winning openings and out ports 145 provided in the game area 27 and the prize ball flowing path 147 from the rear side. Further, on the left and right sides of the cover members 268a and 268c, cover members 268b and 268d are attached to cover the respective substrates such as the main control substrate 16 and the payout control substrate 17 described later from the back side. As such, in this embodiment, by sealing the cover members 268a to 268d from the back side, it is possible not to perform an operation such as inserting an incorrect member from the back side. In particular, the game balls are illegally added in the enclosed ball type game machine since the respective winning openings, the out openings 145, and the winning balls flow-down path 147 are integrated and attached in a manner covered by the cover member 268c. Can be prevented, and fraud can be prevented more reliably.

  In addition, an opening 271 is provided in the lower part of the cover member 268c covering each winning opening, the out opening 145, and the winning ball flowing path 147, and a covering member 272 attached to the front frame 5 side of the game frame described later. The prize ball flow-down path 147 is connected to the merging path 702 by being connected to the opening 273 provided in the above.

  In addition, also about each cover member 268a-268d, by fitting a fitting protrusion in a fitting hole with a structure similar to that shown in FIG. 5, or using a one-way screw, each cover member 268a-268d is a game board. It may be integrated and fixed to the back side of 26. For example, you may fix by welding or adhesion | attachment, and you may fix by a rivet or pinning. Alternatively, for example, they may be integrated and fixed by fixing them using a breaking screw (in this case, after fixing using a breaking screw, by breaking the part where the thread of the breaking screw is provided) , And the cover members 268a to 268d can not be removed). Also, for example, a method of sticking a sealing seal may be used, and a method such as inserting and fitting a projection for fitting into a hole for fitting by the method as described above may be used. . In the case of fixing the cover members 268a to 268d, a method using a fixing member such as the one-way screw or a breaking screw as described above may be used, or a fixing member such as fitting, welding or adhesion is used. You may use the method of fixing even if there is not.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the moving surface members 267a to 267e shown in FIG. 6 are movably attached from the back side of the game board 26 using bolts 269a to 269e for a hexagonal wrench, for example. In this embodiment, each moving surface member 267a to 267e can be moved in the direction of the transparent member 28 by turning the bolts 269a to 269e from the back side of the game board 26 using a hexagonal wrench or the like. .

  Next, an assembly process for attaching the game board 26 to the play space will be described. When the transparent member 28 is fixed to the game board 26 in the mode shown in FIG. 5 and the cover members 268a to 268d shown in FIG. 7 are attached to the back side of the game board 26, the game board unit 26a as shown in FIG. Is assembled.

  FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 2 as viewed obliquely from above on the rear side. As shown in FIG. 9, below the front frame 5 of the play space, a hit shooting device including a hit shooting motor 18, a part of a launch path 276 connecting from the strike launch device to the launch port 276a, a merging path 702, A cover member 272 is attached which covers the whole of the foul ball return port 150 and the ball collecting rod 189 from the rear side. As described above, in this embodiment, the lower part of the front frame 5 is also sealed by the cover member 272 from the back side, so that an act of inserting an illegal member from the back side can not be performed. In particular, a part of the firing path 276 to the ball striking device and the launching port 276a, the merging path 702, the far ball return port 150, and the whole ball collecting rod 189 are integrated and attached in a covered manner by the cover member 272. Therefore, in the enclosed ball type game machine, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally adding a game ball, and to prevent an act of fraud more reliably. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, a part of the firing path 276 (a portion from the upper surface of the cover member 272 to the discharge port 276a) is protruded above the cover member 272. It is fitted in and fixed to the emission path attachment portion 281 of the transparent member 28. In addition, it is desirable that the cover member be configured to cover many portions of the emission path 276 as much as possible.

  As for the cover member 272, the cover member 272 is mounted on the back surface of the front frame 5 of the game frame by fitting the fitting projections into the fitting holes with the same structure as that shown in FIG. It may be integrated and fixed to the side. For example, you may fix by welding or adhesion | attachment, and you may fix by a rivet or pinning. Alternatively, for example, they may be integrated and fixed by fixing them using a breaking screw (in this case, after fixing using a breaking screw, by breaking the part where the thread of the breaking screw is provided) , And the cover member 272 can not be removed). Also, for example, a method of sticking a sealing seal may be used, and a method such as inserting and fitting a projection for fitting into a hole for fitting by the method as described above may be used. . Further, when the cover member 272 is fixed, a method using a fixing member such as the one-way screw or the break screw as described above may be used, or a member for fixing such as fitting, welding or adhesion is not used. You may use the method which can also fix.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the gaming board unit 26a assembled in the manner as shown in FIG. 8 is provided on each of the projecting portions 274a to 274c provided on the back side of the front frame 5 of the gaming frame. As shown in the perspective view shown in FIG. 10 and the rear view shown in FIG. 11 by inserting and fitting into the holes 270a to 270c of the 26a and rotating the turning levers 100 (three places) for attaching the game board The game board unit 26a can be fixed to the front frame 5 of the play space in the following manner.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the game board unit 26a is fixed to the front frame 5 of the play space, an opening 271 provided below the cover member 268c of the game board unit 26a, The opening 273 provided above the front frame 5 is in a connected state, and the winning ball flow-down path 147 is connected to the merging path 702 (that is, each winning hole, out-port 145, far ball return) A series of paths for collecting game balls from the mouth 150 to the ball collecting rod 189 through the winning ball flowing path 147 and the merging path 702 are connected).

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory view for explaining an aspect in the case of moving the moving surface members 267 a to 267 e provided in the game area 27. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the mode in the case of moving the moving surface member 267a disposed at the top among the five moving surface members 267a to 267e is shown, but for the other moving surface members 267b to 267e The same is true.

  In the game board unit 26a, as shown in FIG. 12A, a space of a predetermined distance (for example, 2 cm) is generated between the surface of the game board 26 on which the game area 27 is provided and the transparent member 28. By providing such a space, a game ball is fired from the ball striking device and a game ball can be inserted into the game area 27, and the game ball flows down the game area 27 to play a game. be able to.

  Further, when playing a game in the pachinko machine 2, as shown in FIG. 12A, there are many cases where the game ball is caught on the nail 90 provided in the game area 27 and a ball jam occurs. However, in this embodiment, since the transparent member 28 is integrally fixed so as to cover the front surface of the game board 26, even if the glass door 6 is opened, it is impossible to carry out the work of releasing the jam. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a ball jam occurs, the moving game surface members 267a to 267e provided in the game area of the game board 26 are moved forward to remove the stuck game balls, It is configured to be able to eliminate the jammed condition.

  Specifically, when a ball jam occurs, the gaming frame is opened, and a hexagonal wrench 91 is used to watch a bolt 269a for the hexagonal wrench from the back side of the game board 6 as shown in FIG. Turn around. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, the moving surface member 267a is also transparent by moving toward the transparent member 28 (in the forward direction with respect to the player) as the bolt 269a is rotated. It moves in the direction of the member 28. Then, as shown in FIG. 12C, the game ball caught on the nail 90 is pushed out and dropped by the moving surface member 267a, and the jammed state can be eliminated. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12C, when the hexagonal wrench bolt 269a is turned counterclockwise from the back side of the game board 6 using the hexagonal wrench 91, the transparent member 28 and the bolt 269a are rotated. By moving in the opposite direction (toward the player), the moving surface member 267a also moves in the direction opposite to the transparent member 28 and returns to the original state. Return.

  It should be noted that the ball jam is not eliminated by pushing the game ball to the side (front side) of the transparent member 28 by the moving surface member etc., but the ball jam is eliminated by pulling the nail 90 into the game board 26 conversely. You may do so. FIG. 13 is an explanatory view for explaining another method of eliminating the jam. In the example shown in FIG. 13, the game board 26 has a two-layer structure of a first layer 26 b and a second layer 26 c, and a rail member 26 d is attached to the side of the game board 26. The second layer 26c on the back side can be moved to be pulled back in the back side direction by sliding at 26d. However, in the example shown in FIG. 13, the second layer 26 c of the gaming board 26 can be moved by being slid by the rail member 26 d from the back side of the gaming board 26.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13A, each nail 90 is fixed in a state of being erected on the second layer 26c on the back side of the game board 26, and each nail 90 is fixed on the first layer 26b on the front side. The holes for passing the nails 90 are open, and the nails 90 pass through the holes 90, so that the nails 90 are placed on the back side together with the second layer 26c on the back side without the first layer 26b interfering with each nail. It can be moved to pull in.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, when a ball jam occurs, the game frame is opened, and the second layer 26c is slid in the back direction by the rail member 26d as shown in FIG. The second layer 26c is moved to pull in the back direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), the nail 90 is also moved so as to pull in the back direction with the movement of the second layer 26c. Then, as shown in FIG. 13B, since the nail 90 causing the ball clogging is pulled into the inside of the game board 26 and disappears from above the game area 27, the game ball stuck on the nail 90 drops Can eliminate the jam. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13C, the second layer 26c is slid in the front direction by the rail member 26d to move the second layer 26c in the front direction again to return to the original state.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 13, the second layer 26 c is rotated by providing a bolt for a hexagonal wrench which can move the second layer 26 c on the back side as in FIG. 12 and using the hexagonal wrench. It may be configured to be movable so as to retract in the back direction.

  In this embodiment, the game board 26 and the transparent member 28 are integrally fixed and fixed in order to prevent an illegal act performed by inserting an unauthorized member such as a piano wire. However, not limited to such a method, for example, the game board 26 may be integrated and fixed to the game frame to which the transparent member 28 is attached so as to cover the game area 27.

  FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the case where the gaming board 26 and the gaming frame are integrated and fixed. In the example shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, a metal fitting for one way screw fixing is provided with screw holes 101a to 101c for one way screw on the front frame 5 side of the game frame instead of the rotating lever 100 for game board attachment. 101 is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the transparent member 28 covering the game area 27 is attached in advance to the front frame 5 side of the game frame, not to the game board 26 side. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15, in place of the protrusion 274a shown in FIG. 9, a protrusion 275a having a screw hole is provided on the front frame 5 side. Then, as shown in FIG. 15, the game board 26 is inserted into the holes 270a to 270c of the game board 26 in the protrusions 275a to 275c provided on the back side of the front frame 5 of the game space, respectively. Fit and screw in and secure.

  Furthermore, in a state where the game board 26 is screwed to the front frame 5, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), screwing is performed using a one-way screw in the screw hole 101a provided in the metal fitting 101 for fixing one-way screw. Thus, the game board 26 and the play space can be integrated and fixed. That is, since the game board 26 is fixed to the front frame 5 of the play space by using the one-way screw, the game board can not be removed from the play space unless the one-way screw is cut or the like. It becomes impossible to remove 26 and the play space without a trace. In addition, since the transparent member 28 covering the game area 27 is provided on the game frame side, it is possible to eliminate the space where the illegal member such as the piano wire can be inserted into the game area 27 and insert the illegal member. Can be prevented from being In addition, the method of integrally fixing the game board 26 and the game frame is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and may be fixed by welding or bonding, for example. It is also good. Further, for example, the game board 26 and the game frame may be integrated and fixed by fixing them using a breaking screw (in this case, after fixing using a breaking screw, a thread of the breaking screw is provided) The game board 26 and the play space can not be removed by breaking the part where the game is played). Also, for example, a method of sticking a sealing seal may be used, and even if a method such as inserting and fitting a protrusion for fitting into a hole for fitting by the same method as FIG. 5 is used. Good. In addition, when the game board 26 and the game frame are fixed, a method using a fixing member such as the one-way screw or the breaking screw as described above may be used, or a member for fixing such as fitting, welding or adhesion. You may use the method of fixing without using.

  Generally, when changing the model of the pachinko machine 2, the model change is performed by replacing only the game board 26 instead of replacing the entire pachinko machine 2. However, if the game board 26 and the game frame are integrated and fixed, only the game board 26 can not be replaced, and the cost for model change increases. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, three screw holes 101a to 101c are provided in the one-way screw fixing bracket 101, and after the pachinko machine 2 is installed in the game arcade, the game board 26 is performed up to two times. It is possible to change the model only by replacing it.

  For example, when the pachinko machine 2 is first installed in a game arcade, one of the screw holes 101a to 101c provided in the one-way screw fixing bracket 101 is fixed to the screw hole 101a using a one-way screw. Then, when it is necessary to change the model for the first time, the one-way screw fixed in the screw hole 101a is cut to remove the game board 26 of the old model, and as shown in FIG. The bracket 101 is rotated, and the game board 26 of the new model is fixed using a one-way screw in the second screw hole 101b. Furthermore, when the need for a second model change arises, the one-way screw fixed in the screw hole 101b is cut off to remove the game board 26 of the old model, and as shown in FIG. 101 is rotated, and the game board 26 of the new model is fixed to the final third screw hole 101c using a one-way screw. Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the model change of the pachinko machine 2 is possible by exchanging only the game board 26 up to two times.

  In this embodiment, either the method of integrally fixing the game board 26 and the transparent member 28 or the method of integrally fixing the game board 26 and the game frame is performed. Although the case where it inserted to prevent the fraud which is performed is shown, you may use both these two methods. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the game board unit 26a is assembled while the game board 26 and the transparent member 28 are integrated and fixed in a manner as shown in FIGS. In one aspect, the front frame 5 of the play space may be integrally fixed using a one-way screw or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, an outline of control circuits of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a control unit 323 configured of a microcomputer or the like. The control unit 323 includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a random access memory (Random) that functions as a work area of the CPU. (Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like. The control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 or the like, and a gaming machine communication unit 325 for communicating with the payout control board 17 of the pachinko machine 2. It is provided. The card unit 3 is provided with a connection portion 330 to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection portion 20 to the card unit 3 side. The connection units 330 and 20 are configured by, for example, connectors. The gaming machine communication unit 325 and the payout control board 17 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 20 and the connection wiring.

  The authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier 344, and the identification result signal is input to the control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives an infrared ray emitted from a remote controller possessed by a staff at a game arcade, a light reception signal is input to the control unit 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the recorded information of the inserted card, and the read information is input to the control unit 323, and the data written to the inserted card from the control unit 323 to the card reader / writer 327 is When transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card.

  Display data such as the balance or the number of gaming balls is output from the control unit 323 to the display 312, and the display data displayed is displayed by the display 312. In addition, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the control unit 323. When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the control unit 323.

  The pachinko machine 2 includes a main control board 16 for controlling the progression of the pachinko machine 2, a payout control board 17, a launch control board 31, a game ball control unit 34, a launch unit 39, and a presentation unit 50. Is equipped.

  The main control board 16 is mounted with a game control microcomputer. The gaming machine control microcomputer includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The payout control board 17 is mounted with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  In addition, the junction path detection switch 32, the ball detection switch 33, the glass door opening solenoid 10, the front frame opening solenoid 11, the glass door closing detector 12, and the front frame closing detector 13 are electrically connected to the dispensing control substrate 17. It is provided in the state of being connected.

  A connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting opening winning information, error information, number of symbol determinations, big hit information, manufacturer specific big hit information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 is configured to perform operation control on the condition that the payout control board 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a game ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting opening. The payout control board 17 having received the detection signal performs control to add the number of balls to be provided to one of the winning balls to the number of gaming balls and the number of additional balls. This will be described in detail later.

  The starting opening winning combination information is information indicating that the game ball has won in either the starting opening 1 or the starting opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17 to that effect when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control.

  The symbol determination frequency is information of a symbol determined as a display result of the variable display device for winning on the starting opening 1 or the starting opening 2.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred, and the breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each maker and maker unique jackpot information indicating a jackpot unique to a maker. The common jackpot information is, for example, a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine maker, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability change information when a definite change occurs in association with the big hit, and the big hit Accordingly, when a short time state (a control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the short time information is included. The maker-specific jackpot is, for example, a jackpot state adopted only by a certain gaming machine maker, such as sudden change (probability).

  A health check command and a winning ball count acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether the main control board 16 is operating normally. The winning ball number reception command is a command indicating that the number of additional balls has been received.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the merging path detection switch 32 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the out-of-ball detection signal is inputted subtracts and updates the number of playing balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as described later. In the payout control board 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is inputted from the foul ball detection switch 33, as described later, the number of added balls and the number of gaming balls are added and updated, and the number of playing balls is subtracted and updated.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the glass door 6 is unlocked and can be opened as the dispensing control substrate 17 controls the glass door opening solenoid 10 by excitation. When the payout control board 17 controls the front frame opening solenoid 11 by excitation, the front frame 5 is unlocked and can be opened as described with reference to FIG.

  As described with reference to FIG. 3, the glass door closure detector 12 outputs a glass door closure detection signal from the glass door closure detector 12 by pressing the glass door 6 against the front frame 5 and closing the same. As described with reference to FIG. 3, by pressing the front frame 5 against the machine frame 4 and closing it, the front frame closing detection signal is output from the front frame closing detector 13 and input to the payout control board 17.

  The gaming machine communication unit 325 of the card unit 3 and the payout control board 17 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected, and the gaming machine communication unit 325 sends an addition request and a subtraction request to the payout control board 17 as described later. Various commands of game permission / prohibition request, number of requested addition balls, and required number of subtraction balls are transmitted.

  The addition request command is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the game balls are borrowed from the prepaid balance or the replay loan is performed as described later, and the payout control board 17 receives it and adds the number of game balls. Update. The subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when divided transfer of balls (ball sharing process) or wagon service is performed, as described later, and the payout control board 17 having received it receives the number of gaming balls. Subtract and update.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command for requesting the payout control board 17 to permit the game or a command for requesting the prohibition of the game. The required number of balls to be added is a command for designating the number of balls to be added to the number of gaming balls by the above-described addition request command. The required number of balls to be subtracted is a command for specifying the number of balls to be subtracted from the number of gaming balls by the above-described subtraction request command.

  Various responses of the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start balls, the number of determined symbols, the big hit information, and the error information are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the gaming machine communication unit 325. The number of gaming balls is calculated by the payout control substrate 17 based on various signals of the winning detection signal, the starting opening winning information, the out ball detection signal, and the foul ball detection signal transmitted from the main control substrate 16 to the payout control substrate 17. Total number of game balls at the current time. The number of additional balls is the number of additional balls added to the number of gaming balls based on the winning detection signal, starting opening winning information, and foul ball detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. It is. The number of subtraction balls is the number of subtraction balls to be subtracted from the number of game balls based on the firing detection signal transmitted from the game ball control unit 34 described later to the payout control board 17. Each response of the starting opening winning combination information, the number of symbol determinations, the big hit information, and the error information is a response specifying the information transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17 described above.

  The launcher 38 of the game ball control unit is provided with a launch motor 18, a touch ring 35, a single shot launch switch 36 and a launch motor origin sensor 37. The touch ring 35 is for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25 and outputting a signal (touch ring input signal). The emission control board 31 generates an emission motor excitation output when the touch ring input signal is input, and drives the emission motor 18. The single shot firing switch 36 is for performing an operation (single shot firing operation) for the player to hit the game ball into the game area 27 one by one, and when the single shot firing operation is performed, the single shot firing switch 36 is used. A single firing switch signal is output. The firing motor origin sensor 37 detects the origin position of the firing motor 18 and outputs the detection signal, and the origin is detected each time the firing motor 18 makes one rotation, and a signal is output.

  The signal of the touch ring and the detection signal of the single shot switch are input from the launch unit 38 to the launch control substrate 31. Further, a launch detection signal indicating that the game ball has been launched and a detection signal of a launch motor origin sensor are input from the launch unit 38 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 having received the firing detection signal updates the number of subtracted balls and the number of playing balls by 1 and updates the number of gaming balls by 1 with respect to the detection of one fired ball.

  The emission control signal and the emission permission signal are output from the discharge control substrate 17 to the emission control substrate 31. The launch control board 31 having received the signal outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18. As a result, the game ball is in a state of being bombarded to the game area 27.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 2, the lifter 39 provided in the game ball control unit 34 is provided with a lift motor 40, a ball raising switch (upper) 41a, and a ball raising switch (lower) 41b. ing. Further, the transport unit 39 is provided with a game ball excess / minimacy detection switch 1 (42a) and a game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 2 (42b). The game ball excess and deficiency detection switches 1 and 2 are switches for detecting whether or not the total number (for example, 50) of game balls enclosed in the pachinko machine 2 is excessive or insufficient.

  A lift motor excitation output signal for exciting the lift motor 40 is transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the lift unit 39. On the other hand, a signal of lifting detection (pass / full) based on the detection signal of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a and the ball raising switch (lower) 41b is transmitted from the pumping unit 39 to the dispensing control substrate 17. , A replenishment 50 detection signal as a detection signal of the game ball excess detection switch 1 (42a) and the game ball excess detection switch 2 (42b) is input.

  The effect section 50 includes a display effect control board 53, a display power source board 51, a display power source relay board 52, a display 54, a display ROM board 55, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57. It is provided. The display effect control board 53 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a VDP. Then, by inputting a data read signal to the ROM mounted on the display ROM substrate 55, the image data is read, the display data is transmitted to the display 54, and the display 54 is displayed on the display 54. I do. In addition, the button input signal of the chance button 56 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 57 are input to the effect control board 53 for display, and the effect control board 53 for display sends the chance button input signal and the jog dial input to the display 54 Then, the display 54 displays a display screen on which the operation of the jog dial 57 and the operation of the chance button 56 are reflected.

  Power for a predetermined voltage from the display power source substrate 51 is supplied to the display effect control substrate 53 via the display power source relay substrate 52.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the effect control board for display 53. The display control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit operation command, and a test command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 2 such as the number of big hit occurrences or the number of certain variations, and the card unit operation command is a command by the player operating the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the effect unit 50.

  As the command from the payout control board 17 to the effect control board for display 53, the next command is transmitted every 300 ms after the previous transmission of the command. Then, the display effect control board 53 detects a line disconnection when the next command is not received despite the elapse of a predetermined time exceeding 300 ms after the reception of the command, and performs time-over detection processing (error processing). Specifically, if the next command is not transmitted despite the fact that 300 ms has been received since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by one, and when the error count is counted ten times in a row, The effect control board 53 detects a time-out to initialize the communication state, and performs control to display the lighting of the call lamp and the error animation on the display 54.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the main ones of various data stored in each of the CU side and the P base side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CU side manages the current number of game balls by calculating the fluctuation of the number of game balls on the P-unit side. The P game side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls. However, when the number of game balls on the P side becomes 0, the P ball controls to stop the firing of ball by itself quickly. It is a secondary thing used only to do Since the main control of the number of game balls is performed on the CU side, there is no need to provide a function for strictly managing the number of game balls on the P side, and the cost of P units can be minimized.

  In particular, compared with CU, the P unit has a short replacement cycle in the game arcade and replacement is performed early. In relation to that, by giving the main management function regarding the number of game balls on P side to CU side and suppressing the cost of P side, it is possible to reduce the running cost of the game arcade introducing the enclosed type game machine It has the advantage of

  FIG. 17 shows the storage data of the RAM provided in the control unit 323 on the CU side and the storage data of the RAM mounted on the payout control board 17 on the P side. First, when the P unit (pachinko machine 2) and the CU (card unit 3) are installed in the game arcade for the first time and the power is turned on in the electrically connected state, the payout control board 17 on the P unit side is The main control board 16 sends a main chip ID (ID for identifying a game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 16), and transmits the main chip ID to the CU side, and the payout control board 17. A payout chip ID (ID for identifying a payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control substrate 17) stored in itself 17 is transmitted to the CU side.

  The CU side stores the transmitted main chip ID and the payout chip ID. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time when the CU side and the P side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the P side, and the P side stores the transmitted connection time .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the P base side. After that, when the power is turned on, those three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data, are transmitted from the P side to the CU side.

  The CU side collates the transmitted data with the already stored data, and determines whether the same P unit as the previous time is connected. As for connection time data, new connection time data for which communication between the CU side and P unit side is started every time the power is raised is transmitted from the CU side to the P unit side, and the new connection time data Is stored on the P platform side.

  Also, each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted on the CU side and P side, the sequence number (SQN) is updated by adding “1” each time, and the sequence number is stored on the CU side and the P side. Ru. This SQN is a communication number for checking whether the number is updated and communication is properly performed whenever data is transmitted / received between the CU and P units. The SQN is the last updated number of the updated communication number.

  A specific aspect of backup of SQN in CU and P in this embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the P units in the operation instruction, and then, upon receiving the SQN from the P units, rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup into the received SQN. Then, when transmitting the next operation instruction, SQN stored in the backup storage is updated by 1 and transmitted to P units, and the transmitted SQN is backed up and stored. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the P unit, the SQN received from the CU is backed up by the operation instruction, and next, when the operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 addition and transmitted Backup and store sent SQN. Then, when the next operation response is received, the backup SQN is rewritten to the received SQN and stored. Such processing is repeated on the P unit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 76 to FIG. 93, which will be described later, when communication disconnection occurs in the middle of communication, SQN is backed up until communication reconnection, but on P side, communication disconnection Since the operation response is always sent regardless of the occurrence time of (see Figure 69, Figure 76 to Figure 93), the SQN that has been backup-stored until communication reconnection is always sent the last SQN. It has become. On the other hand, the CU side transmits the operation instruction or receives the operation instruction according to the time of occurrence of the communication disconnection (see FIGS. 69 and 76 to 93), and so on until communication reconnection. The SQN which has been stored for an interval is either the one transmitted last or the one received last.

  For example, the CU side transmits a certain operation instruction to the P side, and transmits the sequence number n at that time, and the P side stores the transmitted sequence number n. Then, when an operation response is returned from the P base side to the CU side, the one (n + 1) obtained by adding 1 to the stored sequence number n is also transmitted. On the CU side, it is judged that the data communication was normally performed because 1 is added to the already-stored sequence number n + 1 which has already been stored, and the sequence number is incremented by one when the operation instruction is sent next time. Then, the n + 2 sequence number is sent to the P base.

  Next, the ball related information (ball related information being counted) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. The current ball related information is stored in the current ball related information storage area of the RAM. Specifically, when the game ball thrown into the game area 27 wins and the added ball number information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, the added ball number counter is added by the added ball number counter. The counting is performed, and the value of the addition ball number counter (number of addition balls) is transmitted from the P-unit side to the CU side. In addition, when the game ball is shot into the game area 27 and the launch ball is detected by the launch ball detection switch, the subtraction ball number counter counts the number of launch balls as the subtraction ball number based on the detection signal, and subtraction thereof The value of the ball number counter (subtracted ball number) is transmitted from the P base side to the CU side.

  Furthermore, in the case where the game ball has won the starting opening 1 or the starting opening 2 and the starting opening 1 winning signal or the starting opening 2 winning signal has been transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, the payout control board 17. The number of winnings is counted by the starting opening 1 winning number counter or the starting opening 2 winning number counter, and the count value is transmitted from the P base side to the CU side. Furthermore, the payout control board 17 counts the number of gaming balls at the current time based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls using the gaming ball number counter, and the count value of the gaming ball number counter is from P to CU side Send to

  On the P stand side, every time the values of the addition ball number counter, subtraction ball number counter, starting opening 1 winning counter, starting opening 2 winning counter, and gaming ball number counter are sent to the CU side, those count values are used last time After storing (rewriting) as backup data in the related information storage area, the values of the added ball number counter, the subtracted ball number counter, the starting opening 1 winning number counter and the starting opening 2 winning number counter as current ball related information are cleared to 0. . In the present embodiment, "clear" has the same meaning as "initialization".

  As a result, in the storage area of the last ball related information (the current ball related information transmitted immediately before), the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting opening 1 wins, which are the current ball related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before And, data of the starting opening 2 winning number is stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each current counter at the time of the next transmission but also the value of each previous counter which was not transmitted when the ball related information is not currently transmitted from the P base to the CU. It is for enabling transmission.

  On the CU side, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), total number of winning openings for starting opening 1 (total of starting opening 1 times) The starting opening 2 total winning number (totaling 2 starting openings) and the number of game balls are stored.

  The total additional balls number and the number of gaming balls are updated based on the value of the additional ball number counter (number of additional balls) transmitted from the P-base side. In addition, the total number of subtracted balls and the number of gaming balls are updated based on the value of the number-of-subtracted ball counter (number of subtracted balls) transmitted from the P-base side. Furthermore, based on the value of the starting opening 1 winning number counter transmitted from P units, the starting opening 1 total winning number is updated, and based on the value of the starting opening 2 winning number counter transmitted from P side Start opening 2 Update the total number of winnings. As described above, the CU can manage the latest number of game balls by updating the number of game balls according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from the P-unit. Similarly, the CU manages the latest information by updating the total additional number of balls, the total number of subtractive balls, the total number of starting openings 1, 2 and the total number of total winnings according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from P units. It is possible to

  Note that the breakdown of the “number of added balls” is the game ball obtained number information and the back ball added information, which will be described later. A back ball is a foul ball. In addition, "subtractive ball number" is also referred to as gaming ball firing number information.

  In addition to the values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, the CU receives the count value of the gaming ball number counter (also referred to as the number of gaming balls or the total number of gaming balls) in addition to the values of the addition ball number counter and the subtraction ball number counter. The number of game balls stored by itself is updated based on the values of the addition ball number counter and the subtraction ball number counter, and the count value of the game ball number counter sent from the P-base side is not used. For this reason, even if the number of game balls sent from the P-unit side does not match the number of game balls managed by the CU side, the game in which the number of game balls on the CU side has been sent from the P-unit side It will not be updated with the number of balls.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the gaming ball number counter transmitted from the P-unit side with the current gaming ball number updated on the CU side, and determines the consistency as to whether or not they match.

  The CU sends normal (normal) operation request (command) and normal (normal) operation response with P units on condition that determination (match confirmation) is made to match (match). Continue receiving the response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control to shift to the error state, the CU performs recovery processing and transmits a command of communication start request to P units, and the number of game balls of P units is determined by the data of Bit 2 of the data correction request included in the command The game ball total number information is corrected to the number of game balls after correction (game ball total number information) on the CU side. In addition, although it correct | amends to the number of game balls managed by CU side as a process to correct | amend, it replaces with it and the number of game balls managed by CU side and the game memorized by P stand side It may be corrected to an average value with the number of balls.

  Also, instead of such correction processing, for example, an error notification is performed by the display unit 312, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management The error notification may be performed by the computer 1), and a predetermined notification may be performed to urge an artificial response by a person in charge.

  As described above, the CU receives the values of various counters transmitted from the P-unit side, and calculates and manages the number of gaming balls at the current time based on the value of the addition / subtraction ball number counter. It has a main management function. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function on the P unit. By that amount, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the side of P for the purpose of prohibiting the game immediately when the number of game balls reaches zero. However, the game ball number counter for storing the number of game balls may not be provided on the P platform side.

  The CU performs a game ball number match determination process of checking whether the calculated game ball number at the current point in time and the value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P base side match or not. And a function of performing control to shift to an error state when there is no match (error control at the time of mismatch).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the number of gaming balls is stored also on the P side, it is determined whether the number of gaming balls matches the number of gaming balls managed and stored on the CU side. It is possible to do it (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of gaming balls stored on the gaming machine side does not match the number of gaming balls managed and stored on the CU side due to improper behavior or other circumstances, that effect can be checked. In addition, although the determination function is provided on the CU side here, for example, the game management apparatus 1 for halls connected to the CU stores the number of game balls stored on the CU side and the game stored on the P base side The number of balls may be received, and it may be determined whether or not both match.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the CU further has a storage area for storing balls (pooled balls) and a storage area for storing the card balance of the accepted (inserted) card. The control unit 323 (see FIG. 16) of the CU holds in response to an input requesting use of balls (for example, pressing input of a replay button (replay button) 319 (see FIG. 16) provided on the CU). A predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area storing the balls. In addition, the control unit 323 (see FIG. 16) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area storing the card balance in response to an input requesting the use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation to use for a game by deducting the value from the gaming-use value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls held, or the number of balls stored) owned by the player, the amount of the withdrawal The number of requested addition balls for adding the number of balls to the gaming ball number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the P base side. In response to that, on the P side, the game ball counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, when an operation to order a so-called wagon service is performed such that a game value owned by a player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink etc., the number of balls required for subtraction of the game value owned by the player is CU side Transmitted to the P platform side. On the P side, in response to that, the game ball counter is decremented and updated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 18, an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the pachinko machine will be described.

  FIG. 18 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, and the name of transmission information and its outline. First, a command called recovery request is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This recovery request command is for requesting transmission of recovery information to P units. Also, a response of a recovery response is sent from the P units to the CU. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information held by P units to the CU.

  In addition, a command of a notification start request is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This notification start request command requests P to clear the recovery information and back up the connection ID (communication start time). Also, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from the P units to the CU. The response of this communication start response is to notify the CU of the clearing of the recovery information and the end of backup of the connection ID (communication start time).

  Also, a command of operation instruction is transmitted from the CU to the P units. The command of the operation instruction instructs the P units to perform various operations (game operations), and requests transmission of game table information (addition / subtraction data etc.) such as game balls. The CU uses this command to periodically check the state of the game console. Further, the response of the operation response is transmitted from the P units to the CU. The response of this operation response is to notify the CU of the execution result of the game operation instruction and the game machine information such as game balls (addition / subtraction data etc.).

  Also, a command of communication disconnection request is transmitted from the CU to P units. The command for communication disconnection request is for requesting the P units to disconnect the communication connection. Also, a response to the communication disconnection response is transmitted from the P units to the CU. The response to the communication disconnection response is to notify the CU that the communication disconnection request command has been received.

  Also, a command of a card insertion request is transmitted from the CU to the P units. The command for card insertion request is to notify the card insertion (insertion of a visitor card or a membership card) to P units. Also, a response of a card insertion response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU. The response to the card insertion response is to respond the card insertion to the CU.

  Also, a command of a card return request is sent from the CU to the P unit. The card return request command is to notify the P unit of card return (return of visitor card or membership card). In addition, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU. The response of this card return response is to return a card return to the CU.

  Also, a command of mode change request is transmitted from the CU to the P units. The command of the mode change request requests the P unit to change the mode (change to an operation mode, a test hitting mode, a maintenance mode, or a test mode described later). Further, a response of mode change response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU. The response of the mode change response is to send the mode change result to the CU.

  Next, contents of the command / response shown in FIG. 18 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  First, referring to FIG. 19, the recovery request command transmitted from the CU to the P device requests the P device to transmit recovery information. As shown in FIG. 19, the recovery request command is an 18-byte command that includes a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC: Message Authentication Code). is there. As shown in FIG. 19, the command code of the recovery request command is 0x03. Further, since the recovery request command only requests transmission of recovery information, it does not include specific data, and the command size is 0 byte.

  In FIG. 19, the format column indicates the data format of data in the command / response, BIN indicates binary data, BCD indicates decimal data, and HEX indicates hexadecimal data. Moreover, in this embodiment, each command and each response are encrypted and transmitted / received, but the encryption column indicates the data to be encrypted in the command / response, and the circle marks indicate the encryption target. It shows that there is. The same applies to each command and each response shown in FIG.

  Further, in this embodiment, in FIGS. 19 to 44, the names of the commands and responses are simply command names, the sizes of the commands and responses are command lengths, and the communication direction is a command direction, without particularly distinguishing between commands and responses. And so on.

  The response of the recovery response transmitted from the P unit to the CU shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 is for transmitting the recovery information held by the P unit to the CU. As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the response of the recovery response includes a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, information of each specific data, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). The command is 68 bytes long. As shown in FIG. 20, the command code of the response of the recovery response is 0x13, and the command size of the specific data is 50 bytes.

  As specific data of the recovery response, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the connection time of 6 bytes, the final sequence number of 1 byte, and the C-ID of 8 bytes (ID of visitor card or member card) There are the last ball related information and the current ball related information.

  The connection time is the connection time that was backed up by P units. The final sequence number is the sequence number backed up by P units, and is the sequence number transmitted by P units to CU last. Moreover, C-ID is C-ID which was backed up by P units.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 20, the last ball related information includes 2 bytes of game ball acquisition number information, 1 byte of back ball addition information, 1 byte of game ball launch number information, and 1 byte of out ball Passing information, 1 byte symbol fixed frequency 1 information, 1 byte symbol fixed frequency 2 information, 1 byte starting opening 1 information, 1 byte starting opening 2 information, 1 byte starting opening 3 information , 1 byte big winning opening 1 information, 1 byte big winning opening 2 information, 1 byte winning opening 1 information, 1 byte winning opening 2 information, 1 byte winning opening 3 information, 1 byte The winning opening 4 information of is included.

  The game ball obtained number information is the game ball obtained number information (the number of game balls obtained by winning) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time. Further, the back ball addition information is back ball addition information (the number of additions of far balls) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time. Further, the game ball launch number information is the game ball launch number information (the number of the launched game balls) notified by the response transmitted last time to the CU. In addition, out ball passing information is out ball passing information (the game ball which has passed through the out port 145) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time.

  Further, the symbol determination number 1 information is the symbol determination number 1 (the number of times the symbol display has been performed by the variation display device (1)) notified by the response transmitted last time to the CU. Further, the symbol determination frequency 2 information is the symbol determination frequency 2 (the number of times the symbol display is performed by the variation display device (2)) notified by the response transmitted last time to the CU. In the gaming machine provided with only one variable display device, for example, only the symbol determination frequency 1 information may be used, and zero data may always be stored in the symbol determination frequency 2 information.

  Further, the starting opening 1 information is the number of starting opening 1 times (the number of times the starting opening 1 has won) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time. Further, the starting opening 2 information is the number of starting openings 2 times (the number of times the starting opening 2 has won) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time. Further, the starting opening 3 information is the number of starting openings 3 times (the number of times of winning in the starting opening (3)) notified to the CU by the response transmitted last time. In this embodiment, only the two starting openings of starting opening 1 and starting opening 2 are provided, so only starting opening 1 information and starting opening 2 information are used, and always 0 for starting opening 3 information. Data is stored. When the gaming machine is configured to have three starting openings, all of the starting opening 1 information to the starting opening 3 information may be used. Further, in the gaming machine provided with only one starting opening, for example, only the starting opening 1 information may be used, and 0 data may be always stored in the starting opening 1 information and the starting opening 2 information.

  Further, the special winning opening 1 information is the number of the special winning opening 1 number (the number of times winning in the special winning opening 1) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time. Further, the special winning opening 2 information is the number of times of receiving the special winning opening 2 times (the number of times winning in the special winning opening 2) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time. In the gaming machine provided with only one big winning opening, for example, only the big winning opening 1 information may be used, and zero data may always be stored in the big winning opening 2 information.

  Further, the winning opening 1 information is the number of times of the winning opening notified to the CU by the response transmitted last time (the number of times of winning in the normal winning opening 1). Further, the winning opening 2 information is the number of winning openings 2 times (the number of times winning in the normal winning opening 2) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time. Further, the winning opening 3 information is the winning opening 3 times (the number of times of winning in the normal winning opening 3) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time. Further, the winning opening 4 information is the number of times the winning opening 4 times (the number of times of winning in the normal winning opening 4) notified by the response transmitted last time to the CU. In this embodiment, four normal winning openings are provided. However, a gaming machine provided with only one to three normal winning openings and a game without a normal winning opening are provided. In the machine, it is sufficient to always store 0 data regarding the winning opening 1 to 4 information which becomes unnecessary according to the number of regular winning openings.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 21, the current ball related information includes 3 bytes of total game ball number information, 2 bytes of game ball obtained number information, 1 byte of back ball addition information, and 1 byte of game ball Launched number information, 1 byte out ball passing information, 1 byte symbol fixed frequency 1 information, 1 byte symbol fixed frequency 2 information, 1 byte starting opening 1 information, 1 byte starting opening 2 information , 1 byte start opening 3 information, 1 byte big winning opening 1 information, 1 byte big winning opening 2 information, 1 byte winning opening 1 information, 1 byte winning opening 2 information, 1 It includes the winning opening 3 information of the byte and the winning opening 4 information of 1 byte.

  The game ball total number information is the number of game balls currently held in P units. The game ball acquisition number information is the game ball acquisition number information (the number of game balls acquired in the game) currently held in P units. Further, the back ball addition information is the back ball addition information (the number of additions of far balls) currently held in the P unit. In addition, the game ball launch number information is the game ball launch number information (the number of the launched game balls) currently held in P units. Further, the out ball passing information is the out ball passing information (the game ball which has passed through the out port 145) currently held in the P-unit.

  Further, the symbol determination number 1 information is the symbol determination number 1 currently held in P units (the number of times the symbol display is performed by the variation display device (1)). Further, the symbol determination frequency 2 information is the symbol determination frequency 2 (the number of times the symbol display is performed by the variation display device (2)) currently held in P units. In the gaming machine provided with only one variable display device, for example, only the symbol determination frequency 1 information may be used, and zero data may always be stored in the symbol determination frequency 2 information.

  Further, the starting opening 1 information is the number of starting openings 1 currently held by the P car (number of times the starting opening 1 has won). Further, the starting opening 2 information is the number of starting openings 2 currently held by the P car (number of times the starting opening 2 has won). In addition, the starting opening 3 information is the number of starting openings 3 times (the number of times of winning in the starting opening (3)) currently held in P units. In this embodiment, only the two starting openings of starting opening 1 and starting opening 2 are provided, so only starting opening 1 information and starting opening 2 information are used, and always 0 for starting opening 3 information. Data is stored. When the gaming machine is configured to have three starting openings, all of the starting opening 1 information to the starting opening 3 information may be used. Further, in the gaming machine provided with only one starting opening, for example, only the starting opening 1 information may be used, and 0 data may be always stored in the starting opening 1 information and the starting opening 2 information.

  Further, the special winning opening 1 information is the number of times of the special winning opening currently held in P (the number of times of winning in the special winning opening 1). In addition, the special winning opening 2 information is the number of the special winning opening 2 times (the number of times winning in the special winning opening 2) currently held in P units. In the gaming machine provided with only one big winning opening, for example, only the big winning opening 1 information may be used, and zero data may always be stored in the big winning opening 2 information.

  Further, the winning opening 1 information is the number of times of the winning opening 1 currently held in P (the number of times of winning in the normal winning opening 1). Further, the winning opening 2 information is the number of winning openings 2 currently held in P (the number of times the normal winning opening 2 has been won). Further, the winning opening 3 information is the number of winning openings 3 currently held in P (the number of times the normal winning opening 3 has been won). Further, the winning opening 4 information is the number of times the winning opening is currently held in P units (the number of times the normal winning opening 4 has won). In this embodiment, four normal winning openings are provided. However, a gaming machine provided with only one to three normal winning openings and a game without a normal winning opening are provided. In the machine, it is sufficient to always store 0 data regarding the winning opening 1 to 4 information which becomes unnecessary according to the number of regular winning openings.

  Each concrete data (connection time, last sequence number, C-ID, each data of previous ball related information, each current data of current ball related information) shown above is data to be backed up by P units. is there. However, zero value is set at the time of factory shipment or when the backup data is undefined.

  Here, recovery processing performed by the CU will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for describing recovery processing performed by the CU. When communication with P units is resumed (reconnected), the CU acquires P unit chip IDs (main chip ID, payout chip ID) by the chip ID authentication sequence as described later, and also responds to the recovery response. Receive the response of and obtain the communication start time (connection time during recovery response). Then, the CU uses the acquired chip ID and the communication start time to determine whether P is the same as the other party to which P was connected last time. In this case, in the chip ID authentication sequence, the CU determines whether the acquired chip ID matches the chip ID backed up by the CU itself. Also, the CU receives the response of the recovery response, and determines whether the acquired communication start time coincides with the communication start time backed up by the CU itself. Then, as shown in FIG. 22A, when the chip IDs match and the communication start time matches, the CU determines that the same P units as in the previous time are connected. In addition, if at least either the chip ID or the communication start time do not match, the CU determines that P different from the previous one is connected.

  Next, the CU executes the process of recovering the number of gaming balls using the result of the match determination of the communication counterparts shown in FIG. 22 (a) and the sequence number in the recovery response. In this case, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the CU is determined that the communication partner matches, and the SQN (final sequence number in the recovery response) recognized on the P base side is backed up by the CU itself. If it is one ahead of the SQN you are doing, add the number of previous added balls for which P is backing up and the current number of additional balls to the number of gaming balls for which CU is backing up, and P for backup The previous subtraction ball number and the current subtraction ball number are subtracted to obtain the corrected game ball number. In addition, if it is determined that the communication partner matches, but the SQN recognized on the P unit side is one more advanced than the SQN backed up by the CU itself, the CU backs up The current added ball number backed up by the P unit is added to the existing game number, and the current subtracted ball number backed by the P unit is subtracted to obtain the corrected game number. In addition, when it is determined that the communication partner is not in agreement, CU sets the number of game balls backed up by the CU as it is as the number of game balls after correction.

  The number of additional balls is information obtained by adding back ball addition information to the number-of-game-balls acquired information in the recovery response. In addition, the subtraction ball number is the game ball emission number information in the recovery response.

  When the previous communication is disconnected, if the CU can not receive the data transmitted by the P unit, the sequence number held by the P unit is advanced by one. In this case, as shown in FIG. 22B, the CU recovers the number of game balls using also the data that could not be received (the number of previous added balls, the number of last subtracted balls).

  In addition, when the communication partner does not match, the CU does not automatically correct the game ball. In addition, since the P unit displays the unsent data when the CU is not connected, if there is the unsent data, the gaming clerk should manually correct the number of game balls of the card using a POS terminal or the like. .

  Next, the CU uses out-of-the-ball passage information, symbol determination frequency 1 information, symbol determination frequency 2 information, using the result of coincidence determination of the communication partner shown in FIG. 22 (a) and the sequence number in the recovery response. Start opening 1 information, start opening 2 information, start opening 3 information, large winning opening 1 information, large winning opening 2 information, winning opening 1 information, winning opening 2 information, winning opening 3 information and winning opening 4 information recovery processing Execute each. In addition, these out ball passing information, symbol fixed frequency 1 information, symbol fixed frequency 2 information, starting opening 1 information, starting opening 2 information, starting opening 3 information, big winning opening 1 information, big winning opening 2 information, winning The mouth 1 information, the winning opening 2 information, the winning opening 3 information and the winning opening 4 information are collectively referred to as the number of game history balls.

  As shown in FIG. 22C, the CU is determined that the communication partners match, and the SQN (final sequence number in the recovery response) recognized on the P base side is backed up by the CU itself. When one is ahead of SQN, the previous game history ball number and current game history ball number backed up by P units to the number of game history balls backed up by the CU (each game history ball during recovery response) Number) is added, and it is set as the game history ball number after amendment. In addition, if it is determined that the communication partner matches, but the SQN recognized on the P unit side is one more advanced than the SQN backed up by the CU itself, the CU backs up The current number of gaming history balls backed by P units (the number of gaming history balls in the recovery response) is added to the number of gaming history balls present, and the number is set as the corrected number of gaming history balls. In addition, when it is determined that the communication partner is not in agreement, CU sets the number of game history balls backed up by the CU as it is as the number of game history balls after correction.

  The communication start request command transmitted from the CU to the P units shown in FIG. 23 requests the P units to correct the game ball and the sequence number and back up the new communication ID (communication start time). As shown in FIG. 23, the communication start request command has a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, a 6-byte connection time, a 1-byte data correction request, a 1-byte sequence number, The command has a command length of 29 bytes including 3-byte gaming ball data and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 23, the command code of the command of communication start request is 0x05, and the command size of specific data is 11 bytes.

  As specific data of the communication start request, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 23, there are connection time, data correction request, sequence number and data of the game ball. The connection time is a time when communication between the CU and the P units is started, which is held by the CU and transmitted from the CU to the P units. And this connection time is used as a connection ID of communication.

  In the data correction request, the CU requests the P units to correct the data, and is configured by 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7. Bit 0 is a bit for specifying the presence or absence of a clear request. When the bit is "0", no clear request is specified, and when "1", the clear request is specified. When there is a clear request, a request is made to the P unit to clear the backup data held on the P unit side, such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “additional ball number”, “subtractive ball number”, etc. to zero.

  Bit 1 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a request for correction of the sequence number. In the case of "0", no request for correction of the sequence number is specified, and in the case of "1", the request for correction for the sequence number is specified.

  Bit 2 is a bit for specifying the presence or absence of the game ball correction request. When "0", no game ball correction request is specified, and when "1", game ball correction request is specified.

  In the flowcharts of FIG. 45 and thereafter, the Bit specifying the presence or absence of a request is expressed as “no request” when it is “0”, and it is expressed as the request exists when it is “1”. For example, when Bit 0 of the data correction request is “1”, it is expressed as “clear request present”, and when it is “0”, it is expressed as “clear request no”. Further, in this embodiment, “clear request” is also expressed as “recovery clear”, “sequence number correction request” as “SQN correction”, and “game ball correction request” as “game ball correction”.

  The sequence number (also referred to as SQN) is the sequence number stored in the CU. The game ball data is the number of game balls stored in the CU.

  The CU performs backup of the connection time and backup of the “main chip ID” and the “dispense chip ID” when transmitting the command of the communication start request.

When the P unit receives this communication start request, it performs the following processing.
In the case of the clear request ON, the backup data held on the P-unit side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of reduced balls” etc. is cleared to 0.

  When the sequence number correction request is ON, the sequence number held by the P unit is overwritten on the notified sequence number.

  In the case of the game ball correction request ON, the game ball held in P is overwritten on the notified game ball.

Backup connection time.
In addition, each process performed by said P base is performed in an order from the top.

  The response to the communication start response transmitted from the P units to the CU shown in FIG. 24 is to notify the CU that the data correction and the backup of the communication ID (communication start time) have ended. As shown in FIG. 24, the response to the communication start response is a command of 18 bytes in length including a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 24, the command code of the response of the communication start response is 0x15. Also, since the response of the communication start response is only for notifying the backup end, it does not include specific data, and the command size is 0 byte.

  The command of the operation instruction transmitted from the CU to the P unit shown in FIG. 25 is “add game ball”, “subtract game ball”, “play permission / prohibition”, “game ball and sequence number” for P unit Commanding the "clear" operation and requesting transmission of various game table information. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of P units. As shown in FIG. 25, the command for operation instruction is a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, a 1-byte operation request, a 2-byte CU state, and a 3-byte addition / subtraction request ball number , A 2-byte card balance, a 1-byte CU error status, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 25, the command code of the operation instruction command is 0x06, and the command size of specific data is 10 bytes. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, specific data of the command of the operation instruction includes an operation request, a CU state, the number of requested addition / subtraction balls, a card balance, and a CU error state.

  As the operation request in the operation instruction command, 7 bits of data of Bit 0 to Bit 6 are transmitted from the CU to P units. For Bit 0, when "1", the game ball count addition request is instructed, and when "0", the game ball count addition request no is instructed. For Bit 1, when “1”, the game ball subtraction request is instructed, and when “0”, the game ball subtraction request is instructed. With regard to Bit 2, when “1” is set, a game permission request is instructed, and when “0”, a game permission request is instructed.

  For Bit 3, when “1” is set, a game prohibition request is instructed, and when “0”, no game prohibition request is instructed. For Bit 4, when “1” is set, a request for clearing the number of game balls and the sequence number is given, and when “0”, no request for clearing the number of game balls and the sequence number is given.

  Bit 5 is used for a glass door open request, and Bit 6 is used for a cell (front frame) open request.

  In this embodiment, "game ball count addition request" is also simply referred to as "addition", "game ball count subtraction request" is simply referred to as "subtraction", and "game prohibition request" is also simply referred to as "prohibition request". In other words, "request for clearing game ball count and sequence number" is simply referred to as "clear request", and "glass door open request" is simply referred to as "glass open request".

  When a plurality of bits among Bit0 to Bit6 are "1", P units are sequentially executed from Bit0.

  As the CU state in the command of the operation instruction, 10-bit data of Bit 0 to Bit 9 are transmitted from the CU to the P units. When "1" is set for Bit 0, a card insertion processing indication is instructed. When "1" is set for Bit 1, a card return processing display is instructed. When Bit 1 is “1”, a payment in-progress display is indicated. When "1" is set for Bit 3, addition display (card insertion) is instructed. When "1" is set for Bit 4, addition display (prepaid lending) is instructed. When "1" is set for Bit 5, addition display (replay) is instructed. When “1” is set for Bit 6, subtractive display (ball division) is instructed. Subtraction display (wagon service) is instructed when Bit 7 is "1". When Bit 8 is "1", clear display is instructed. When Bit 9 is "1", a break display is instructed.

  Further, the number of requested addition / subtraction balls is a value to be added to or subtracted from the game balls. Specifically, when Bit 0 in the operation request is “1”, the number of addition / subtraction request balls indicates a value to be added to the game ball. Further, when Bit 1 in the operation request is “1”, the number of addition / subtraction request balls indicates a value to be subtracted to the game ball.

  The card balance is the balance of the card inserted in the CU.

  The CU error state is an error code of an error occurring in the CU. When an error has not occurred in the CU, the values of each bit in the CU error state are all 0.

  FIG. 26 is an explanatory view showing the details of each bit of the operation request in the command of the operation instruction. As shown in FIG. 26, the game ball count addition request of Bit 0 is set to “1” at the timing of prepaid consumption and storage ball replay, and transmitted from the CU. Then, when the P unit receives the command of the operation instruction to specify the game ball number addition request, the number of addition request balls to the number of game balls held in the P unit (number of addition / subtraction request balls in command of operation instruction) The value of In addition, the game ball number subtraction request of Bit 1 is set to “1” at the timing common to the wagon service and the game ball and transmitted from the CU. Then, when the P unit receives the command of the operation instruction to specify the game ball number subtraction request, the number of subtraction required balls from the number of game balls held in the P number (addition, subtraction required number of balls in command of operation instruction) Subtract the value of

  Further, the game permission request of Bit 2 is set to “1” at the timing of switching from the game prohibition to the game permission, and transmitted from the CU. Then, when receiving the command of the operation instruction for designating the game permission request, the P unit permits the game of the P unit. In addition, the gaming prohibition request of Bit 3 is set to “1” at the timing of switching from gaming permission to gaming prohibition, and is transmitted from the CU. Then, when receiving the command of the operation instruction for designating the game prohibition request, the P unit prohibits the game of the P unit.

  In addition, the clearing request of the number of game balls of Bit 4 and the sequence number is set to “1” at the timing of card return and transmitted from the CU. Then, when receiving the command of the operation instruction to specify the clearing request of the number of gaming balls and the sequence number, the P unit clears the gaming ball and the sequence number held by the P unit to zero.

  In addition, when the glass door is opened, the glass door open request for Bit 5 is set to “1” and transmitted from the CU. Then, when the P-unit receives the command of the operation instruction to specify the glass door open request, the P-unit opens the P glass door. In addition, the cell open request of Bit 6 is set to “1” when the cell (front frame) is released, and is transmitted from the CU. Then, upon receiving the operation instruction command for designating the cell open request, the P unit opens the P unit cells.

  In addition, the P unit comprehensively determines the “game permission / prohibition” set by the command of the operation instruction from the CU, the number of remaining game balls held in the P unit, the error state of the P unit, etc. Then, it is determined whether or not the game ball is fired. Also, the timing at which the P unit changes the setting value of "game permission / no game" is as follows. That is, when a command of an operation instruction for designating a game permission request is received from the CU, the P unit sets the game permission. In addition, when a command of an operation instruction for designating a game prohibition request is received from the CU, or when a communication disconnection is detected, the power of the P cars is activated, and the P car is set to the game prohibition.

  FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram of details of each bit of the CU state in the command of the operation instruction. As shown in FIG. 27, if the display during card insertion processing of Bit 0 is set to “1”, in the state from the insertion of the card to the CU until the balance is determined (inquiring state to the host device) It shows that there is. In addition, if the card return processing in progress display of Bit 1 is set to “1”, it indicates that the card return button is pressed until the card is returned. Also, if the in-payment display of Bit 2 is set to “1”, it indicates that the state is from when cash is deposited to CU until it is determined.

  In addition, if the addition display (card insertion) of Bit 3 is set to “1”, it indicates that the game ball addition (card insertion) is being expressed after the card is inserted into the CU. . In addition, if the addition display (prepaid lending) of Bit 4 is set to “1”, it indicates that CU is expressing a game ball addition (prepaid lending). Further, if the addition display (replay) of Bit 5 is set to “1”, it indicates that CU represents a game ball addition (replay payout). In addition, if during subtraction display of Bit 6 (ball division) is set to “1”, it indicates that CU represents a game ball subtraction (ball division). Further, if the subtraction display (wagon service) of Bit 7 is set to “1”, it indicates that CU represents the game ball subtraction (wagon service).

  In addition, if the clear display of Bit 8 is set to “1”, it indicates that after a clear request of the game ball and the sequence number, the state of expressing clear by CU is shown. Also, if the break display of Bit 9 is set to “1”, it indicates that the CU is expressing a break.

  The information on the CU status in the command of the operation instruction is provided to perform display control on the P platform side, and the P platform is shown in FIG. 27 based on the information on these CU statuses. Control to display the content may be performed or may not be performed.

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram of an error content indicated in a CU error state in a command of operation instruction. As shown in FIG. 28, when the code 0xC0 is set in the CU error state in the command of the operation instruction, it indicates that the ball has detected an abnormality in the ball. Also, when the code 0xC1 is set, it indicates that the base abnormality is detected in the CU. Further, when the code 0xC2 is set, it indicates that the illegal winning is detected in the CU.

  Here, the sequence number designated in the operation instruction command will be described. In this embodiment, the sequence number takes a value in the data range of 0 to 255, and when it is counted up to the maximum value 255, the value returns to 0 next. The CU counts up the sequence number by 1 each time it transmits a command of operation instruction (however, it does not count up when resending the same command). Also, when transmitting a command of operation instruction specifying an operation request, the CU backs up the sequence number and the request content of the operation request.

  Upon receipt of the operation instruction command, the P unit backs up the value obtained by incrementing the sequence number in the received operation instruction command by one, and transmits to the CU an operation response response including the incremented sequence number. Further, when the sequence number in the command of the received operation instruction is one behind the sequence number being backed up, the P-unit determines that the command of the operation instruction is resent.

  When the command of the operation instruction resent is received, the P-unit performs the following processing. First, in order to prevent double execution of addition and subtraction, the P unit does not refer to the bit of “Bit 0: game ball addition request” or “Bit 1: game ball subtraction request” in the operation request. Also, the P transmits a response of the operation response to the CU. In this case, the P unit sets and transmits the following values as ball-related information. As the number of game balls, the latest number of game balls is set and transmitted. As the number of additional balls, a value obtained by adding the current number of additional balls to the previously transmitted value is set and transmitted. As the subtraction ball number, a value obtained by adding the current subtraction ball number to the previously transmitted value is set and transmitted. As the starting opening 1 number of times information, a value obtained by adding the current number of starting opening 1 times to the value transmitted last time is set and transmitted. As the starting opening 2 number information, a value obtained by adding the current starting opening 2 number to the value transmitted last time is set and transmitted.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory view showing the determination timing of the operation request viewed from the CU side and the response when it is rejected by P units. As shown in FIG. 29, the game ball addition request is decided at the timing when the command of the operation instruction is transmitted. Then, when being rejected by the P unit, the CU disconnects the communication (specifically, transmits a communication disconnection request command). Further, the game ball subtraction request is decided at the timing when the response of the operation response is received without being rejected by the P unit. Then, if rejected by the P unit, the CU cancels the subtraction request. Further, the clear request is decided at the timing when the response of the operation response is received without being rejected by the P unit. Then, if rejected by the P unit, the CU cancels the clear request.

  Further, the game permission request is decided at the timing when the response of the operation response is received without being rejected by the P unit. Then, when being rejected by the P unit, the CU transmits a command of an operation instruction to designate a game permission request until being permitted by the P unit. Further, the game prohibition request is decided at the timing when the response of the operation response is received without being rejected by the P-unit. Then, when being rejected by the P-unit, the CU transmits a command of an operation instruction for designating a game prohibition request until being prohibited by the P-unit.

  Further, the request for opening the glass is decided at the timing when the response of the operation response is received without being rejected by the P-unit. Then, if rejected by the P unit, the CU cancels the glass open request. Further, the cell open request is decided at the timing when the response of the operation response is received without being rejected by the P unit. Then, when being rejected by the P unit, the CU cancels the cell open request.

  The response of the operation response transmitted from the P unit to the CU shown in FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 is to notify the CU of the result of execution of the instructing operation and the gaming machine information such as the number of gaming balls. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the response of the operation response includes a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, information of each specific data, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). The command length is 41 bytes. As shown in FIG. 30, the command code of the response of the operation response is 0x16, and the command size of the specific data is 24 bytes.

  As specific data of the operation response, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, there are a 1-byte sequence number, a 1-byte execution result, current ball related information, and gaming machine information.

  The sequence number is a value obtained by incrementing the sequence number received by the operation instruction command by one.

  As an execution result, data is transmitted from the P unit to the CU as 7-bit data of Bit 0 to Bit 6. For Bit 0, when "1", the execution result of the game ball count addition rejection is shown, and when it is "0," the execution result of not rejecting the addition of the game ball count is shown. For Bit 1, the execution result of the game ball number subtraction refusal is shown when “1”, and the execution result of not rejecting the subtraction of the game ball number is shown when “0”.

  For Bit 2, the execution result of gaming permission denial is indicated when “1”, and the execution result indicating that the gaming permission is not rejected is indicated when “0”. With regard to Bit 3, when “1”, the execution result of the game prohibition refusal is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result of the effect that the game prohibition is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 4, "1" indicates that the number of game balls and the execution result of sequence number clear rejection are shown, and if "0", the result that the number of game balls and sequence number clear have not been rejected is shown.

  For Bit 5, when “1” is shown, the execution result that the opening of the glass door is refused is shown, and when “0”, the execution result that the opening of the glass door is not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 6, "1" indicates that the execution result of refusing the release of the cell is displayed, and "0" indicates that the execution result of not rejecting the cell release.

  In this embodiment, "rejecting addition to the number of gaming balls" is simply referred to as "rejecting addition rejection", "rejecting the subtraction of game balls" is simply referred to as "subtraction rejection", and "reproduction permission rejection" is simply referred to as "permission rejection" Also, "no game ban refusal" is simply referred to as "prohibition refusal", "play number of balls and sequence number clear refusal" is simply referred to as "clear refusal", and "glass door open refusal" is simply referred to as "glass open refusal" It also says.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the ball related information includes 3 bytes of game ball total number information, 2 bytes of game ball obtained number information, 1 byte of back ball addition information, and 1 byte of Game ball firing number information, 1 byte out ball passing information, 1 byte symbol fixed frequency 1 information, 1 byte symbol fixed frequency 2 information, 1 byte starting opening 1 information, 1 byte starting opening 2 information, 1 byte start opening 3 information, 1 byte big winning opening 1 information, 1 byte big winning opening 2 information, 1 byte winning opening 1 information, 1 byte winning opening 2 information , 1-byte winning opening 3 information, 1-byte winning opening 4 information is included.

  The “playing ball total number information” is the current number of playing balls (the number of playing balls as a result of calculation of addition and subtraction). The “playing ball obtained number information” is the number of obtained game balls, and when there is a plurality of winnings in one transmission, it is the number information added up.

  "Back ball addition information" refers to the number of back balls (fall balls) when fired by the launch unit 34 (see FIG. 16), and when there are multiple back balls in one transmission, the number added up Information. The “playing ball number information” refers to the number of balls fired by the shooting unit 34 (see FIG. 16), and is the information of the number obtained by adding the plurality of fired balls in one transmission. The “out ball passing information” is the number of gaming balls (out balls) that have passed through the out port 145, and when there are a plurality of out balls at the time of one transmission, it is information of the number added.

  The "symbol determination number 1 information" is symbol determination information for the winning of the starting opening 1, and "1" is added when symbol variation is stopped. The "symbol determination number 2 information" is symbol determination information for the winning of the starting opening 2, and "1" is added when symbol variation is stopped.

  The “starting opening 1 information” is the winning combination information (the number of winnings) of the starting opening 1 and is incremented by “1” when winning in the starting opening 1. The “starting opening 2 information” is the winning combination information (the number of winnings) of the starting opening 2 and “1” is added when the starting opening 2 is won. The “starting opening 3 information” is the winning combination information (the number of winnings) of the starting opening 3 and is incremented by “1” when winning in the starting opening 3. However, in this embodiment, since only two starting openings of the starting opening 1 and the starting opening 2 are provided, a value of 0 is always set in the starting opening 3 information.

  The "big winning opening 1 information" is the winning information (number of winnings) of the big winning opening 1, and "1" is added when winning in the high winning opening 1. The “big winning opening 2 information” is the winning information (number of winnings) of the big winning opening 2 and “1” is added when winning in the big winning opening 2.

  The "winning opening 1 information" is the winning information (number of winnings) of the normal winning opening 1, and "1" is added when the normal winning opening 1 is won. The “winning opening 2 information” is the winning information (number of winnings) of the normal winning opening 2, and “1” is added when the normal winning opening 2 is won. The "winning opening 3 information" refers to winning information (number of winnings) of the normal winning opening 3, and "1" is added when the normal winning opening 3 is won. The “winning opening 4 information” is the winning information (number of winnings) of the normal winning opening 4, and “1” is added when the normal winning opening 4 is won.

  In addition, the gaming machine information is for notifying the CU of the state of the gaming machine (P units), and as shown in FIG. 31, specifically, 1-byte gaming machine state 1 and 1-byte The game state 2 and the 1-byte game error state are included.

  The gaming machine state 1 is data consisting of bits Bit0 to Bit5. When Bit 0 is "0", the gaming permission state is designated, and when it is "1", the gaming prohibition state is designated. When Bit 1 is "0", standby is specified, and when "1", game is specified.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the number of gaming balls 0 is specified, when Bit 3 is “1”, game completion is specified, and when Bit 4 is “1”, it is specified that the gaming machine is in a reset state. When Bit 5 is "1", it is specified that there is gaming machine history information.

  The game state 2 is composed of each bit data of Bit0 to Bit7, and when Bit0 is "1", the jackpot is in middle 1; when Bit1 is "1", the jackpot is middle 2; when Bit2 is "1", the jackpot 3 is middle, When Bit 3 is “1”, it is specified that the jackpot is being displayed during the big hit 4 and when Bit 4 is “1”. Further, when Bit 5 is “1”, it is specified that the base is high, when Bit 6 is “1”, high probability, and when Bit 7 is “1”, “waiting for customer”.

  In the gaming machine error state, an error code of an error occurring in the gaming machine is designated.

  FIG. 32 and FIG. 33 are explanatory diagrams showing the meaning and the determination point of the number of various balls included in the response of the operation response. The meaning of the number of balls and the content of the determination point are as shown in FIG. 32 and FIG.

  The game ball total number information is the number of game balls held by P units. The CU corrects the number of game balls held by the CU itself using “playing ball gain number information”, “back ball addition information” and “playing ball shot number information” shown below, and then the P game is performed. It is checked whether the number of balls matches the number of game balls of the CU itself. If the number of game balls does not match, the CU transmits a command for designating game stop to the P game.

  The game ball obtained number information is the number of balls to be added to the number of game balls by the "prize ball" (however, "the number of requested addition balls transmitted from CU" is not included). The CU adds the present data to the number of game balls held by the CU itself. When the CU receives the present data without holding the card, the CU does not add the number of game balls.

  Back ball addition information is the number of balls added to the number of game balls by "back ball" (Fall ball) when fired (however, "the number of addition request balls transmitted from CU" is not included. ). The CU adds the present data to the number of game balls held by the CU itself. When the CU receives the present data without holding the card, the CU does not add the number of game balls.

  The game ball firing number information is the number of balls to be subtracted from the game balls by ball firing (however, "the number of subtraction required balls" transmitted from the CU is not included). The CU subtracts the present data from the number of game balls held by the CU itself. When the CU receives the present data while holding no card, the CU does not subtract the number of game balls. In addition, the CU does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by the CU itself is zero.

  The out ball passage information is information of the ball (the passage of the game ball of the out port 145) which has been determined to be fired. The CU uses this data to check the operation of the game console.

  The symbol determination frequency 1 and the symbol determination frequency 2 refer to the symbol determination information for the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 1 and the starting opening 2, respectively. Use

  The number of starting openings 1 times, starting openings 2 times and starting openings 3 times are respectively starting openings 1, starting openings 2 and starting openings 3 of P units (in this embodiment, however, the gaming machine includes starting openings 1 and starting openings). CU is the number of winnings of the game ball to the two starting ports (only 2), and this data is used to check the operating status of the game console.

  The large winning opening 1 and the large winning opening 2 are the number (number) of winnings of the game balls to the P large winning opening 1 and the large winning opening 2, and the CU is an operating state of the game stand (P) Use this data for checking.

  The winning opening 1 to winning opening 4 is the number (number) of winnings of the game balls to the normal winning openings 1 to 4 of P units, and the CU uses this data to check the operating state of the game console.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory view showing the details of each bit of the game state 1 included in the response of the operation response.

  The game permission state / game prohibition state in Bit 0 of the game state 1 indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited by the CU, and the P units which have received an instruction by the command from the CU are instructed Transition to the When a communication error occurs, the P unit itself shifts to the game prohibited state.

  During the waiting / playing in Bit 1, it is data indicating whether the fan (player) is playing (is firing a ball), and the fan (player) is not firing a ball while waiting The game is in progress with the fan (player) firing a ball. Specifically, if Bit 1 is “0”, it indicates that it is in standby, and if Bit 1 is “1”, it indicates that it is in game.

  The number of game balls 0 in Bit 2 is data indicating whether or not the remaining number of game balls is zero.

  The completion of the game of Bit 3 indicates whether or not the firing of the ball is stopped at P, and then all the game balls thrown into the game area 27 are recovered and the whereabouts of all the fired balls are determined. It is. Specifically, if Bit 3 is “0”, it indicates that the game is not completed (all balls are undecided), and if Bit 3 is “1”, the game is completed (all balls will be removed) In addition, P unit, when it can not be confirmed completion of the game more than 15 seconds after stopping the firing of the ball, time out, it is assumed that the game is completed .

  The gaming machine reset in Bit 4 indicates an initial reset signal of the gaming machine (P units), and sets “1” for 30 seconds after activation of the P units.

  The presence of gaming machine history information in Bit 5 indicates whether or not gaming machine history information such as "the number of times of start" and "the number of big hits" is held in P units. Specifically, if Bit 5 is “0”, it indicates that the gaming machine history information is not held, and if Bit 5 is “1”, it indicates that the gaming machine history information is held. When the game machine history information is cleared by clearing the RAM, the P unit turns off this data. The P unit turns on this data at timing when data such as the number of start times and the number of big hits is added after the RAM is cleared. In addition, since the CU matches the game machine history information with the P unit, when it is detected that this data is off, the game machine history information held by the CU itself is also cleared.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory view showing the details of each bit of the game state 2 included in the response of the operation response.

  The big hit 1 of Bit 0 is set to “1” in the big hit middle and the small hit. The big hit 2 of Bit 1 is set to “1” in the big hit medium, small hit medium and high base. The big hit 3 of Bit 2 is set to "1" at the big hit middle (only the high hit big hit). The big hit 4 of Bit 3 is set to '1' in the big hit (big hit only on high base) and high base.

  During the big hit end display of Bit 4, “1” is set at the end of the big hit. During the high base of Bit 5, “1” is set in the high base. During the high probability of Bit 6, "1" is set in the high probability. While waiting for a customer at Bit 7, "1" is set while waiting for a customer.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing an error content indicated in a gaming machine error state in the response of the operation response. As shown in FIG. 36, when the code 0x81 is set in the gaming machine error state in the response of the operation response, it indicates that the main control board has detected a false winning error. When the code 0x82 is set, it indicates that the radio control sensor error is detected by the main control board. When the code 0x83 is set, it indicates that the magnet control error is detected by the main control board.

  Further, when the code 0x41 is set, it indicates that the power control of the card unit is detected by the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x42 is set, it indicates that the power control 1 of the main control board is detected by the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x43 is set, it indicates that the power control 2 of the main control board is detected by the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x44 is set, it indicates that the communication control with the CU is detected by the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x45 is set, it indicates that the communication control 1 between the payout control board and the main control board is detected. Further, when the code 0x46 is set, it indicates that the communication control circuit 2 with the main control board is detected by the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x47 is set, it indicates that the delivery control board detects a reception command abnormality 1 with the main control board. Further, when the code 0x48 is set, it indicates that the delivery control board detects a reception command abnormality 2 with the main control board. Also, when the code 0x49 is set, it indicates that the delivery control board detects a reception command abnormality 3 with the main control board.

  Further, when the code 0x4A is set, it indicates that the opening control error of the glass door or the cell (front frame) is detected by the payout control board. When the code 0x4B is set, it indicates that the operation control error of the firing motor is detected by the payout control board. Also, when the code 0x4C is set, it indicates that the discharge control board detects the detection of the origin of the launch motor. When the code 0x4D is set, it indicates that the firing speed error 1 is detected by the payout control board. When the code 0x4E is set, it indicates that the firing speed error 2 is detected by the payout control board. When the code 0x4F is set, it indicates that the game ball shortage error 1 is detected by the payout control board. When the code 0x50 is set, it indicates that the game ball transport error 1 is detected by the payout control board. When the code 0x51 is set, it indicates that the game ball shortage error 2 is detected by the payout control board. When the code 0x52 is set, it indicates that the game ball transport error 2 is detected by the payout control board. When the code 0x53 is set, it indicates that the game ball transport error 3 is detected by the payout control board.

  In addition, when the code 0x54 is set, it indicates that the game ball excessive error is detected by the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x55 is set, it indicates that the game completion detection error 1 is detected by the payout control board. When the code 0x56 is set, it indicates that the game completion detection error 2 is detected by the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x57 is set, it indicates that the game ball under detection error is detected by the payout control board. When the code 0x58 is set, it indicates that the game board jam error is detected by the payout control board. When the code 0x59 is set, it indicates that the foul ball detection error 1 is detected by the payout control board. When the code 0x5A is set, it indicates that the foul ball detection error 2 is detected by the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x5B is set, it indicates that the out-out ball detection error 1 is detected by the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x5C is set, it indicates that the out-out ball detection error 2 is detected by the payout control board. Also, when the code 0x5D is set, it indicates that the ball removal switch error is detected in the payout control board. Also, when the code 0x5E is set, it indicates that the ball removal motor origin sensor error is detected by the payout control board. Also, when the code 0x5F is set, it indicates that the ball removal error is detected in the payout control board.

  The command of the communication disconnection request transmitted from the CU to the P devices shown in FIG. 37 requests the P devices to disconnect the communication connection. As shown in FIG. 37, the communication disconnection request command is an 18-byte command including a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 37, the command code of the communication disconnection request command is 0x07. Further, since the command of the communication disconnection request only requests the disconnection of the communication connection, it does not include specific data, and the command size is 0 byte.

  The response to the communication disconnection response transmitted from the P units to the CU shown in FIG. 38 is to notify the CU that the communication disconnection request command has been received. When the communication disconnection request command is received, the P unit disconnects the communication connection, and stops the game (the firing of the ball). As shown in FIG. 38, the response to the communication disconnection response is an 18-byte command response including a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 38, the command code of the response to the communication disconnection response is 0x17. Further, since the response of the communication disconnection response only notifies the reception of the communication disconnection request command, the response does not include specific data, and the command size is 0 byte.

  The command for the card insertion request transmitted from the CU to the P unit shown in FIG. 39 notifies the card ID of the inserted card to the P unit. As shown in FIG. 39, the card insertion request command has a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, an 8-byte card ID, a 1-byte card type, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC And a command length of 27 bytes including. As shown in FIG. 39, the command code of the card insertion request command is 0x08, and the command size of specific data is 9 bytes.

  Among the specific data of the card insertion request command, the card ID indicates the ID of the card inserted in the CU. The card type indicates the type of card inserted in the CU. In this case, if the value designated by the card type is 0x00, it indicates that the card inserted in the CU is a general card (visitor card). If the value specified in the card type is 0x01, it indicates that the card inserted in the CU is a membership card. If the value specified in the card type is 0x02, it indicates that the card inserted in the CU is a test card.

  The response of the card insertion response transmitted from the P unit to the CU shown in FIG. 40 is to transmit a response to the card insertion request to the CU. As shown in FIG. 40, the response of the card insertion response has a command length 19 including a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, a 1-byte processing result, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). It is a byte response. As shown in FIG. 40, the command code of the response of the card insertion response is 0x18, and the command size of the specific data is 1 byte.

  The processing result, which is specific data of the response of the card insertion response, indicates the processing result for the card insertion request from the CU. If the value designated by the processing result is 0x00, it indicates that the processing result is OK. Further, if the value designated by the processing result is 0x01, it indicates that the processing result is NG. However, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the processing result is not NG.

  The command for the card return request transmitted from the CU to the P unit shown in FIG. 41 is for transmitting the card return request to the P unit. As shown in FIG. 41, the card return request command is an 18-byte command that includes a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 41, the command code of the card return request command is 0x09. Further, since the command of the card return request is only to transmit the card return request, it does not include specific data, and the command size is 0 byte.

  The response of the card return response transmitted from the P unit to the CU shown in FIG. 42 is to transmit the card ID received at the time of card insertion to the CU. As shown in FIG. 42, the response of the card return response is 1 byte command code, 1 byte command size, 1 byte processing result, 8 byte card ID, 1 byte card type, 16 This is a 28-byte command response including a byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 42, the command code of the response of the card return response is 0x19, and the command size of the specific data is 10 bytes.

  Among the specific data of the response of the card return response, the processing result indicates the processing result for the card return request from the CU. If the value designated by the processing result is 0x00, it indicates that the processing result is OK. Further, if the value designated by the processing result is 0x01, it indicates that the processing result is NG. However, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the processing result is not NG. When the gaming machine is configured such that the processing result may be NG, if the processing result is NG, the card ID and the card type in the response of the card return response shall be undefined values. Do.

  Further, the card ID indicates the ID of the returned card. The card type indicates the type of the returned card. In this case, if the value designated by the card type is 0x00, it indicates that the returned card is a general card (visitor card). If the value specified in the card type is 0x01, it indicates that the returned card is a membership card. If the value specified in the card type is 0x02, it indicates that the returned card is a test card.

  The command of the mode change request transmitted from the CU to the P units shown in FIG. 43 requests the P units to shift the operation mode. As shown in FIG. 43, the mode change request command is a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, a 1-byte mode shift specification, a 1-byte mode shift additional information, and a 16-byte message authentication. It is a command with a command length of 20 bytes including a code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 43, the command code of the mode change request command is 0x0A, and the command size of the specific data is 2 bytes.

  Of the specific data of the command of the mode change request, the mode transition designation indicates the type of the operation mode to be shifted, and is configured by eight bits of Bit0 to Bit7. If Bit 0 is set to “1”, it indicates transition to the operating mode. Also, if Bit 1 is set to “1”, it indicates transition to the trial hitting mode. Also, if Bit 2 is set to “1”, it indicates transition to the maintenance mode. Also, if Bit 3 is set to “1”, it indicates transition to the test mode. Note that Bit4 to Bit7 are unused bits.

  The mode transition additional information indicates the detailed contents at the time of mode transition.

  The response of the mode change response transmitted from the P units to the CU shown in FIG. 44 is for transmitting a response to the mode change request to the CU. As shown in FIG. 44, the response of the mode change response has a command length 19 including a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, a 1-byte processing result, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). It is a byte response. As shown in FIG. 44, the command code of the response of the mode change response is 0x1A, and the command size of the specific data is 1 byte.

  The processing result, which is specific data of the response of the mode change response, indicates the processing result for the mode change request. If the value designated by the processing result is 0x00, it indicates that the processing result is OK. Further, if the value designated by the processing result is 0x01, it indicates that the processing result is NG.

  Next, processing executed by the CPU in the control unit 323 of the CU and processing executed by the CPU mounted on the payout control board 17 will be described based on FIGS. 45 to 97. FIG. In the following description, "the number of game balls" indicates the total number of game balls, and "the number of additional balls" indicates the number of balls obtained by adding the number information of game balls acquired and the back ball addition information. The "subtractive ball number" indicates the number of game ball firing number information.

  First, with reference to FIG. 45, an aspect of transmission and reception of commands and responses between the CU and P units will be described. A command is sent from the CU to the P unit, and the P unit responds to the command and sends a response back to the CU. After the CU receives the response, the CU transmits the next command to P, and P responds to the command and sends a response back to the CU. As shown in FIG. 45, the period from when the CU receives a response from P units to when it transmits the next command is controlled to 200 ms, or 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both the command and the response are transmitted between the CU and the P at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, in the P unit, since 100 game balls are hit in the game area 27 in one minute by operating the hit operation handle 25, the hit time firing interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received during one shot of the ball.

  Therefore, from P to CU, the response of the operation response for notifying the change amount of the number of game balls is transmitted one after another at intervals shorter than the firing time interval of the balls. As a result, the P unit can finely notify the CU of the amount of change in the number of game balls. On the other hand, CU enables point management that closely reflects the change in point on P side.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this, for example, the transmission interval may be P emission intervals It is also conceivable to match.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, processing when communication disconnection is detected on the CU side will be described. If a response can not be received by one second after the CU transmits a command to P, the same command is transmitted to P again. Furthermore, if a response can not be received within one second after that, the second retransmission of transmitting the same command to P units is performed. If a response can not be received from P units by one second after the second retransmission, the CU determines that communication is abnormal at this stage. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector 330 or 20 shown in FIG. 16 is disconnected, the connection wiring is broken, or the P unit is powered off.

  After 5 seconds after determining that the communication is abnormal, the CU sends an authentication request to the P-unit to start the connection sequence again. The specific contents of the authentication request will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the process in the case where the communication disconnection is detected on the P side will be described. A command is sent from the CU to the P, and the P sends a response to the CU in response to the command. Next, when the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P unit continues for 1 second, the P unit determines that the communication is disconnected, and stops the driving of the bat firing motor 18 to prohibit the game. , Transition to the unconnected state. The cause of occurrence of the communication disconnection may be disconnection of the connector 330 or 20, disconnection of the connection wiring, or power disconnection of the CU, as in the case described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, processing of a connection sequence at the time of power activation will be described. The process of the connection sequence of FIG. 48 is a process executed at the time of resuming communication after the communication between the CU and the P unit is normally completed. Specifically, it is executed at the time of resuming communication after the power of the CU is turned off in the standby mode (see FIG. 50) in which the card is not inserted. A typical example is the case where the business day of the game arcade is ended and the power is turned off, and the power is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, when the power is turned on, the ball hitting and firing motor 18 is stopped on the P unit to stop the game and then the communication is started. First, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU. In this communication control IC authentication sequence, between the CU and the communication control IC inside the CU (specifically, between the control unit 323 inside the CU and the gaming machine communication unit 325), for example, the control unit 323 and Processing such as authenticating various IDs backed up with each other by the gaming machine communication unit 325 is performed.

  Then, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P units. In this case, the P-unit transmits the held chip ID (main chip ID, payout chip ID). Then, the CU performs authentication of P units by determining whether or not the chip ID received from P units matches the chip ID that the CU itself has backed up.

  Next, the CU sends a recovery request command to P units. In the P unit that has received it, recovery data backed up in the P unit (specifically, the payout control board 17) is set and sent back to the CU as a recovery response. The recovery data includes connection time, last SQN (sequence number), last ball related information, and current ball related information. To be precise, the various data shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 are referred to as “recovery data” in the subsequent flowcharts, and to be precise, it is the various data shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. In this embodiment, the “final SQN” included in the recovery data is, as described above, the SQN transmitted last by P units.

  The CU that has received this recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. In the example shown in FIG. 48, the connection time (communication start time) included in the recovery response corresponds to the communication start time backed up by the CU itself, and the CU is connected to the same P unit as the previous time. It is determined that the recovery process is to be performed. This recovery process is a process to recover the integrity of each other's data between CU and P, and it is not only executed at the time of power supply start, but also trouble occurred and recovered as described later Sometimes it is also done.

  The CU counts up this SQN (sequence number) each time it transmits an "operation instruction". However, it does not count up when resending the operation instruction. The CU backs up the SQN and its request content upon transmission of the “operation request”. The P unit stores the SQN received by the “operation instruction” and sends it back to the CU by the “operation response”. When the P unit receives the same SQN operation instruction as the previously received SQN, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU resends the operation instruction as the resend command.

  After the recovery processing is completed, the CU updates the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time to the values received from P, updates the sequence number to "0", and requests communication start (recovery clear ON). Send the command of P to P. In response to that, the P unit clears the recovery data and backs up the data of the new connection time received from the CU. Then, the P unit returns a communication start response to the CU. After this, between the CU and the P, transmission and reception of the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are performed.

  As described above, the CU increments the sequence number (SQN) by one each time this operation instruction is transmitted. First, in the first operation instruction, an operation instruction command of no game permission request and SQN = 0 is transmitted to the P-unit. In the P unit, the data of SQN = 1, the previous addition ball number = 0, the last subtraction ball number = 0, the previous start opening 1 count = 0, and the previous start opening 2 count = 0 is backed up. In addition, the P unit clears the value of each counter of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings, and the number of starting openings 2 times, which are current ball related information, to zero. And as for the P unit, as the operation response, SQN = 1, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of starting openings 1 = 0, the number 2 of starting openings = 0, and gaming prohibited ( Send the response of the game stop state to the CU.

  The CU that has received the operation response backs up SQN = 1 based on the operation response, and calculates the current number of gaming balls 0 + the number of received additional balls 0-the number of received subtraction balls 0. While backing up 0, backup the number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 0, the total number of starting openings 1 = 0, and the total number of starting openings 2 = 0.

  Next, at the stage when the activation processing is completed on the CU side, the CU transmits a game permission request, an operation instruction of SQN = n to the P unit, and the P unit that received it turns off the game permission rejection as an operation response. , SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of times of start opening = 0, the number of times of start opening 2 = 0, and the response of game permission is returned to CU.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, processing of a connection sequence when the communication connection between the CU and P units is reconnected will be described. Here, "at the time of reconnection" is at the time of resuming communication after the communication between the CU and the P unit abnormally ends. This “abnormal end” is described later, when the power is turned on while holding the card in FIG. 62, and when the CU itself disconnects the communication when the unit P in FIG. 69 refuses addition, the CU side in FIGS. When the power is cut off. As will be described later, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, it is a. Resumes the connection sequence in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 50), b. It is judged whether the connection sequence resumes later (see FIG. 69) or c.SQN backed up by the CU and SQN sent from P are inconsistent, a When it is determined that the communication is any one of to c, it is determined that the normal communication is not ended (abnormal end), and the connection sequence at the time of reconnection of FIG. 49 is executed instead of FIG.

  The connection sequence at the time of reconnection is similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation described with reference to FIG. 48, and the differences will be mainly described here.

  First, as in FIG. 48, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU, and the chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and P units. Next, as in FIG. 48, the CU transmits a recovery request command to P, and P transmits a recovery response to the CU.

  Here, in the connection sequence of FIG. 48, since the power is turned on, the CU transmits a communication start request command of recovery clear ON to P units, and it is received by P units to clear the recovery data. Along with this, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1 in accordance with SQN = 0 sent in the first operation instruction, and all the ball related information and the current ball related information, etc. are cleared to "0" last time.

  However, in the case of the connection sequence shown in FIG. 49, recovery information backed up in the P unit may not match the information stored on the CU side because it is at the time of reconnection. Therefore, after starting the recovery processing, the CU corrects the game ball or the like according to the contents of the P-unit recovery data (previous ball related information, current ball related information, etc.) included in the recovery response. Execute the process Specifically, based on the game ball acquisition number information, the back ball addition information, and the game ball launch number information included in the recovery data sent from P units, the number of game balls + the number of game ball acquisition number + back Ball addition information-A game ball number-of-plays information is calculated, the stored game ball number is corrected to the calculated new number of game balls, and the corrected number of game balls and recovery data from P are calculated. The game ball total number information sent as is compared with, and it is judged whether it corresponds or not. In the case of non-coincidence, a command in which the game ball correction ON, that is, the bit 2 of the data correction request is set to "1" is transmitted to the P-unit as the communication start request. Also, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from P units and the final SQN stored in the CU are compared to determine whether they match, and if they do not match, a communication start request is issued. SQN correction ON, that is, a command in which Bit 1 of the data correction request is set to “1” is transmitted to P units. Also, the correct number of gaming balls to be corrected = 300 and SQN = 3 are included in the communication start request and transmitted to the P-unit.

  The P unit receives the command of the communication start request, and performs correction processing to match the “sequence number” and the “game ball” backed up by the P unit with the information of the CU. Specifically, SQN = 3 and gaming ball = 300 are corrected, and processing for backing up the notified “connection time” is performed.

  Then, the CU backs up the connection time, which is the time of reconnection, when recovery processing is completed. Then, as for the sequence number, if the final SQN transmitted from P units is not abnormal, the sequence number (SQN) is continued.

  On the other hand, after starting the recovery processing in the CU, if it is determined that the P units that are the communication partners do not match, or if it is determined that the SQN is abnormal, the recovery response sent from the P units The current number of game balls included in is converted into a ball at one end. The number of balls is the number of game balls recorded on a game recording medium (such as a card) owned by a player. Then, after balls are recorded on the recording medium, the replay button 319 is operated to use the balls of the recording medium, and the balls are converted into game balls, and then re-playing becomes possible. At that time, as with the connection sequence at power on shown in FIG. 48, as the communication start request transmitted from the CU to the P unit, the recovery clear ON is transmitted, and the P unit receives the recovery data clear. Further, in the CU, the sequence number is set to “0”, SQN = 1 is transmitted to the P unit in the first operation instruction, and in the P unit, the SQN = 1 is backed up. In addition, in the P unit, the number of added balls in the previous time = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous start openings 1 = 0, and the number of previous start openings 2 = 0 are backed up. Clear each counter value of 1 time and 2 times of start opening to 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, processing in the standby mode will be described. The standby state is a state in which no game is played on the P unit and no card is inserted in the CU, and the lending button 321 and the replay button 319 are not operated at all.

  First, a command of operation instruction of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In the P unit that received it, as the response of the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of times of starting opening = 0, the number of starting openings 2 times = 0, And transmit game permission data. In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up each time a command of operation instruction is transmitted. In the command of the next operation instruction from CU to P, data of SQN = n + 2 is transmitted. In the P unit that received this, back up SQN = n + 3, previous addition ball number = 0, last subtraction ball number = 0, previous start opening 1 count = 0, and previous start opening 2 count 0 = Each counter value of subtraction ball number, starting opening 1 time, starting opening 2 times, and the number of game balls is cleared to 0.

  Then, P units have SQN = n + 3, game ball number = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings 1 number = 0, number of starting openings 2 number = 0, and game permission as operation response Send response to CU. In the CU, every time a response of an operation response from P units is received, the number of game balls = 0, the total number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 0, the total number of starting openings 1 = zero, and the total number of starting openings 2 = Back up 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the process in the case where a big hit occurs during the game will be described. In FIG. 51, the initial number of game balls is 1010, and while an operation instruction and an operation response are being transmitted / received between P units and CUs in a game, a definite variation big hit occurs, and the said big hit It is shown that the probability change occurrence probability has improved and the probability change started after the end of the control.

  First, in the CU, SQN = n is backed up, and a command of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to P units. In the P unit that received it, SQN = n + 1, the number of previous addition balls = 3, the number of last subtraction balls = 13, the previous start opening 1 count = 1, and the previous start opening 2 times = 1 The number of game balls is updated to 1000 by calculating 1010 = 3 (additional ball number)-13 (subtractive ball number) = 1000. Furthermore, after creating the response, each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings, and the number of starting openings 2 times is cleared to 0.

  And, P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 1000, the number of addition balls = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of starting openings 1 = 1, the number of starting openings 1 = 1, gaming permission, special prize Sends the response of OFF and definite variation OFF to CU. Thus, the P unit transmits not only the number of subtracted balls and the number of added balls but also the number of game balls to the CU. As a result, the CU can determine whether the number of gaming balls stored in the P unit matches the number of gaming balls managed in the CU.

  In addition, in the P unit in the present embodiment, as described above, since 100 game balls are shot into the game area 27 in 1 minute, one game ball is made into the game area 27 in 0.6 seconds. It will be driven in. Then, as described in FIG. 45, since the command / response is transmitted at an interval of 200 ms, the subtraction ball number from the transmission of the previous response to the transmission of the current response is 0 or 1. Therefore, the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P unit to the CU is also 0 or 1. However, if the number of subtraction balls is set to such a small value, the number of gaming balls does not change so much, resulting in a processing flow that is difficult to understand. Therefore, in the drawing of the processing flow in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the number of subtraction balls and the change in the number of addition balls as needed are largely described.

  In the CU that receives the response of the operation response, calculate the number of game balls = 10 10 + 3-13 = 1000 and back up that 1000 as the number of game balls, and add the total number of added balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 13, start opening Back up 1 total = 1 and start opening 2 total = 1

  While repeatedly executing transmission and reception of the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response, a probability change big hit occurs in the P unit, and the ball related information is the number of game balls = 1100, the number of additional balls = 120, The number of subtracted balls is changed to 20, the number of start openings is equal to 2, and the number of start openings is equal to 2 times. And a definite change starts after the big hit ends in P units. In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P unit, SQN = n + 3 is backed up, and the number of previous added balls = 120, last subtracted number of balls = 20, last start opening 1 count = 2, and last start opening 2 counts = 2, as well as gaming balls The number = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100 is calculated, and the number of gaming balls is updated to 1100. Furthermore, after creating the response, each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of times of the starting opening, and the number of times of the starting opening 2 is cleared to zero.

  And, P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 1100, the number of balls added = 120, the number of balls subtracted = 20, the number of starting openings 1 = 2, the number of starting openings 2 = 2, gaming permission, special prize Send the response of ON, and definite variation ON to CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3 and the number of gaming balls = 1000 + 120-20 = 1100, corrects the number of gaming balls to its 1100 and backs up, and adds the number of added balls = 120, total number of subtracted balls Back up = 20, start opening 1 total = 2 and start opening 2 total = 2 In addition, the CU detects that the "special award" and the "something" have started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, processing in the case where it is detected that game balls are lost while playing a game on P units will be described. Assuming that the initial game ball number is 20, the CU backs up SQN = n, and transmits commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n to the P units as operation instructions. In the P unit, SQN = n + 1, last added ball number = 3, last subtracted ball number = 18, last start opening 1 count = 1, and last start opening 2 count = 1. Then, after creating the response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of times of the starting opening, and the number of times of the starting opening 2 are cleared to 0.

  And, P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 5, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 18, the number of starting openings = 1, the number of starting openings = 1, gaming permission, special prize Sends the response of OFF and definite variation OFF to CU. In the CU, SQN = n + 1, game ball number = 20 + 3-18 = 5 is calculated, and then the game ball number is corrected and backed up, and addition ball number cumulative total = 3, subtraction ball number total accumulation = 18, starting opening 1 Back up total = 0, and start opening 2 total = 0. After that, in the P unit, the number of subtraction balls = 5, so the number of gaming balls = 5-5 = 0 is calculated and the number of gaming balls = 0, so the number of additional balls = 0, the number of times of starting opening = 0, starting It fluctuates to 2 times of mouth = 0. At the stage when the number of game balls becomes 0, in P, no ball is detected, and the payout control board 17 can automatically stop the driving of the ball firing motor 18 and can not drive the balls into the game area 27 Control to the game prohibited state. It should be noted that the variable display is continued if the variable display device is already displaying the variable display only at the point where the hitting is stopped. Further, when the start stop control is performed and there is start storage for the number of times of start opening 1 or the number of start openings 2 times, variable display control of the variable display device based on the storage is continued.

  In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P unit, SQN = n + 3 was backed up, and the number of added balls in the previous time = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 5 After that, each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of times of starting opening, and the number of times of starting opening 2 is cleared to 0.

  And, P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 5, the number of starting openings = 0, the number of starting openings = 0, gaming permission, special prize A response of OFF, positive variation OFF, and game ball number 0 = ON is sent to the CU.

  The CU receives it, calculates the number of gaming balls = 5 + 0-5 = 0, corrects the number of gaming balls to 0 and backs up, and adds up the number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 5, start opening Correct 1 total = 1 and start opening 2 total = 0.

  As described above, the main management of the number of game balls is performed by CU, but only when performing the game prohibition control (fire stop control) accompanying the fact that the number of game balls becomes 0 in P, It is determined that the number of game balls has become 0, and game prohibition control (fire stop control) is performed. Thereafter, as an operation response, final ball related information is transmitted to the CU, and the final game ball number “0” is determined on the CU side. The reason for controlling in this way is that it is necessary to carry out the hitting and firing stop control at the moment when the number of gaming balls on the P-unit side becomes zero.

  For example, on the CU side which mainly manages the number of game balls, reception of the response of the operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls when the number of game balls sent from P side becomes 0 becomes Wait, the final game ball number is calculated on the CU side and it becomes 0, thereby transmitting the command of the operation instruction with the prohibition request for prohibiting the game to the P side, and receiving it If it is the first time that the P ball side stops hitting the ball, there is a possibility that the game ball will be bombarded and fired while the response and command are sent and received, and a new subtraction ball number will be generated during that time. On the side, although the number of game balls is already "0", a new number of subtraction balls are generated, and the number of game balls eventually becomes negative. In order to prevent such inconveniences, only the control for stopping the striking of the ball when the number of gaming balls reaches zero is controlled based on the number of gaming balls on the P-unit side.

  As described above, since the game control represented by the hit firing stop control is performed based on the number of game balls stored by P itself, this is performed based on the number of game balls managed and stored in CU. Compared to the case where such game control is performed, game control in accordance with the fluctuation of the number of game balls can be performed in real time.

  Here, although the example in which the payout control board 17 performs the hitting and firing stop control is shown, the main control board 16 (see FIG. 16) may be configured to perform the hitting and firing stop control.

  In this case, for example, the payout control board 17 transmits to the main control board 16 a signal indicating that the number of gaming balls is zero when the number of gaming balls is determined to be zero. In response to this signal, the main control board 16 prohibits driving of the hitting and firing motor 18.

  Referring to FIG. 53, processing of the CU and P when the card is inserted will be described. At the time of insertion of this card, the P unit executes the same process as the process in the standby shown in FIG. 50 without executing any special process by the insertion of the card.

  On the other hand, also in the CU, in the process of transmitting a command to P units, the same process as in waiting shown in FIG. 50 is executed. Then, in the CU, when the card is inserted, the card reader / writer 327 outputs a command signal for taking the card, and the card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the taken card, and the read information is read. Processing at the time of card insertion, such as receiving

  The CU is in a card balance inquiry state for a predetermined period of time after the card is inserted. This is, for example, asking a higher-level server such as the hall management computer 1 etc. whether the inserted card is appropriate or not, whether it is a member card registered in the game arcade or whether it has balls or prepaid balance. This means that processing for displaying on the display unit 312 and displaying on the display 54 on the side of the P base is being performed while displaying that authentication is in progress. As described later with reference to FIG. 94 and the like, the CU displays that an inquiry about a card inserted in the display unit 312 is in progress, and transmits an operation instruction including ON during card insertion processing to the P-unit. In P unit, by receiving the command of the operation instruction, the payout control board 17 transmits a display control command including ON during card insertion processing to the effect control board 53 for display, and the effect control board 53 for display is displayed Control is performed to display that the card inserted in the container 54 is being inquired (see FIG. 94).

  After that, P units have SQN = n + 3, game ball number = 0, added ball number = 0, subtraction ball number = 0, start opening 1 count = 0, start opening 2 count = 0, game prohibition and special prize as operation response Send a response including a definite change and OFF to the CU. Specifically, the special prize and the definite variation are OFF when Bit 0 to bit 6 in the gaming machine state 2 shown in FIG. 31 are all 0.

  In the CU, the balance and balls are confirmed when the balance and balls of the inserted card are confirmed as a result of the card balance inquiry. Then, the CU transmits a card insertion request command including the card ID and the card type to P and notifies the card ID and the card type. Then, the P unit backs up the card ID and card type designated by the received card insertion request command, and sends back a card insertion response to the CU. In addition, the CU performs control to display the prepaid balance of the determined card on the display unit 312, and transmits the determined ball (5000) as a game ball to the gaming machine (P unit). The display in the addition display is displayed on the display 312 (see FIG. 94).

  Then, SQN = n + 4, gaming balls = 0 (number of gaming balls before update) +5000 (number of required addition balls) = 5000 and balls having balls = 0 are backed up. At this point, the consumption of balls is decided.

  Next, a command including, as an operation instruction, addition being performed, card insertion processing being OFF, addition display being on, SQN = n + 4, number of requested addition balls = 5000, and card balance = 7000 is transmitted to P units. In the P unit, the payout control board 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during addition display and the number of requested balls for addition = 5000, thereby performing display control including ON during addition display and the number of requested balls for addition = 5000. The command is transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the effect control board 53 for display. In response to that, the effect control substrate for display 53 displays (in the addition display) to the effect that 5000 balls are being added as a game ball to the display 54 (see FIG. 94).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the process at the time of replay that consumes a ball will be described. In FIG. 54, the stored ball specified by the inserted recording medium (member's card etc.) is “1000”, and the initial game ball is in the “0” state. The process of replaying in FIG. 54 is similar to the process of consuming prepaid shown in FIG. 55 described later. On the CU side, SQN = n + 2 when the replay button 319 is pressed in a state where a game recording medium (such as a card for membership) owned by the player is inserted and there are balls identified by the card. , The number of game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) + 125 (number of required addition balls) = 125, and the balls = 875 are backed up. Reservoir ball = 875 becomes 875 at 1000-125, because the initial ball storage ball = 1000 to 125 (number of required addition balls) is withdrawn. This is because the prepaid balance in the case of FIG. 55 to be described later is data in units of money, while the balls in FIG. 54 are data in units of balls, so it is sufficient to simply subtract 1000-125. It is.

  Then, the CU transmits a command including, as an operation instruction, addition being performed, addition being displayed (replaying) ON, SQN = n + 2, number of requested addition balls = 125, and required number of subtractions = zero, to P units. In P units that have received it, the payout control board 17 transmits a display control command including the ON during addition display and the number of requested balls for addition 125 included in the command of the operation instruction to the effect control board 53 for display . In response to that, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen in which the number of gaming balls 125 is being added.

  The other processing is the same as the processing of FIG. 55 described later. As described above, the consumption of balls is determined on the CU side alone when the operation of pressing the replay button 319 is performed without waiting for the response of the operation response from the Ps, and the number of balls (the number of balls is also determined). The same) waits for the response of the operation response from P units to determine.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the process of consuming the prepaid balance recorded in the inserted recording medium (card) will be described. In the process of FIG. 55, it is assumed that the prepaid balance is "1000" and the gaming ball at the current point is "50". First, commands of no addition, addition display (prepaid lending) OFF, SQN = n, number of requested addition balls = 0, and required number of subtraction requested balls = 0 are transmitted from the CU to the P units as operation instructions. In the P unit that received it, SQN = n + 1, game ball number = 50, number of added balls = 0, number of balls reduced = 0, number of starting openings 1 = 0, number of starting openings 2 = 0, gaming permission as operation response , Special prize OFF, and a definite variation OFF response are returned.

  On the other hand, in the CU, lending of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls is performed by one lending operation (ball lending operation). When the lending button (loaning button) 321 is pressed in the CU, SQN = n + 2, the number of gaming balls = 50 (the number of gaming balls before update) +125 (the number of requested addition balls) = 175 and the balance = 500 are backed up. In this way, the balance consumption is decided on the CU side alone when the lending operation is performed. Next, CU is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, it is displayed on the display 312 that it is in the process of deducting 125 balls from the balance and adding to the game balls.

  Then, the CU transmits a command with addition, being displayed (prepaid lending) ON, SQN = n + 2, the number of requested addition balls = 125, and the required number of subtraction request balls = 0 to P units as operation instructions. In P units that have received it, the payout control board 17 transmits a display control command including the ON during addition display and the number of requested balls for addition 125 included in the command of the operation instruction to the effect control board 53 for display . In response to that, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen in which the number of gaming balls 125 is being added.

  Next, after creating the response of the operation response, the P unit clears each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings, and the number of starting openings 2 times to 0, and the current number of gaming balls is 50. On the other hand, the number of gaming balls is updated to a value of 175 obtained by adding the number of required balls for addition 125.

  Then, as an operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, number of game balls = 175, balance = 500, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings 1 number = 0, number of starting openings 2 number = 0, The response of game permission, special award OFF, and definite variation OFF is sent back.

  In the CU that received it, SQN = n + 3, gaming ball number = 175 (pre-update gaming ball number) + 0 (addition required ball number)-0 (subtracted ball number) = 175 to calculate and backup Cumulative total = 0, Subtractive ball number cumulative = 0, starting opening 1 totaling = 0, and starting opening 2 totaling = 0 are backed up.

  As described above, unlike the determination of the balance consumption, the determination of the number of game balls is made to wait for the response of the operation response from the P's.

  In addition, in the P unit, when the command of the operation instruction including the addition presence and the number of required addition balls is received, the addition is the same without distinguishing the consumption of balls (replay of balls) and the consumption of the prepaid balance. Execute the subsequent processing in the sequence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the process of subtracting the number of gaming balls (wagon service etc.) according to the instruction on the CU side will be described. In the game arcade, a wagon service is provided in which game balls owned by the player are consumed to provide the player with drinks and the like. When the player receives such a wagon service, the player touches the display unit 312 (see FIGS. 105 to 109), and the order content ordered by the player is a card unit by placing a wagon order. The IR photosensitive unit 320 of No. 3 is input as an infrared signal to a remote control possessed by a store clerk at the game arcade.

  The salesclerk of the game arcade performs the wagon service according to the order content input to the remote control. FIG. 56 shows a case where a wagon order that consumes the number of used game balls “300” is generated in a state where the player-owned game balls are “1000”. When a wagon order occurs, the CU performs processing to back up “300”, which is the number of used balls of the game ball accompanying the wagon order occurrence, as SQN = n + 2, the required number of added balls = 0, and the required number of subtraction balls. At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the game balls, but merely backs up "300" as the number of balls required to be subtracted. Then, from the CU to the P unit, the command of subtraction existence, subtraction indication (wagon service) ON, SQN = n + 2, addition required ball number = 0 and subtraction required ball number = 300 is transmitted as operation instruction. Then, the CU causes the display 312 to display a display (during display) indicating that subtraction is in progress (see FIGS. 109 and 110).

  Upon receiving the command, the P unit determines whether the value of the game ball counter stored in itself is equal to or greater than the number required for subtraction. This determination is performed by the payout control board 17. In FIG. 56, it is assumed that the value of the game ball counter is greater than or equal to the number required for subtraction. In the P unit, when the payout control board 17 receives a command of operation instruction including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, display control including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300 The command is transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the effect control board 53 for display. In response to that, the effect control substrate for display 53 displays (under subtraction display) on the display 54 that 300 balls are being subtracted as a game ball.

  Next, the P unit backs up SQN = n + 3, previous addition ball number = 0, last subtraction ball number = 0, last start opening 1 count = 0 and last start opening 2 count = 0, addition ball number, subtraction The value of each counter of the number of balls, the number of times of starting opening, and the number of times of starting opening 2 times is cleared to 0. Then, the number of gaming balls is updated to “700” obtained by subtracting the number of balls deducting 300 from the current number of gaming balls 1000 according to the number of deduction required balls = 300.

  Then, from P unit to CU, as operation response, subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, current number of game balls = 700, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings = 0, number of starting openings 2 = 0, the game permission, the special award OFF, and the definite variation OFF response are sent back.

  Then, in the CU, SQN = n + 3, gaming ball number = 1000 (pre-update gaming ball number) −300 (subtraction required ball number) +0 (additional ball number) −0 (subtraction ball number) = 700, and gaming ball Correct the number to "700" and back up. As described above, the subtraction of the number of game balls is decided only after waiting for the response of the operation response from P units.

  In addition, the CU backs up the total addition ball number = 0, the subtraction total ball number = 0, the starting opening 1 total = 0, and the starting opening 2 total = 0.

  On the other hand, when the P unit determines that the value of the game ball counter stored in itself is less than the subtraction request number, the P unit does not execute the subtraction of the game ball number according to the subtraction request number. . Also, in this case, the P-unit sends back an operation response of subtraction refusal ON as an operation response to the CU. As a result, the CU is notified that the game ball subtraction based on the subtraction request has not been performed because the P unit has refused the subtraction request.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 56, the subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU is determined only after waiting for the response of the operation response from P units. On the other hand, as described using FIG. 54, the storage (ball-bearing) consumption based on the instruction of the CU is decided when the CU receives the ball-consumption consumption.

  As described above, the reason why the settling time is made different between “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of CU” and “consumption of balls (balls having balls) based on the instruction of CU” is as follows.

  At the stage when CU received subtraction processing of the number of game balls such as wagon order etc, although there was allowance in the number of game balls, although the subtraction instruction was sent, the game ball is used for the game when P unit received the subtraction instruction As a result, the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction instruction may not be left.

  In such a case, if the subtraction is determined based on the number of gaming balls stored in the CU when the CU accepts the subtraction processing, the number of gaming balls actually remains on the gaming machine side. Nevertheless, the subtraction will be determined and a contradiction will occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of CU” is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P-unit.

  On the other hand, "consumed ball (consumed ball) consumption based on the instruction of CU" is an instruction to add the number of game balls, so when the instruction reaches P, P stores Even if the number of game balls fluctuates, there is no problem in adding the game balls corresponding to the addition instruction. For this reason, from the viewpoint of speeding up the processing, the “conserved ball (ball-bearing) consumption based on the instruction of the CU” is decided when the CU receives the ball (consumed ball) consumption.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, processing when there is a card return operation will be described. In the state where the number of game balls = 500, the operation instruction from CU to P, and in response to the operation response from P to CU in response, the CU is pressed when the return button 322 is pressed, As the next operation instruction, the command of prohibition request existence for prohibiting the game, clear request non-existence, clear display OFF, card return processing ON, and SQN = n + 2 is transmitted to P unit. In the P-unit, in accordance with the instruction of the prohibition request included in the command, the driving of the hitting and firing motor 18 is stopped to control the hitting and firing state. In addition, the P unit transmits a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF, game prohibition and game completion OFF to the CU as an operation response. After that, a weight of 10 seconds is provided in consideration of the time until the already fired balls flow down in the game area 27 and flow to all out balls, that is, the floating ball processing waiting time. During the wait time of 10 seconds, polling is continued between the P unit and the CU, and the operation instruction command and the operation response response are mutually transmitted and received.

  When 10 seconds have elapsed, the CU transmits a command of no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, card return processing ON, and SQN = n + N to the P as operation instructions. Then, as an operation response, the P unit has SQN = n + N + 1, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting openings = 0, the number of starting openings = 0, gaming prohibited, gaming Send a response of completion ON, special award OFF, and definite variation OFF to the CU. The "game completion ON" has a role as initialization enable information indicating that information for instructing initialization of the number of game balls can be received in P units. In addition, the number of game balls transmitted at this time is the final number of game balls at the end of the game. Note that this sequence example shows a case where neither the number of added balls nor the number of subtracted balls change due to the floating balls. If a prize is generated by a floating ball or if a foul ball is generated, the number of payouts or the number of balls according to the prize is transmitted to the CU as the “number of additional balls”.

  Upon receiving the response of the operation response, the CU detects the game completion, and backs up SQN = n + N + 2 and the data with clear request. Furthermore, according to "the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings, the number of starting openings 2 times" included in the operation response, "the number of gaming balls, the total number of added balls, the total number of subtracted balls," The respective data of "starting opening 1 total winning number, starting opening 2 total winning number" are updated. By this, the number of game balls at the end of the game is decided on the CU side. As described above, since the final number of game balls is determined on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the P base side, and the cost of the P base can be suppressed as much as possible.

  Then, the CU transmits a command including a clear request present, a clear display ON, a card return processing ON, and SQN = n + N + 2 to the P as an operation instruction. After that, the CU causes the display 312 to display a display (during a clear display) indicating that the display is being cleared (see FIGS. 114 and 115). The "clear request" is data for instructing initialization of the number of game balls on P units.

  In the P unit, the payout control board 17 transmits a display control command including ON during clear display included in the command transmitted from the CU to the effect control board 53 for display. In response to that, the effect control board 53 for a display causes the display 54 to display a display screen (screen in clear display) which is being cleared.

  In this example, the CU determines the number of gaming balls at the end of the game in response to the input of the “signal requesting the end of the game” based on the operation of the return button 322. However, the “signal requesting the end of the game” is not limited to the signal based on the operation of the return button 322.

  For example, the CU is provided with a fingerprint authentication unit that authenticates a player's fingerprint. At the start of the gaming machine, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is mandatory, and that the fingerprint information specified by the gaming card inserted in the CU by the player at the start of the game matches the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit. Allow the game as a condition. Furthermore, at the end of the game, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is essential, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the “signal requesting the end of the game” is fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit.

  In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server or the like that manages the entire gaming machine installation island, the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 322 is operated. In this case, the “game end request” is configured by the game end request signal input from the server.

  It returns to the explanation of FIG. Clear request present, clear display, card return processing ON, and P units that received the command of SQN = n + N + 2 clear (initialize) the value of each stored data to 0. The data cleared by the P unit is the current ball related information and the previous ball related information shown in FIG. As a result, the added ball number counter, the subtracted ball number counter, the starting opening 1 winning counter, the starting opening 2 winning counter, the value of the gaming ball number counter, and the number of added balls stored as the value of the previous counter. The data of the subtraction ball number, the starting opening 1 winning number, and the starting opening 2 winning number are cleared (initialized).

  Next, the P unit, as an operation response, clear rejection of not rejecting the clear request OFF, SQN = 0, number of gaming balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings = 0 , The start opening 2 times = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and the response of definite variation OFF to CU. Then, the CU backs up SQN = 0, game balls = 0, and balls = 500. The number of balls = 500 is a value obtained by adding 500, which is the number of gaming balls received immediately before the clearing request, to the balls.

  Next, the CU transmits a card return request command to P. Then, the P-unit transmits, to the CU, a response of a card return response including the card ID and the card type (card ID and card type received from the CU and backed up at the time of card insertion and backed up).

  Thereafter, the CU records ball = 500 on the inserted card, discharges it, and returns it to the player. Then, a command of no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, and card return processing OFF is transmitted to the P unit as the operation instruction. Then, in the P unit, as the operation response, SQN = m + 1, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting openings = 0 = 0, the number of starting openings = 0 = 0, gaming prohibited, gaming Send a response of completion ON, special award OFF, and definite variation OFF to the CU. The points of the card may not be recorded directly on the card, but the upper server may store the points in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored by the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server, and the points stored in association with the card number received by the upper server Is searched, and the point is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. After that, the CU ejects the card. As described above, both recording the points of the card directly on the card and storing the points in correspondence with the card number in the upper-level server are collectively referred to as “correlating” the points to the card. Do.

  The process when the lock of the glass door 6 is released and opened will be described with reference to FIG. First, as the first operation instruction, a command including an instruction of no glass open request without a glass door open request is transmitted from the CU to the P unit. Upon receiving it, the P unit returns a normal response including the number of gaming balls = 500 to the CU as an operation response. At this stage, for example, when a problem such as a game ball hit in the game area 27 in P unit is caught on the game board surface and a player calls a staff in the game arcade, the staff in the game arcade An infrared signal is transmitted to the IR photosensitive unit 320 for operating the remote controller in possession to unlock and open the glass door 6. The IR photosensitive unit 320 that has received it inputs the glass door open instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the control unit 323. Upon receiving the instruction to open the glass door, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a prohibition request existence for stopping the game, no glass opening request, and a command of SQN = n + 2 to P units. In other words, before the glass door 6 is actually opened, the operation instruction for prohibiting a request for prohibition of a hit and for requesting no opening of a glass is sent to the P-unit so as to perform strike-off control at the P-unit.

  In response to this, the P-unit stops driving of the hitting and firing motor 18 and controls the hitting and firing state. Next, the P unit sends back to the CU a response including the prohibition refusal OFF indicating that the gaming prohibition is not rejected and the gaming prohibition data indicating that the gaming prohibition state has been made as the operation response.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after transmitting the command of the operation instruction including the above-mentioned prohibition request to the P car, the time until all the balls fired to the game area 27 in the P car flow to the out ball and are collected In consideration of the ball processing waiting time, a weight of 10 seconds is provided, and during this time, the CU transmits a command including an instruction of game prohibition, that is, prohibition request existence to the P unit to continue polling.

  Then, when a wait time of 10 seconds has elapsed, a command including an instruction to open the glass door 6 for releasing the lock of the glass door 6 and to open the door as an operation instruction is transmitted to the P-unit.

  In P which received it, while exciting the glass door open solenoid 10, the lock of the glass door 6 is released and the glass door 6 is opened, the bit in the glass door development life is turned ON, and thereafter, the glass door 6 Remains on (until the detection signal from the glass door closure detector 12 is input) until the. Then, the P unit sends back to the CU a response including a response such as glass open rejection OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, game prohibition, and glass development in progress as an operation response.

  The CU determines that the glass door 6 has been opened if it is not rejected for the command of the glass open request, that is, if a response including a response of glass open rejection ON is not returned. After that, a command including no glass open request is transmitted to the P-unit as an operation instruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the process of releasing and releasing the lock of the cell (front frame) 5 will be described. In the opening process of the cell (front frame) 6, the same process as the opening process of the glass door 6 shown in FIG. 58 is performed. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  If the staff of the game arcade operates the remote control to release the lock of the front frame (cell) 5 to open it, the remote control outputs an infrared ray including a cell open command signal to the IR photosensitive unit 320. Be done. In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 outputs a cell open command signal to the control unit 323. As a result, in CU, it is determined that an instruction input to open a cell for opening a cell is detected. Then, the CU transmits a command including data indicating that there is a prohibition request for prohibiting a game and no cell opening request to the P as an operation instruction. In the P unit, in response to that, the driving of the ball hitting and firing motor is stopped to control the ball to be in the ball hitting and stopping state.

  In the CU, a weight of 10 seconds is provided in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and when the 10 seconds of the waiting time is over, cell open request data is issued which is an instruction to release the cell lock and release it. Send the included command to P units. In the P car which received it, the front frame open solenoid 11 is excited to release the lock of the front frame 5 and the front frame 5 is opened. Then, the bit under development of the cell is turned on, and thereafter it is kept on until the cell is closed (until the detection signal from the front frame closing detector 13 is input).

  Then, the P unit, as an operation response, rejects the cell open request not rejecting the cell open request, prohibits game play indicating that the hitting state is in the halted state, and is developing cells showing that the cell is open etc. Send a response including the data of to the CU.

  If the CU does not reject the cell open request, that is, if a response including the cell open rejection OFF is returned, the CU determines that the cell is opened.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 58 to 59, according to the present embodiment, the closed state of the glass door or cell, which is a specific example of the front member of P units, is released without affecting the game progress. It becomes possible.

  With reference to FIG. 60, the process when a bill is inserted into a CU and money is deposited will be described. First, the player performs an operation of inserting a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 of the CU in order to deposit money on the card. Then, the CU starts a deposit process of updating the balance of the card according to the amount of inserted bill, and as an operation instruction, no addition, deposit in process ON, SQN = n + 2, addition request ball number = 0, And a command including the subtraction required ball number = 0 to P units. Then, in the P unit, as the operation response, the addition permission is OFF, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 0, the number of addition balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of times of starting opening = 0, the number of starting openings 2 times = 0, A response including the game permission, the special award OFF, and the definite variation OFF is sent back to the CU. In addition, the CU causes the display 312 to display an indication that the deposit process is in progress (display during deposit process). Then, polling is continued between the P unit and the CU until the end of the deposit process, and the operation instruction command and the operation response response are mutually transmitted and received.

  Then, when the balance of the card is fixed and the deposit process is completed, the CU includes no addition, deposit in process display OFF, SQN = n + N, addition required ball number = 0, and subtraction required ball number = 0 as operation instructions. Send a command to P units.

  The process for changing the mode of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The example shown in FIG. 61 shows, as an example, the case where the gaming machine is changed to the trial hitting mode. When changing the mode, a clerk at the game arcade or the like confirms that the card is not inserted in the CU, and then operates the remote control possessed by him to operate the remote control to change the gaming machine to the trial mode. It transmits to the IR photosensitive unit 320. The IR photosensitive unit 320 that has received the signal inputs, to the control unit 323, a change instruction signal for changing to the trial hitting mode included in the received infrared signal. The CU that has received the change instruction input to the test hitting mode has the bit 0 (operation mode) of the mode transition specification set to “0” and the command of the mode change request in which the Bit 1 (test hitting mode) is set to “1” Is sent to P units. Then, the P unit transmits a response of the mode change response including the processing result OK to the CU, and is shifted to the trial hitting mode.

  During the trial run mode, only one SQN value is updated, and from the CU, the operation instruction command including no addition, required addition ball number = 0, and required subtraction ball number = 0 is for P units. Will be sent. In addition, from P, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of starting openings 1 = 0, the number of starting openings 2 = 0, including gaming permission, premium OFF, and definite variation OFF The response of the operation response is sent to the CU.

  After that, when releasing the trial hitting mode and returning to the normal operation mode, the attendant of the game arcade operates the remote control possessed by the IR photosensitive unit to change the gaming machine to the operation mode. Send to 320 The IR photosensitive unit 320 that has received the signal inputs, to the control unit 323, a change instruction signal to change to the operation mode included in the received infrared signal. When the CU receives an instruction to change to the operation mode, the command for a mode change request in which Bit0 (operation mode) of the mode transition specification is set to "1" and Bit1 (testing mode) is set to "0" Is sent to P units. Then, the P transmits a response to the mode change response including the processing result OK to the CU, and the trial hitting mode is canceled and the normal operation mode is entered.

  In addition, although the case where it changes into a trial hitting mode was shown as an example in FIG. 61, the process in the case where it changes into a maintenance mode or a test mode is also the same.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, processing when power is turned on while the CU is holding the card and an abnormality in which P units are not connected at that time occurs will be described. Since the communication between the CU and the P unit occurred while the card was inserted and playing a game on the P unit, at the stage where the power supply of the CU was restarted, the command of the recovery request is P units from the CU Sent to. However, because there are P unconnected failures, the response from P is not sent back to CU. Then, as described in FIG. 46, the CU retransmits the recovery request command to P units. Nevertheless, if a response from P units is not returned, the second recovery request is resent to P units. If no response is returned from the P unit even for the second retransmission, the CU determines that the communication is abnormal at this stage, and displays an indication that an error has occurred due to the non-connection from the display 312. Execute the control to

  In this state, when the game store clerk remotely operates the CU to output an infrared signal for forcibly discharging the inserted card to the IR photosensitive unit 320, the forced discharge signal is input to the control unit 323. Be done. In response to this, the CU adds the "number of game balls" backed up in the CU to the "bearing balls" of the inserted card, and clears the "number of game balls" "connection time" of the CU to 0. Then, an instruction to eject the inserted card is output to the card reader / writer 327. The card reader / writer 327 receiving it ejects the card being taken. The points of the card may not be recorded directly on the card, but the upper server may store the points in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored by the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server, and the points stored in association with the card number received by the upper server Is searched, and the point is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. After that, the CU ejects the card.

  Thereafter, the CU transmits a recovery request command to P units to perform restart processing of the connection sequence (see FIG. 49). The CU determines that the connection sequence resumes with the card inserted (state other than standby), and executes the connection sequence at reconnection of FIG. 49 instead of the connection sequence at power on of FIG. Do. The number of addition balls (for example, j) or subtraction is performed from the occurrence of P unconnected failures to the restart of the connection sequence (see FIG. 49) and the transmission of the first operation response by P. The process when the number of balls (for example, r) is generated is performed in the restart process of FIG. Referring to FIG. 49, the CU receives the recovery response from P units, thereby calculating the number of gaming balls = 0 + j (number of added balls) + r (the number of subtracted balls), and the number of gaming balls as the calculation result. Back up = j + r. Then, as described in FIG. 49, a communication start request including the values of SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, and SQN and the value of the game ball is transmitted to P units, and P SQNs and the number of game balls And make corrections.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a process in the case where the operation instruction (no request operation) from the CU has not reached P units will be described.

  As described in FIG. 51 and the like, the P unit receives the command of the operation instruction from the CU, and thereby the data of the current addition subtraction number of balls and the current number of starting openings currently stored in the ball related information storage area. The last addition subtraction number of balls and the previous starting opening frequency are backed up and stored in the previous ball related information storage area, and the data of the current addition subtraction number of balls and the current starting opening number currently stored in the ball related information storage area is cleared to 0. In the case of FIG. 63, the operation instruction from the CU has not reached P units. Therefore, the backup clear process described above is not performed on the P unit. As a result, whenever the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, and the start winning combination occur, the data is accumulated and stored as the current ball related information in the current ball related information storage area.

  First, in the state of the current number of gaming balls = 520, the CU transmits a request without request and an SQN = n command to the P-unit as an operation instruction. However, because the command does not reach P, the response from P is not sent back to CU. As a result, as described with reference to FIG. 46, the CU transmits the command of the same operation instruction to P units again. If this re-transmission does not reach P, the CU retransmits the second time for the same operation instruction because the response from P is not sent back to the CU. When this retransmission is repeated, the value of SQN is maintained at n and no incremental update of "1" is performed.

  When the command reaches P in the second re-transmission, P is, as described above, the data of the number of added / subtracted balls and the number of starting openings as the ball related information until the arrival of the operation instruction. It is cumulatively stored as Then, using the accumulated number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of gaming balls at the current time = 520 + 6-36 = 490 is calculated, and as an operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = The response of the operation response of 490, the number of addition balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of starting openings = 1, and the number of starting openings 2 = 1 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates a game ball number = 520 + 6 (additional ball number) −36 (subtractive ball number) = 490, and performs processing of correcting and storing the game ball number in the 490.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, processing in the case where the operation response (response to no request operation) from P units has not reached the CU will be described. In the case shown in FIG. 64, since the command from the CU is input to P, the above-mentioned backup clear processing is executed, but the value of SQN of the command transmitted from the CU to P next time Since (= n) is the same as the previous SQN value (= n), the P-unit judges that the response of the operation response transmitted to the CU is retransmission due to the fact that the response to the CU has not reached CU, and The current addition subtraction ball number as the current ball related information and the current start opening number are accumulated and added to these data without clearing the data of the previous addition subtraction ball number and the previous start opening number which are the ball related information.

  Specifically, with the current number of gaming balls = 520, the CU first transmits a request of no request as an operation instruction and a command of SQN = n to P units. In the P unit that received it, the above-mentioned backup clear processing is performed to calculate the current number of gaming balls = 520-13 + 3 = 510, back up the number of gaming balls = 510, back up SQN = n + 1, The data of the current addition subtraction ball number and the current starting opening number are backed up and stored in the previous addition subtraction ball number and the previous starting opening number, and a command of operation response is created, and the current addition subtraction number and current starting as current ball related information Clear the data of the number of mouths to 0. Further, the current number of game balls 510 is included in the data of the response of the operation response. Then, the P unit is a response of SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 510, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of starting openings = 1, and the number 2 of starting openings = 0 as operation responses. Send to

  However, since the response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction as the previous one, that is, no request, a command of SQN = n to P units.

  On P units that received it, the response of the operation response sent does not reach the CU, because the SQN received this time is the value (= n) that precedes the SQ N (= n + 1) being backed up. It is judged that it is a retransmission due to the current addition, and the current addition subtraction ball number as current ball related information for these data without clearing the data of the previous addition subtraction ball number as the previous ball related information and the previous start opening frequency Accumulate and backup the data of the current number of starting openings. As a result, the number of previously added balls = 3 + 3 = 6, the number of previously subtracted balls = 13 + 8 = 21, the number of times of previous start opening = 1 + 0 = 1, and the number of times of last start opening = 0 + 1 = 1. After creating the response of the operation response consisting of these data, the data of the current addition / subtraction ball number and the current number of starting openings are cleared to 0. Then, as an operation response, the P unit responds to SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 505, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 21, the number of starting openings = 1, and the number 2 of starting openings = 1. Send. However, since this response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits a command of the same operation instruction (no request, SQN = n) to P units again.

  In P that has received it, the response of the operation response has reached CU, judging that the value of SQN received this time is the value (= n) immediately before the SQ N (= n + 1) being backed up It detects that there is no retransmission. As a result, in the P unit, accumulation addition storage is performed on the previous ball related information as described above, and a response of the operation response is created and sent back to the CU. Specifically, a response of SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 485, number of added balls = 12, number of subtracted balls = 47, number of starting openings = 2, number of starting openings 2 = 2 to the operation response as operation response Do.

  Since the response of this operation response has reached CU, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520 + 12−47 = 485, and performs processing of correcting and storing the data of the gaming balls in 485.

  As described above, when the operation response transmitted earlier does not reach the CU, the P unit retransmits the unreached operation response and then transmits the next operation response instead of transmitting the next operation response. The information after adding up is sent as the next operation response. As a result, in the gaming apparatus, information on the number of gaming balls and the number of starting opening winnings can be collected reliably and efficiently. In the example of FIG. 64, although the case where the operation response from P units has not been reached once has been described, if the operation response has not been reached twice, the operation response transmitted for the third time is The sum of the information of the operation response transmitted for the second time is included.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, processing when the operation instruction (addition request) from the CU has not reached P will be described. It is assumed that the number of gaming balls at the current time is 520, the number of required additions when there is a replay of the stored balls or the withdrawal operation from the prepaid balance is 125, and the CU firstly requests addition, SQN = n, and A command including data on the number of requested addition balls = 125 is transmitted to P units. However, because the command does not reach P, a response from P is not sent back to CU. As a result, as described above, the CU retransmits the same operation command. Since the re-transmission command has not reached P, the corresponding response from P is not sent to the CU. Therefore, as described above, the CU retransmits the second time for the command of the same operation instruction. The second retransmission command reaches P units. In the non-arriving period of the command of the operation instruction from the CU, addition and subtraction data and the starting opening number are added to the current addition subtraction number of balls and the current starting opening number as the current ball related information Accumulate count data and store it.

  Then, the P unit calculates the current number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 (number of requested addition balls) +6 (the number of currently added balls) -36 (the number of currently subtracted balls) = 615, and sets the current number of gaming balls data to 615, Create response of operation response. Specifically, the P unit has an operation response: addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 615, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings = 1, and starting opening 2 Send a response with the number of times = 1 to the CU.

  In response to that, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 + 6-36 = 615, corrects the number of gaming ball data, and stores it in 615.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the process in the case where the operation response (response to the addition request) from P units has not been reached will be described. An example will be described in which an operation to use a game as withdrawal from a stored-ball replay or a prepaid balance is performed with an initial number of gaming balls = 520, and an addition request for the number of 125 balls is generated. First, the CU transmits a command of addition request existence, SQN = n, and the number of addition request balls = 125 to P as an operation instruction. The P unit that has received it has data of the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of starting openings 1 = 1, the number of starting openings 2 = 0, and SQN = n + 1 as current ball related information, While making backup storage in the ball related information storage area last time, the game ball number = 520 + 125 + 3-13 = 635 is calculated and the game ball number = 635 is stored.

  Then, after creating a response of the operation response, the P unit clears the stored data of the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 635, number of balls added A response of 3 = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of start openings 1 = 1, and the number of start openings 2 = 0 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command as the previous one to the P units. At the time of re-transmission, SQN of the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to P units without updating SQN by adding "1".

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) preceding to the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although it is detected that transmission is performed, although the requested number of added balls = 125 is included in the received command, addition updating of the game balls based on the command is not performed. That is, the addition update according to the addition request is not executed twice.

  In addition, in the P-unit, since the command retransmission detection is performed, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area as in the process of FIG. The stored data, i.e., the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of starting openings 1 = 0, and the number of starting openings 2 = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the game ball number = 635 + 3-8 = 630 is calculated, and the game ball number is corrected to 630 and stored.

  After that, the P creates a response of the operation response. Specifically, as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 630, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 21, number of starting openings = 1, and number of starting openings = 1. Send to CU as a response.

  Since this response has not reached the CU, the CU retransmits a second time for the command of the same operation instruction.

  In the P unit, the retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and while the addition request ball number 125 is received, the addition update corresponding thereto is not performed, and the double execution of the addition update according to the addition request is not performed. Then, in the same manner as described above, after performing cumulative storage in the ball related information storage area, calculation of the number of game balls, generation of the response, and 0 clearing of the current ball related information storage area last time, addition refusal OFF, SQN as operation response. A response of n = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 610, the number of added balls = 12, the number of subtraction balls = 47, the number of starting openings 1 = 2, and the number 2 of starting openings = 2 is transmitted to the CU. Since this response has reached CU, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 + 12−47 = 610, corrects the number of gaming balls to 610, and stores it.

  As described above, in the P unit, even when the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the value one previous to the SQN (= n + 1) that the SQN received this time backs up If it is = n, it is judged that it is re-transmission, and it is not judged that it is an additional addition request, and addition update of the game ball is not performed, and double execution of addition update according to the addition request is performed. Absent.

  Next, processing when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from the CU has not reached P will be described with reference to FIG. A case will be described where, with the initial number of game balls = 520, a subtraction request of 300 balls is generated due to the generation of a wagon order or the like. First, the CU transmits a command of subtraction request existence, SQN = n, and subtraction request ball number = 300 to P as an operation instruction. However, since the command did not reach P, a response from P is not sent back to CU. Therefore, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to P again. The response from the P unit is not sent back to the CU because the re-send command also did not reach the P unit. Therefore, the CU retransmits the second time for the command of the same operation instruction. This second retransmission command reaches P units.

  In the P unit, while the command of the operation instruction from the CU is not reached, as in the process of FIG. 63, the addition / subtraction ball number and the start winning combination are accumulated and stored in the current ball related information storage area. Do. Then, at the stage when the command of the second operation instruction is input to the P unit, the game ball = 520-300 + 6-36 = 190 is calculated, and the game ball = 190 is stored. Then, as an operation response, the response of subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 190, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings = 1, and number of starting openings 2 = 1 Send to

  In response to that, the CU calculates game ball = 520-300 + 6-36 = 190, corrects the game ball in the 190, and stores it.

  As described above, when performing subtraction from a game ball, the CU first transmits a command of operation instruction including data of subtraction request presence and subtraction request ball number to P, and a response as an operation response to that is Wait for the response to the CU, and subtract the subtraction requirement from the game ball. Although the main management function to manage the current game balls by adding / subtracting game balls is on the CU side, with respect to the game balls changing every moment with progress of the game in P unit, the CU side It is possible to calculate the current gaming ball by adding / subtracting the game ball only after the operation response including the response is sent back, and the period for waiting for the operation response from the P unit, the game in CU compared to the P unit. The calculation time of the ball is late. Therefore, the current game ball data on the CU side is data having a time delay with respect to the P unit, and even if the current game balls on the CU side have the same number of balls required for subtraction, the P unit side In fact, there may be no remaining game balls for the number of required subtraction balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, upon subtraction of the game balls, the CU waits for the response of the operation response from the P's and performs subtraction of the game balls for the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the process in the case where the operation response from P (the response to the subtraction request) does not reach CU will be described. Assuming that the initial game ball number = 520 and the subtraction required ball number = 300, the CU first transmits a command with subtraction required, SQN = n, and subtraction required ball number = 300 to the P units as operation instructions. The P unit that has received it has data of the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of starting openings 1 = 1, the number of starting openings 2 = 0, and SQN = n + 1 as current ball related information, While making backup storage in the ball related information storage area last time, the number of gaming balls = 520-300 + 3-13 = 210 is calculated, and the number of gaming balls = 210 is stored.

  Then, after creating a response of the operation response, the P unit clears the stored data of the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 210, number of balls added A response of 3 = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of start openings 1 = 1, and the number of start openings 2 = 0 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command as the previous one to the P units. At the time of re-transmission, SQN of the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to P units without updating SQN by adding "1".

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) preceding to the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. It detects that it is transmission, and although the subtraction request ball number = 300 is included in the received command, subtraction update of the game ball based on the command is not performed. That is, the subtraction update according to the subtraction request is not performed twice.

  In addition, in the P-unit, since the command retransmission detection is performed, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area as in the process of FIG. The stored data, i.e., the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of starting openings 1 = 0, and the number of starting openings 2 = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of gaming balls = 210 + 3-8 = 205 is calculated, and the number of gaming balls is corrected to 205 and stored.

  After that, the P creates a response of the operation response. Specifically, as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 205, number of added balls = 6, number of subtraction balls = 21, number of starting openings = 1, and number of starting openings = 1. Send to CU as a response.

  Since this response has not reached the CU, the CU retransmits a second time for the command of the same operation instruction.

  In the P unit, the retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and while the subtraction request ball number 300 is received, the subtraction update is not performed, and the subtraction update is not performed double according to the subtraction request. Then, in the same manner as described above, after performing cumulative storage in the ball related information storage area, calculation of the number of game balls, generation of the response, and 0 clearing of the current ball related information storage area last time, addition refusal OFF, SQN as operation response. A response of n = 1, game ball number = 205 + 6-26 = 185, ball number to be added = 12, subtract ball number = 47, number of starting openings 1 = 2, and number 2 of starting openings 2 is transmitted to the CU. Since this response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520-300 + 12-47 = 185, corrects the number of gaming balls to 185, and stores it.

  As described above, in the P unit, even when the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the value one previous to the SQN (= n + 1) that the SQN received this time backs up If it is = n, it is determined that it is re-transmission, and it is not determined that it is an additional subtraction request, and subtraction update of the game ball is not performed, and double execution of subtraction update according to the subtraction request is performed. Not performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a process in the case where P responds to an addition rejection response in response to a CU addition request will be described. The initial game ball number = 520, the balance of the game recording medium (card) inserted in the CU = 1000 yen, and first, the CU sends no request and SQN = n commands to the P units as operation instructions . P unit calculates the game ball = 520 + 3-23 = 500, and CU the operation response including the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of balls subtracted, the number of starting openings, the number of starting openings 2 and SQN = n + 1 Reply to The CU calculates a game ball based on the operation response and corrects the game ball to 500.

  Next, the lending button 321 is pressed, and the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, a balance = 500, and an addition request ball number = 125 as operation instructions to P units. In the P unit, for any reason, the response of the operation response including the addition refusal ON that rejects the addition is sent back to the CU.

  Since the CU receives the operation response including the addition refusal OFF, the game ball can not be added at P, and it is determined that the game ball difference has occurred between P and CU, and the communication connection is disconnected. In order to do this, send a command for communication disconnection request to P units. Upon receiving it, the P unit returns a response to the communication disconnection response to the CU, disconnects the communication connection, and transmits a release control signal for stopping the release from the release control substrate 17 to the release control substrate 31, The launch control board 31 having received the command stops the drive of the launch motor 18 to stop the game.

  The P unit further has, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the number of previously added balls = 6 as the previous number of balls, the number of previously subtracted balls = 36, the number of previous start openings = 2, the number of previous openings 2 = 2, The current game ball number = 460, the current addition ball number = 3, the current subtraction ball number = 13, the current number of starting openings = 1 and the current number of starting openings 2 = 1 are stored.

  Next, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and P units. It should be noted that, unlike the power-on shown in FIG. 48, at the time of communication disconnection shown in FIG. 69, only the chip ID authentication sequence between CU and P is executed without executing the communication control IC authentication sequence inside the CU. Run. Next, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units. In the response of this recovery response, the aforementioned recovery data stored on the P base side is transmitted to the CU side.

  The CU calculates and backs up the number of gaming balls = 595 + 3-13 = 583 according to the recovery data (the number of currently added balls = 3 and the number of currently subtracted balls = 13). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the processing at the time of reconnection (connection sequence) shown in FIG. 49, and the CU transmits a command including game ball correction ON and game ball = 583 to the Ps in the communication start request. In response to this, the P unit corrects the game ball to 583. The CU determines that the connection sequence restarts after transmitting a communication disconnection request and disconnecting communication, and executes the connection sequence at reconnection of FIG. 49 instead of the connection sequence at power on of FIG. Do.

  Also in the process of FIG. 69, the consumption of the balance is determined on the CU side without waiting for the response of the operation response from P, so the response including the addition refusal ON as the operation response from P is Even if it has been sent back, the balance consumption has already been settled on the CU side in the earlier stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, processing will be described in the case where the P unit sends back a subtraction rejection response to the CU subtraction request. Since the number of added balls is 3 and the number of subtracted balls is 13 at the stage when the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted / received between the CU and P one reciprocation as the initial game ball number = 520. The game ball is 520 + 3-13 = 510.

  When an order of wagon service or the like is generated at this stage and a subtraction request for 500 balls is generated, the CU issues a command for subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and the number of balls required for subtraction = 500 as operation instructions. Send to the table. At the stage of receiving this command, the number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36 in the P unit, and the number of gaming balls at the current time = 510 + 6-36 = 480. As a result, since the current number of gaming balls (480) is smaller than the number of subtraction required balls (500), it is not possible to meet 500 of the subtraction request. Accordingly, the P unit, as an operation response, indicates that the subtraction request is rejected, SQN = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of starting openings = 2, And a response of start opening 2 times = 2 to the CU.

  In response to that, the CU calculates the game ball = 510 + 6-36 = 480 and corrects the game ball to 480. Then, subtraction refusal is detected, and processing of subtraction cancellation is performed. In the process of the subtraction cancellation, for example, a message such as “the game ball can not be subtracted” can be displayed by the display unit 312.

  Thereafter, polling of normal operation instructions and operation responses is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, processing in the case where the P-unit sends back a clear rejection response in response to the CU clear instruction request will be described. When the return button 322 is pressed and operated with the initial number of game balls = 520, the CU sends a prohibition request to the game player P to prohibit the game, as in the processing of FIG. 57, clear A command including data of no request, clear display OFF, and card return processing ON is transmitted to P units (not shown in FIG. 71). In response to that, in the P unit, a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF, game prohibition and game completion OFF is sent back to the CU as an operation response (not shown in FIG. 71). Then, as in the process of FIG. 57, in the P-unit, a 10-second wait is provided, and polling is continued between the P-unit and the CU during the 10-second wait.

  After that, the CU transmits a command of clear request present and operation instruction of SQN = n + 2 to P units. P that received it is clear rejection ON indicating that it can not be cleared for some reason, SQN = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 480, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, starting opening 1 number = 2, starting Send a response of operation response of mouth 2 times = 2 to CU. At this stage, the game ball is 480. Then, the CU detects clear rejection, transmits a no request and SQN = n + 4 command to the P-unit as an operation instruction, and performs clear cancellation processing. The processing for this clear cancellation is, for example, processing such as displaying a message such as “Return operation has been canceled but can not be canceled” on the display unit 312 or the like. Thereafter, normal polling of operation instruction and operation response is performed between CU and P units.

  Referring to FIG. 72, processing in the case where the P unit returns a response of permission rejection in response to the game permission request of CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, and in a trouble state in which some gaming prohibition factor has occurred, the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P in a state where the gaming of P is prohibited. It is assumed that the game prohibition factor is eliminated at the stage of “game prohibition factor cancellation” in FIG.

  At that time, the CU transmits a game permission request and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the Ps as an operation instruction. However, the P unit sends back to the CU an operation response command including an impossibility of hitting the ball for some reason, that is, a game refusal ON that rejects the game permission request.

  In response to this, the CU repeatedly transmits a command including the game permission request as an operation instruction to the P unit until the game is permitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a process in the case where the P unit sends back a prohibition rejection response to the game prohibition request of the CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, transmission and reception of a command of normal operation instruction and a response of normal operation response are performed between CU and P units, for example, at the stage of “prohibition of game occurrence factor” in FIG. It is assumed that a game prohibition factor such as the return button 322 is operated occurs. At this stage, the CU transmits, to the Ps, a command of game prohibition request existence and SQN = n + 2 as an operation instruction. In the P unit, the response of the operation response including the prohibition refusal ON which rejects the game prohibition request for some reason is sent back to the CU. In response to this, the CU detects a game prohibition rejection, and transmits a command including a game prohibition request to the P as an operation instruction until the game prohibition is made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, processing in the case where the P-unit sends back a response to the glass open rejection in response to the glass open request of the CU will be described. When the input of the open instruction of the glass door 6 is detected as the initial game ball number = 520, although not shown in FIG. 74, the CU is first requested to operate as an operation instruction as in the process of FIG. And send the command without glass open request to P unit. In response to this, the P unit performs control to stop the driving of the ball striking launch motor 18, and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a weight of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and the CU continues polling to the P-unit with an operation instruction (no game) for 10 seconds. Then, when the weight of 10 seconds is finished, the CU transmits a command of glass open request and an operation command of SQN = n + 2 to P units. In response to this, the P unit transmits to the CU an operation response response including a glass open rejection ON that refuses to unlock and open the glass door 6 for some reason.

  In response to this, the CU detects a glass open rejection, transmits a command including no request as an operation instruction to the P-unit, and executes a normal open processing after processing the glass open cancellation. The process of this glass open cancellation is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as "The glass door can not be opened" by the display unit 312 or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, processing in the case where the P-unit responds to the cell open request in response to the cell open request of the CU will be described. When an input of an instruction to open a cell is detected as the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 75, similarly to the processing in FIG. Send the open request no command to P. In response to this, the P unit performs control to stop the driving of the ball striking launch motor 18, and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a weight of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and the CU continues polling to the P-unit with an operation instruction (no game) for 10 seconds. Then, when the wait of 10 seconds is completed, the CU transmits a command of cell open request presence and an operation instruction of SQN = n + 2 to P units. In response to that, the P unit transmits to the CU an operation response response including a cell open rejection ON that refuses to unlock and release the cell for some reason.

  In response to this, the CU detects a cell open rejection, transmits a command including no request as an operation instruction to the P-unit, and executes normal polling after processing for cell open cancellation. The process of cell open cancellation is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “the cell can not be released” by the display unit 312 or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 76, during an operation instruction interval period during normal play (a state in which normal addition / subtraction data exchange is being performed) (after reception of an operation response, transmission of the next operation instruction) A recovery process will be described in the case where power failure or communication connection disconnection occurs between the same CU and P units are connected and power recovery or communication failure is recovered. In the state of SQN = n with the initial number of game balls = 520, the command of the operation instruction is transmitted to the P unit, and the P unit as an operation response: SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of added balls = 3, subtraction The response including the addition / subtraction data of the number of balls = 23 is transmitted to the CU. After the response reaches CU, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 500, and if a power failure occurs in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to P units thereafter. In the P unit, as described in FIG. 47, when the command can not be received for 1 second or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped. Put it in a stopped state. Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and the game ball = 500 + 6-36 = 470 is calculated accordingly The game ball = 470 is stored.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed in the CU as in the process of FIG. 49, and the chip ID authentication sequence is performed between the CU and P units. Is executed. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous addition ball number as the previous ball number = 3, the previous subtraction ball number = 23, the previous start opening 1 count = 1, the previous start opening 2 count = 1, current ball The number of current game balls = 470, the number of current addition balls = 6, the current number of subtraction balls = 36, the current number of starting openings = 2 and the current number of starting openings = 2 are stored and sent to CU as a recovery response. Do.

  In the CU, it is determined that the communication partners are the same and both SQNs match, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 470, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start It corrects to mouth 1 total = 2 and starting mouth 2 total 2 =.

  Next, referring to FIG. 77, the power is cut off and the communication connection is disconnected in a state where the operation instruction has not been reached during the normal play, and the power is supplied in the state where the same CU and P units are connected. A recovery process in the case of recovery from disconnection or communication disconnection will be described. As the initial game ball number = 520, the P unit which received the command of the operation instruction, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 23, the number of starting openings 1 times After sending a response of = 1 and starting opening 2 times = 1 to the CU, and the CU accordingly modifying it to SQN = n + 2, gaming ball = 500, the CU is requested as no operation and SQN = n + 2 as an operation instruction Send a command to P units. If the command does not reach P and the power is cut off immediately thereafter, the P can not receive a command for more than one second after transmitting the last response as in the process of FIG. 47. In this case, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state transition is made to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting and firing motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed in the CU as in the process of FIG. 49, and the chip ID authentication sequence is performed between the CU and P units. Is executed. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous addition ball number as the previous ball number = 3, the previous subtraction ball number = 23, the previous start opening 1 count = 1, the previous start opening 2 count = 1, current ball Number of current game balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470, current number of added balls = 6, current number of subtracted balls = 36, current start opening 1 count = 2, current start opening 2 times = 2 and recovery response Send to CU as.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being transmitted, and the SQN on the CU side is more advanced than the SQN on the P base side, so recovery data sent in the recovery response is used. Process to correct the backup value. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 470, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start It corrects to mouth 1 total = 2 and starting mouth 2 total 2 =.

  Next, referring to FIG. 78, the power is cut off and the communication connection is disconnected in the state where the operation response is not reached during the normal play, and the power is supplied in the state where the same CU and P units are connected. A recovery process in the case of recovery from disconnection or communication disconnection will be described. After sending and receiving normal operation instructions and normal operation responses between CU and P as a number of initial game balls = 520, a command of no request and operation instruction of SQN = n + 2 is sent to P units After that, the P unit transmits a response of SQN = n + 3, number of game balls = 470, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings = 2, number of starting openings 2 = 2 to CU as operation response did. However, when the response does not reach the CU, and the power is cut off at the CU before the CU executes the operation response process according to the response, the point P is one second after the last response transmission. If the command is not transmitted, the disconnection detection is detected, and the driving of the ball hitting and firing motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed in the CU as in the process of FIG. 49, and the chip ID authentication sequence is performed between the CU and P units. Is executed. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, last number of balls as previous number of balls = 6, last subtracted number of balls = 36, last start opening 1 count = 2, last start opening 2 count = 2, current ball Current game ball number = 470-3 = 467, current addition ball number = 0, current subtraction ball number = 3, current start opening 1 count = 0, current start opening 2 times = 0 is stored as a number, and recovery response Send to CU as.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (number of gaming balls of CU) + 6 (number of previously added balls) + 0 (the number of currently added balls)-36 (the number of previously subtracted balls)-3 (the number of currently subtracted balls) = 467 Total number of additional balls = 6 (previous number of additional balls) + 0 (current number of additional balls), total number of subtractive balls = 36 (previous number of subtractive balls) + 3 (current number of subtractive balls), starting opening 1 total = 2 (previous starting opening) 1 number of times) + 0 (current start opening 1 number of times), total of starting opening 2 = 2 (previous start opening 2 times) + 0 (current start opening 2 times).

  Next, referring to FIG. 79, in the case where a power failure or communication connection disconnection occurs during an operation instruction interval period during normal play, power is disconnected in a state in which different CUs and P units are connected. The recovery processing in the case of recovery from communication disconnection will be described. Similar to FIG. 76, the command of the operation instruction is transmitted to P in the state of SQN = n with the initial number of game balls = 520, P is the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, addition The response including the addition / subtraction data of the number of balls = 3 and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is transmitted to the CU. After the response reaches CU, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 500, and if a power failure occurs in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to P units thereafter. In the P unit, as described in FIG. 47, when the command can not be received for 1 second or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped to play. Put it in a stopped state. Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and the game ball = 500 + 6-36 = 470 is calculated accordingly The game ball = 470 is stored.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P is switched for some reason while the power is off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 79, from the state in which CU1 and P base 1 are initially connected, switching is made to a state in which CU2 and P base 1 are connected and CU1 and P base 2 are connected. It shall be. Then, when the power is restored and activated in the CU while the connection state between the CU and the P is switched, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed in the CU as in the process of FIG. 49. , And CU and a chip ID authentication sequence is executed. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units. In the example shown in FIG. 79, CU2 and P unit 2 newly connected are assumed to be both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU 2 is 0, and P unit 2 holds it. The previous addition ball number and the last subtraction ball number, the previous start opening 1 times, the previous start opening 2 times, the current gaming ball number, the current addition ball number, the current subtraction ball number, the current start opening 1 number, the current start opening 2 times Is assumed to be zero.

  In the P car 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous added ball number as the previous ball number = 3, the previous subtracted ball number = 23, the previous starting opening 1 count = 1, the previous starting opening 2 count = 1, current The current game ball number = 470, the current addition ball number = 6, the current subtraction ball number = 36, the current number of starting openings = 2 and the current number of starting openings = 2 are stored as the number of balls. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 is switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power failure, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value . Specifically, with each backup value as the initial value, the number of gaming balls is 0, the total number of additional balls is 0, the total number of subtraction balls is 0, the total number of starting openings is 0, and the total number of starting openings is 0.

  On the other hand, in P table 2, with the recovery data at the initial value, SQN = n, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous start openings = 0, and the number of previous start openings = 0. , Send to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since CU1's connection partner has been switched to P2, CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before power-off, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of gaming balls maintains the value 500 before power-off as it is, addition ball accumulation = 0, subtraction ball accumulation = 0, starting opening 1 accumulation = 0, starting opening 2 accumulation = 0 I assume.

  Incidentally, the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of P unit 1 is manually corrected by a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by a staff of the game arcade or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 80, in the case where power cut or communication connection disconnection occurs in a state where the operation instruction has not been reached during normal play, the power source is in a state where different CUs and P units are connected. A recovery process in the case of recovery from disconnection or communication disconnection will be described. Similar to FIG. 77, P units receiving an operation instruction command with the initial game ball number = 520 have SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of balls subtracted as the operation response. 23. After sending a response to the CU to the start opening 1 count = 1 and the start opening 2 times = 1 and the CU accordingly corrects it to SQN = n + 2, game ball = 500, the CU requests as an operation instruction Send no and SQN = n + 2 commands to P units. If the command does not reach P and the power is cut off immediately thereafter, the P can not receive a command for more than one second after transmitting the last response as in the process of FIG. 47. In this case, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state transition is made to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting and firing motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P is switched for some reason while the power is off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 80, from the state where CU1 and P base 1 are connected first, it is switched to the state where CU2 and P base 1 are connected and CU1 and P base 2 are connected. It shall be. Then, when the power is restored and activated in the CU while the connection state between the CU and the P is switched, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed in the CU as in the process of FIG. 49. , And CU and a chip ID authentication sequence is executed. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units. In the example shown in FIG. 80, CU2 and P unit 2 newly connected are both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU 2 is 0, and P unit 2 holds it. The previous addition ball number and the last subtraction ball number, the previous start opening 1 times, the previous start opening 2 times, the current gaming ball number, the current addition ball number, the current subtraction ball number, the current start opening 1 number, the current start opening 2 times Is assumed to be zero.

  In the P car 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous added ball number as the previous ball number = 3, the previous subtracted ball number = 23, the previous starting opening 1 count = 1, the previous starting opening 2 count = 1, current The current game ball number = 470, the current addition ball number = 6, the current subtraction ball number = 36, the current number of starting openings = 2 and the current number of starting openings = 2 are stored as the number of balls. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 is switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power failure, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value . Specifically, with each backup value as the initial value, the number of gaming balls is 0, the total number of additional balls is 0, the total number of subtraction balls is 0, the total number of starting openings is 0, and the total number of starting openings is 0.

  On the other hand, in P table 2, with the recovery data at the initial value, SQN = n, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous start openings = 0, and the number of previous start openings = 0. , Send to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since CU1's connection partner has been switched to P2, CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before power-off, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of gaming balls maintains the value 500 before power-off as it is, addition ball accumulation = 0, subtraction ball accumulation = 0, starting opening 1 accumulation = 0, starting opening 2 accumulation = 0 I assume.

  Incidentally, the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of P unit 1 is manually corrected by a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by a staff of the game arcade or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 81, in the case where a power cut-off or communication connection cut-off occurs in a state where the operation response has not been reached during normal play, the power supply is in a state where different CUs and P units are connected. A recovery process in the case of recovery from disconnection or communication disconnection will be described. As in FIG. 78, after the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are reciprocally transmitted and received between the CU and the P unit as the initial game ball number = 520, the command of the operation instruction of no request and SQN = n + 2 is After being transmitted to the P unit, the P unit is an operation response: SQN = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 470, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings = 2, number of starting openings = 2 Sent a response to CU. However, when the response does not reach the CU, and the power is cut off at the CU before the CU executes the operation response process according to the response, the point P is one second after the last response transmission. If the command is not transmitted, the disconnection detection is detected, and the driving of the ball hitting and firing motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P is switched for some reason while the power is off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 81, from the state in which CU1 and P base 1 are initially connected, switching is made to a state in which CU2 and P base 1 are connected and CU1 and P base 2 are connected. It shall be. Then, when the power is restored and activated in the CU while the connection state between the CU and the P is switched, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed in the CU as in the process of FIG. 49. , And CU and a chip ID authentication sequence is executed. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units. In the example shown in FIG. 81, it is assumed that CU2 and P unit 2 newly connected are both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU 2 is 0, and P unit 2 holds it. The previous addition ball number and the last subtraction ball number, the previous start opening 1 times, the previous start opening 2 times, the current gaming ball number, the current addition ball number, the current subtraction ball number, the current start opening 1 number, the current start opening 2 times Is assumed to be zero.

  In the P car 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the number of previous addition balls = 6 as the previous number of balls, the number of last subtraction balls = 36, the number of previous start openings 1 count = 2, the previous start openings 2 times = 2, current The current game ball number = 467, the current addition ball number = 0, the current subtraction ball number = 3, the current start opening 1 count = 0, the current start opening 2 count = 0 is stored as the ball number, and the recovery response is sent to CU2. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 is switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power failure, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value . Specifically, with each backup value as the initial value, the number of gaming balls is 0, the total number of additional balls is 0, the total number of subtraction balls is 0, the total number of starting openings is 0, and the total number of starting openings is 0.

  On the other hand, in P table 2, with the recovery data at the initial value, SQN = n, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous start openings = 0, and the number of previous start openings = 0. , Send to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since CU1's connection partner has been switched to P2, CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before power-off, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of gaming balls maintains the value 500 before power-off as it is, addition ball accumulation = 0, subtraction ball accumulation = 0, starting opening 1 accumulation = 0, starting opening 2 accumulation = 0 I assume.

  Incidentally, the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of P unit 1 is manually corrected by a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by a staff of the game arcade or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 82, in the case where a power failure or communication connection disconnection occurs on the CU side at the stage before reaching the addition request, the power is disconnected in the state where the same CU and P units are connected. The recovery processing in the case of recovery from communication disconnection will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the prepaid balance is 1000 yen, the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted / received between the CU and the P unit, based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls generated therebetween When the game ball reaches 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of requested addition balls = 125, calculates the balance = 1000 yen-500 yen = 500 yen, updates the balance to 500 yen, and determines the consumption of the balance at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, a balance = 500, and an addition request ball number = 125 to the P units as an operation instruction. If this command does not reach P, the P detects the disconnection and drives the bat firing motor 18 at the stage where the command does not receive the last response and continues not to receive the command for 1 second. Stop and stop playing.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 46, when there is no response from P units due to the non-arriving of a command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the response is performed even after the second retransmission. Is not sent back, a communication error (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started 5 seconds after that.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P, as in the process of FIG. It should be noted that, unlike the power-on shown in FIG. 48, at the time of communication disconnection shown in FIG. 82, only the chip ID authentication sequence between CU and P is executed without executing the communication control IC authentication sequence inside the CU. Run. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous addition ball number as the previous ball number = 3, the previous subtraction ball number = 23, the previous start opening 1 count = 1, the previous start opening 2 count = 1, current ball The number of current game balls = 470, the number of current addition balls = 6, the current number of subtraction balls = 36, the current number of starting openings = 2 and the current number of starting openings = 2 are stored and sent to CU as a recovery response. Do.

  Since the CU has the same communication counterpart and is one more advanced than the SQN on the P side than the SQN on the P side, processing for correcting the backup value based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response is performed. Do. Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of currently added balls)-36 (the number of currently subtracted balls) = 595, the total number of added balls = 6, the total number of subtracted balls = 36, start It corrects to mouth 1 total = 2 and starting mouth 2 total 2 =.

  Next, referring to FIG. 83, the power is cut off and the communication connection is disconnected on the CU side before the operation response to the addition request is reached, and the same CU and P units are connected. The recovery process in the case of recovery from a power failure or communication failure will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the prepaid balance = 1,000 yen, the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted / received between the CU and P units, and the game balls = based on the number of additional subtraction balls generated therebetween After becoming 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, in the CU, SQN = n + 2, the number of requested addition balls = 125, and the balance = 1000 yen-500 yen = 500 yen is calculated, the balance is made 500 yen, and the consumption of the balance is fixed at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command of addition request existence, SQN = n + 2, balance = 500, and addition request ball number = 125 to P as an operation instruction. As for the P unit that received it, the response of SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 595, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of starting openings 1 = 2, and the number 2 of starting openings 2 as operation response Send to CU. If the response does not reach the CU, and a power failure occurs before the operation response processing according to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the P unit, as described in FIG. 47, when the command can not be received for 1 second or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped Put it in a stopped state. Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, the game ball = 595-3 = 592 is calculated And the game ball = 592 is stored.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed in the CU as in the process of FIG. 49, and the chip ID authentication sequence is performed between the CU and P units. Is executed. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, last number of balls as previous number of balls = 6, last subtracted number of balls = 36, last start opening 1 count = 2, last start opening 2 count = 2, current ball The present game ball number as number = 592, the current addition ball number 0, the current subtraction ball number 3, the current number of starting openings 1 = 0, the current number of starting openings 2 = 0 are stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response Do.

  The CU determines that the communication partner is the same and the operation instruction is being transmitted, and that the P SQNs are advanced by 1, and performs a process of correcting the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted by the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (number of previously added balls) + 0 (number of currently added balls)-36 (number of previously subtracted balls)-3 (currently reduced balls) = 592 Total number of additional balls = 6 (previous number of additional balls) + 0 (current number of additional balls), total number of subtractive balls = 36 (previous number of subtractive balls) + 3 (current number of subtractive balls), starting opening 1 total = 2 (previous starting opening) 1 number of times) + 0 (current start opening 1 number of times), total of starting opening 2 = 2 (previous start opening 2 times) + 0 (current start opening 2 times).

  Next, referring to FIG. 84, power is cut off and communication connection is cut on the CU side at the stage before reaching the addition request, and power is cut in a state where different CUs and P units are connected. The recovery processing in the case of recovery from communication disconnection will be described. Similar to FIG. 82, with the initial number of game balls = 520 and the prepaid balance of 1000 yen, the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P unit, and the number of added balls generated therebetween At the stage where the number of gaming balls is equal to 500 based on the number of subtracted balls, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of requested addition balls = 125, calculates the balance = 1000 yen-500 yen = 500 yen, updates the balance to 500 yen, and determines the consumption of the balance at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, a balance = 500, and an addition request ball number = 125 to the P units as an operation instruction. If this command does not reach P, the P detects the disconnection and drives the bat firing motor 18 at the stage where the command does not receive the last response and continues not to receive the command for 1 second. Stop and stop playing.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 46, when there is no response from P units due to the non-arriving of a command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the response is performed even after the second retransmission. Is not sent back, a communication error (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started 5 seconds after that.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P is switched for some reason while the power is off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 84, from the state where CU1 and P base 1 are connected first, it is switched to the state where CU2 and P base 1 are connected and CU1 and P base 2 are connected. It shall be. Then, after starting the reconnection sequence in a state in which the connection state between the CU and the P is switched, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU as in the process of FIG. A chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the table and the table. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units. In the example shown in FIG. 84, CU2 and P unit 2 newly connected are both in the initial state, and the number of game balls held by CU2 is 0, and P unit 2 holds it. The previous addition ball number and the last subtraction ball number, the previous start opening 1 times, the previous start opening 2 times, the current gaming ball number, the current addition ball number, the current subtraction ball number, the current start opening 1 number, the current start opening 2 times Is assumed to be zero.

  In the P car 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous added ball number as the previous ball number = 3, the previous subtracted ball number = 23, the previous starting opening 1 count = 1, the previous starting opening 2 count = 1, current The current game ball number = 470, the current addition ball number = 6, the current subtraction ball number = 36, the current number of starting openings = 2 and the current number of starting openings = 2 are stored as the number of balls. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 is switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power failure, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value . Specifically, with each backup value as the initial value, the number of gaming balls is 0, the total number of additional balls is 0, the total number of subtraction balls is 0, the total number of starting openings is 0, and the total number of starting openings is 0.

  On the other hand, in P table 2, with the recovery data at the initial value, SQN = n, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous start openings = 0, and the number of previous start openings = 0. , Send to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since CU1's connection partner has been switched to P2, CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before power-off, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of game balls maintains the value 625 before power-off as it is, addition ball total 0 = 0, subtraction ball total 0 = 0, start opening 1 total 0 = 0, start opening 2 total 0 = 0 I assume.

  Incidentally, the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of P unit 1 is manually corrected by a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by a staff of the game arcade or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, when a power failure or communication connection disconnection occurs on the CU side at the stage before reaching the operation response to the addition request, different CU and P units are connected. The recovery process in the case of recovery from a power failure or communication failure will be described. Similar to FIG. 83, assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the prepaid balance = 1,000 yen, the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and P units, and the number of added subtraction balls generated therebetween After the game ball becomes 500 on the basis of the above, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, in the CU, SQN = n + 2, the number of requested addition balls = 125, and the balance = 1000 yen-500 yen = 500 yen is calculated, the balance is made 500 yen, and the consumption of the balance is fixed at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command of addition request existence, SQN = n + 2, balance = 500, and addition request ball number = 125 to P as an operation instruction. As for the P unit that received it, the response of SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 595, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of starting openings 1 = 2, and the number 2 of starting openings 2 as operation response Send to CU. If the response does not reach the CU, and a power failure occurs before the operation response processing according to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the P unit, as described in FIG. 47, when the command can not be received for 1 second or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped to play. Put it in a stopped state. Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, the game ball = 595-3 = 592 is calculated And the game ball = 592 is stored.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P is switched for some reason while the power is off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 85, from the state in which CU1 and P base 1 are initially connected, switching is made to a state in which CU2 and P base 1 are connected and CU1 and P base 2 are connected. It shall be. Then, when the power is restored and activated in the CU while the connection state between the CU and the P is switched, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed in the CU as in the process of FIG. 49. , And CU and a chip ID authentication sequence is executed. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units. In the example shown in FIG. 85, it is assumed that CU2 and P unit 2 newly connected are both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU 2 is 0, and P unit 2 holds it. The previous addition ball number and the last subtraction ball number, the previous start opening 1 times, the previous start opening 2 times, the current gaming ball number, the current addition ball number, the current subtraction ball number, the current start opening 1 number, the current start opening 2 times Is assumed to be zero.

  In the P car 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the number of previous addition balls = 6 as the previous number of balls, the number of last subtraction balls = 36, the number of previous start openings 1 count = 2, the previous start openings 2 times = 2, current The current number of game balls = 592, the number of current addition balls = 0, the current number of subtraction balls = 3, the current number of starting openings = 0, the current number of starting openings 2 times = 0 are stored as the number of balls to CU2 as a recovery response. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 is switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power failure, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value . Specifically, with each backup value as the initial value, the number of gaming balls is 0, the total number of additional balls is 0, the total number of subtraction balls is 0, the total number of starting openings is 0, and the total number of starting openings is 0.

  On the other hand, in P table 2, with the recovery data at the initial value, SQN = n, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous start openings = 0, and the number of previous start openings = 0. , Send to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since CU1's connection partner has been switched to P2, CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before power-off, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of game balls maintains the value 625 before power-off as it is, addition ball total 0 = 0, subtraction ball total 0 = 0, start opening 1 total 0 = 0, start opening 2 total 0 = 0 I assume.

  Incidentally, the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of P unit 1 is manually corrected by a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by a staff of the game arcade or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 86, in the case where power cut or communication connection cut occurs on the CU side at the stage before reaching the subtraction request, the power is cut with the same CU and P units connected. The recovery processing in the case of recovery from communication disconnection will be described. As the initial number of game balls = 520, transmission and reception of the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are performed between the CU and the P unit, and at the stage when the number of game balls = 500 according to the number of addition and subtraction balls in the meantime When a request for subtraction of 300 balls is generated due to a request for wagon service, etc., the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of required subtraction balls = 300, and as a movement instruction, there is a request for subtraction, SQN = n + 2, and a reduction request ball Send a command of number = 300 to P units.

  If this command does not reach P, the P detects the disconnection and drives the bat firing motor 18 at a stage where the command does not receive the command after the last response is continued for 1 second. Stop and stop playing.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 46, when there is no response from P units due to the non-arriving of a command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the response is performed even after the second retransmission. Is not sent back, a communication error (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started 5 seconds after that.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P, as in the process of FIG. It should be noted that, unlike the power-on shown in FIG. 48, at the time of communication disconnection shown in FIG. 86, only the chip ID authentication sequence between CU and P is executed without executing the communication control IC authentication sequence inside the CU. Run. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous addition ball number as the previous ball number = 3, the previous subtraction ball number = 23, the previous start opening 1 count = 1, the previous start opening 2 count = 1, current ball The number of current game balls = 470, the number of current addition balls = 6, the current number of subtraction balls = 36, the current number of starting openings = 2 and the current number of starting openings = 2 are stored and sent to CU as a recovery response. Do.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1, so it is determined that the subtraction request is not executed on P units, and backup is performed based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. Perform processing to correct the value. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 470, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start It corrects to mouth 1 total = 2 and starting mouth 2 total 2 =.

  As described above, the CU determines that the subtraction request is not executed on the P machine based on the value of SQN, so that the correction request of 300 balls is generated in the correction of the backup value accompanying the recovery process. Although being raised, subtraction of the required number of balls 300 is not performed from the number of game balls.

  Next, referring to FIG. 87, the power is cut off and the communication connection is disconnected on the CU side before the arrival of the operation response to the subtraction request, and the same CU and P units are connected. A recovery process in the case of recovery from a power failure or communication failure in the state will be described. The initial game ball number is set to 520, and a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P unit, and the number of game balls is set to 500 according to the number of added subtraction balls generated during that time. When a request for wagon service for 300 balls is generated at the stage, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, and there is a demand for subtraction, SQN = n + 2, and the number of balls required for subtraction as operation instructions. Send a command of = 300 to P units.

  In response to this, the P unit receives a response of SQN = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 170, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings = 2 and number of starting openings 2 times = 2 to CU Send. If the response does not reach the CU, and a power failure occurs before the processing of the operation response according to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU will not be transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the P unit, as described in FIG. 47, when the command can not be received for 1 second or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped Put it in a stopped state. Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and the game ball = 170-3 = 167 is calculated accordingly The game ball = 167 and SQN = n + 3 are stored.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the connection sequence is resumed as in FIG. 49, and the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU, and between the CU and P units. The chip ID authentication sequence is performed. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, last number of balls as previous number of balls = 6, last subtracted number of balls = 36, last start opening 1 count = 2, last start opening 2 count = 2, current ball The current game ball number as number = 167, the current ball number to be added = 0, the current ball number to be subtracted = 3, the current number of starting openings = 0, the current number of starting openings = 0 is stored and sent to CU as a recovery response Do.

  In the CU, it is determined that the P unit has received the subtraction instruction because the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction transmission is in progress, and the P SQN is advanced by 1, and the recovery transmitted by the recovery response Perform processing to correct backup values based on data. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (number of gaming balls of CU) + 6 (number of previously added balls) + 0 (the number of currently added balls)-36 (the number of previously subtracted balls)-3 (the number of currently subtracted balls) = 467 Total number of additional balls = 6 (previous number of additional balls) + 0 (current number of additional balls), total number of subtractive balls = 36 (previous number of subtractive balls) + 3 (current number of subtractive balls), starting opening 1 total = 2 (previous starting opening) 1 number of times) + 0 (current start opening 1 number of times), total of starting opening 2 = 2 (previous start opening 2 times) + 0 (current start opening 2 times).

  The CU sends a recovery request at power-on to resume the connection sequence, but determines that the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN sent from P do not match, as shown in FIG. The connection sequence for reconnection shown in FIG. 49 is executed instead of the connection sequence for startup. As a result, the CU forcibly adds the game balls for the subtraction cancellation to the P base with the operation instruction after recovery, and corrects the SQN as well as the game ball correction ON, the game ball = 467, the SQN correction ON, and the SQN = A communication start request including n + 2 is transmitted to P units (see FIG. 49). In response to that, the P unit corrects and stores the game ball = 467 and SQN = n + 3.

  Thus, even if it is determined that the P unit receives the subtraction instruction, the reason for performing the subtraction cancellation processing is that the P unit that received the subtraction instruction always performs the subtraction process according to the subtraction instruction There is also a possibility that refusal of subtraction was performed on the P side. When the subtraction is rejected on the P side, if the subtraction is determined on the CU side, there is a disadvantage that the remaining number of game balls becomes a negative value. For this reason, subtraction cancellation is performed. As a result, when such a CU side power failure occurs, although the P unit side should have refused the subtraction instruction because there are not enough remaining points, the subtraction is performed and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the number of remaining game balls on the machine side becomes a negative value.

  Next, referring to FIG. 88, in the case where power cut or communication connection cut occurs on the CU side at the stage before reaching the subtraction request, the power is cut in a state where different CUs and P units are connected. The recovery processing in the case of recovery from communication disconnection will be described. Similar to FIG. 86, with the initial number of game balls = 520, transmission and reception of a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are performed between the CU and the P unit, and the number of game balls = according to the number of addition / subtraction balls in the meantime At the stage where it became 500, when a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to a request for wagon service etc., the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, and there is a subtraction request as an operation instruction, SQN = Send a command of n + 2 and the required number of balls for subtraction = 300 to the P unit.

  If this command does not reach P, the P detects the disconnection and drives the bat firing motor 18 at a stage where the command does not receive the command after the last response is continued for 1 second. Stop and stop playing.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 46, when there is no response from P units due to the non-arriving of a command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the response is performed even after the second retransmission. Is not sent back, a communication error (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started 5 seconds after that.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P is switched for some reason while the power is off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 88, from the state where CU1 and P base 1 are connected first, it is switched to the state where CU2 and P base 1 are connected and CU1 and P base 2 are connected. It shall be. Then, after starting the reconnection sequence in a state in which the connection state between the CU and the P is switched, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU as in the process of FIG. A chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the table and the table. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units. In the example shown in FIG. 88, CU2 and P unit 2 newly connected are assumed to be both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU2 is 0, and P unit 2 holds it. The previous addition ball number and the last subtraction ball number, the previous start opening 1 times, the previous start opening 2 times, the current gaming ball number, the current addition ball number, the current subtraction ball number, the current start opening 1 number, the current start opening 2 times Is assumed to be zero.

  In the P car 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous added ball number as the previous ball number = 3, the previous subtracted ball number = 23, the previous starting opening 1 count = 1, the previous starting opening 2 count = 1, current The current game ball number = 470, the current addition ball number = 6, the current subtraction ball number = 36, the current number of starting openings = 2 and the current number of starting openings = 2 are stored as the number of balls. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 is switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power failure, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value . Specifically, with each backup value as the initial value, the number of gaming balls is 0, the total number of additional balls is 0, the total number of subtraction balls is 0, the total number of starting openings is 0, and the total number of starting openings is 0.

  On the other hand, in P table 2, with the recovery data at the initial value, SQN = n, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous start openings = 0, and the number of previous start openings = 0. , Send to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since CU1's connection partner has been switched to P2, CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before power-off, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of gaming balls maintains the value 500 before power-off as it is, addition ball accumulation = 0, subtraction ball accumulation = 0, starting opening 1 accumulation = 0, starting opening 2 accumulation = 0 I assume.

  Incidentally, the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of P unit 1 is manually corrected by a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by a staff of the game arcade or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 89, a case is shown where a power failure or communication connection disconnection occurs on the CU side before the arrival of the operation response to the subtraction request, and different CUs and P units are connected. A recovery process in the case of recovery from a power failure or communication failure in the state will be described. Similar to FIG. 87, assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, transmission and reception of a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are performed between the CU and the P unit, and the game balls according to the number of added subtraction balls generated during that time. When the wagon service request for 300 balls is generated at the stage where the number is 500, the CU is set to SQN = n + 2, the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, and the operation instruction is: there is a subtraction required, SQN = n + 2 , And a command for the number of balls required for subtraction = 300 to P unit.

  In response to this, the P unit receives a response of SQN = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 170, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings = 2 and number of starting openings 2 times = 2 to CU Send. If the response does not reach the CU, and a power failure occurs before the processing of the operation response according to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU will not be transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the P unit, as described in FIG. 47, when the command can not be received for 1 second or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped Put it in a stopped state. Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and the game ball = 170-3 = 167 is calculated accordingly The game ball = 167 and SQN = n + 3 are stored.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P is switched for some reason while the power is off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 89, from the state where CU1 and P base 1 are connected first, it is switched to the state where CU2 and P base 1 are connected and CU1 and P base 2 are connected. It shall be. Then, if the power is restored and activated in the CU while the connection state between the CU and P units is switched, the connection sequence is resumed as in FIG. 49, and the communication control IC authentication sequence is performed in the CU. While being executed, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P units. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units. In the example shown in FIG. 89, CU2 and P unit 2 newly connected are assumed to be both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU 2 is 0, and P unit 2 holds it. The previous addition ball number and the last subtraction ball number, the previous start opening 1 times, the previous start opening 2 times, the current gaming ball number, the current addition ball number, the current subtraction ball number, the current start opening 1 number, the current start opening 2 times Is assumed to be zero.

  In the P car 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the number of previous addition balls = 6 as the previous number of balls, the number of last subtraction balls = 36, the number of previous start openings 1 count = 2, the previous start openings 2 times = 2, current The current number of game balls = 592, the number of current addition balls = 0, the current number of subtraction balls = 3, the current number of starting openings = 0, the current number of starting openings 2 times = 0 are stored as the number of balls to CU2 as a recovery response. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 is switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power failure, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value . Specifically, with each backup value as the initial value, the number of gaming balls is 0, the total number of additional balls is 0, the total number of subtraction balls is 0, the total number of starting openings is 0, and the total number of starting openings is 0.

  On the other hand, in P table 2, with the recovery data at the initial value, SQN = n, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous start openings = 0, and the number of previous start openings = 0. , Send to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since CU1's connection partner has been switched to P2, CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before power-off, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of gaming balls maintains the value 500 before power-off as it is, addition ball accumulation = 0, subtraction ball accumulation = 0, starting opening 1 accumulation = 0, starting opening 2 accumulation = 0 I assume.

  Incidentally, the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of P unit 1 is manually corrected by a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by a staff of the game arcade or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 90, in the case where a power failure or communication connection disconnection occurs on the CU side at the stage before reaching the clear request, the power is shut down with the same CU and P units connected. The recovery processing in the case of recovery from communication disconnection will be described. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of gaming balls = 500. In FIG. 90, as in the process of FIG. 57, the CU instructs the P units to operate as a prohibition request for prohibiting a game, a clear request none, a clear display OFF and a card return processing ON. A command including data is transmitted to P units (not shown in FIG. 90). In response to that, in the P unit, a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF, game prohibition and game completion OFF is sent back to the CU as an operation response (not shown in FIG. 90). Then, as in the process of FIG. 57, in the P-unit, a 10-second wait is provided, and polling is continued between the P-unit and the CU during the 10-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, and transmits a command including clear request present and SQN = n + 2 to the P units as the operation instruction, but when the command does not reach the P units, the P units are the last After one response is sent and the command is not received continues for one second, the disconnection is detected and the driving of the ball striking and firing motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 46, when there is no response from P units due to the non-arriving of a command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the response is performed even after the second retransmission. Is not sent back, a communication error (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started 5 seconds after that.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P as in FIG. It is to be noted that, unlike the time of power supply startup shown in FIG. 48, at the time of communication disconnection shown in FIG. 90, only the chip ID authentication sequence between CU and P is executed without executing the communication control IC authentication sequence inside the CU. Run. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous addition ball count as the previous ball count = 0, the previous subtraction ball count = 0, the previous start opening 1 count = 0, the previous start opening 2 count = 0, the current ball The number of current game balls = 500, the number of current addition balls = 0, the current number of subtraction balls = 0, the current start opening 1 count = 0, the current start opening 2 times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response Do.

  The CU determines that the clear request has not arrived because the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. Do the process. Specifically, game ball number = 500 (current game ball number) + 0 (current addition ball number)-0 (current subtraction ball number) = 500, total addition ball number = 0, total subtraction ball number = 0, starting opening Correct 1 cumulative total = 0, start opening 2 cumulative total = 0.

  Next, referring to FIG. 91, the same CU and P units are connected in the case where a power failure or communication connection disconnection occurs on the CU side before the arrival of the operation response to the clear request. A recovery process in the case of recovery from a power failure or communication failure in the state will be described. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of gaming balls = 500. In FIG. 91, as in the process of FIG. 57, the CU instructs the P units to prohibit the game, prohibit the game, prohibit the clear, turn off the clear display, and turn on the card return process. A command including data is transmitted to P units (not shown in FIG. 91). In response to that, in the P unit, as the operation response, the response including the prohibition refusal OFF, the game prohibition data and the game completion OFF is sent back to the CU (not shown in FIG. 91). Then, as in the process of FIG. 57, in the P-unit, a 10-second wait is provided, and polling is continued between the P-unit and the CU during the 10-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and transmits a command including clear request present and SQN = n + 2 to the P units as an operation instruction.

  Then, in response to this operation instruction, the P unit clears the game ball to 0 according to the clear request and sets the game ball to 0, and clears the SQN to 0 and sets SQN to 0, and then the SQN as an operation response. A response of 0, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of times of start opening = 0, and the number of times of start opening 2 = 0 is transmitted to the CU. If the response does not reach the CU, and a power failure occurs in the CU before performing the operation response process according to the response, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the P unit, as described in FIG. 47, when the command can not be received for one second or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state is shifted to the unconnected state.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the connection sequence is resumed as in the process of FIG. 49, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed in the CU, and the CU and P are The chip ID authentication sequence is executed between them. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = 0, the previous addition ball count as the previous ball count = 0, the previous subtraction ball count = 0, the previous start opening 1 count = 0, the previous start opening 2 count = 0, current ball The present game ball number as a number = 0, the current addition ball number = 0, the current subtraction ball number = 0, the current start opening 1 count = 0, the current start opening 2 count = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response Do.

  The CU determines that the P unit is cleared because the S unit S on the P unit side is 0, and performs processing to correct the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted by the recovery response. Specifically, game ball number = 500 (CU backup value) + 0 (current addition ball number)-0 (current subtraction ball number) = 500, total addition ball number = 0 (current addition ball number), subtraction ball number The cumulative total is corrected to 0 (current subtraction ball number), the starting opening 1 total is 0 (current starting opening 1 times), and the starting opening 2 total is 0 (current starting opening 2 times).

  Next, referring to FIG. 92, in the case where a power failure or communication connection disconnection occurs on the CU side at the stage before reaching the clear request, the power is disconnected in a state where different CUs and P units are connected. The recovery processing in the case of recovery from communication disconnection will be described. Similarly to FIG. 90, the number of gaming balls = 500 when the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed. In FIG. 92, as in the process of FIG. 57, the CU instructs the P units to perform prohibition requests for prohibiting a game, no clear requests, clear display OFF and card return processing ON as an operation instruction. A command including data is transmitted to P units (not shown in FIG. 92). In response to that, in the P unit, a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF, game prohibition and game completion OFF is sent back to the CU as an operation response (not shown in FIG. 92). Then, as in the process of FIG. 57, in the P-unit, a 10-second wait is provided, and polling is continued between the P-unit and the CU during the 10-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, and transmits a command including clear request present and SQN = n + 2 to the P units as the operation instruction, but when the command does not reach the P units, the P units are the last After one response is sent and the command is not received continues for one second, the disconnection is detected and the driving of the ball striking and firing motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 46, when there is no response from P units due to the non-arriving of a command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the response is performed even after the second retransmission. Is not sent back, a communication error (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started 5 seconds after that.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P is switched for some reason while the power is off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 92, from the state in which CU1 and P base 1 are initially connected, switching is made to a state in which CU2 and P base 1 are connected and CU1 and P base 2 are connected. It shall be. Then, after starting the reconnection sequence in a state in which the connection state between the CU and P units is switched, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU as in FIG. The chip ID authentication sequence is executed between Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units. In the example shown in FIG. 92, CU2 and P unit 2 newly connected are assumed to be both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU2 is 0, and P unit 2 holds The previous addition ball number and the last subtraction ball number, the previous start opening 1 times, the previous start opening 2 times, the current gaming ball number, the current addition ball number, the current subtraction ball number, the current start opening 1 number, the current start opening 2 times Is assumed to be zero.

  In P table 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous addition ball number as the previous ball number = 0, the previous subtraction ball number = 0, the previous start opening 1 count = 0, the previous start opening 2 count = 0, current The current game ball number 0, the current addition ball number 0, the current subtraction ball number 0, the current start opening 1 count 0, the current start opening 2 count 0 is stored as the ball number, and the recovery response is sent to CU2. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 is switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power failure, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value . Specifically, with each backup value as the initial value, the number of gaming balls is 0, the total number of additional balls is 0, the total number of subtraction balls is 0, the total number of starting openings is 0, and the total number of starting openings is 0.

  On the other hand, in P table 2, with the recovery data at the initial value, SQN = n, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous start openings = 0, and the number of previous start openings = 0. , Send to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since CU1's connection partner has been switched to P2, CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before power-off, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of gaming balls maintains the value 500 before power-off as it is, addition ball accumulation = 0, subtraction ball accumulation = 0, starting opening 1 accumulation = 0, starting opening 2 accumulation = 0 I assume.

  Incidentally, the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of P unit 1 is manually corrected by a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by a staff of the game arcade or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 93, a power failure or disconnection of the communication connection occurs on the CU side before the arrival of the operation response to the clear request, and different CUs and P units are connected. A recovery process in the case of recovery from a power failure or communication failure in the state will be described. Similarly to FIG. 91, when the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed and operated, the number of gaming balls = 500. In FIG. 93, as in the process of FIG. 57, the CU instructs the P units to perform prohibition requests for prohibiting a game, no clear requests, clear display OFF and card return processing ON as an operation instruction. A command including data is transmitted to P units (not shown in FIG. 93). In response to that, in the P unit, as the operation response, the response including the prohibition rejection OFF, the game prohibition data and the game completion OFF is sent back to the CU (not shown in FIG. 93). Then, as in the process of FIG. 57, in the P-unit, a 10-second wait is provided, and polling is continued between the P-unit and the CU during the 10-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and transmits a command including clear request present and SQN = n + 2 to the P units as an operation instruction.

  Then, in response to this operation instruction, the P unit clears the game ball to 0 according to the clear request and sets the game ball to 0, and clears the SQN to 0 and sets SQN to 0, and then the SQN as an operation response. A response of 0, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of times of start opening = 0, and the number of times of start opening 2 = 0 is transmitted to the CU. If the response does not reach the CU, and a power failure occurs in the CU before performing the operation response process according to the response, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the P unit, as described in FIG. 47, when the command can not be received for one second or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and the state is shifted to the unconnected state.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P is switched for some reason while the power is off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 93, from the state in which CU1 and P base 1 are initially connected, switching is made to a state in which CU2 and P base 1 are connected and CU1 and P base 2 are connected. It shall be. Then, when the power is restored and activated in the CU while the connection state between the CU and P units is switched, the connection sequence is resumed as in the process of FIG. 49, and the communication control IC authentication is performed in the CU. While the sequence is executed, the chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P units. Then, transmission and reception of recovery request commands and recovery response responses are performed between the CU and the P units. In the example shown in FIG. 93, it is assumed that CU2 and P unit 2 newly connected are both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU 2 is 0, and P unit 2 holds it. The previous addition ball number and the last subtraction ball number, the previous start opening 1 times, the previous start opening 2 times, the current gaming ball number, the current addition ball number, the current subtraction ball number, the current start opening 1 number, the current start opening 2 times Is assumed to be zero.

  In P stand 1, as recovery data, SQN = 0, previous number of balls as previous number of balls = 0, last subtracted number of balls = 0, previous start opening 1 count = 0, previous start opening 2 count = 0, current The current game ball number 0, the current addition ball number 0, the current subtraction ball number 0, the current start opening 1 count 0, the current start opening 2 count 0 is stored as the ball number, and the recovery response is sent to CU2. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 is switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power failure, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value . Specifically, with each backup value as the initial value, the number of gaming balls is 0, the total number of additional balls is 0, the total number of subtraction balls is 0, the total number of starting openings is 0, and the total number of starting openings is 0.

  On the other hand, in P table 2, with the recovery data at the initial value, SQN = n, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous start openings = 0, and the number of previous start openings = 0. , Send to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since CU1's connection partner has been switched to P2, CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before power-off, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response for correction of the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of gaming balls maintains the value 500 before power-off as it is, addition ball accumulation = 0, subtraction ball accumulation = 0, starting opening 1 accumulation = 0, starting opening 2 accumulation = 0 I assume.

  Incidentally, the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of P unit 1 is manually corrected by a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by a staff of the game arcade or the like.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the transition of the display screen on the CU side and the P base side, corresponding to the control operation at the time of insertion of the card shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 94, when the card is not inserted, a command of an operation instruction of card insertion processing OFF, addition display (card insertion) OFF is sent from the CU to the P base, and the game is prohibited as an operation response. , A response of game ball = 0 is sent from CU to CU. During transmission and reception of such commands and responses, as shown in [Normal screen (card not inserted)] at the upper left of FIG. 94, “None” in the “Card type” title column on the display 312 of the CU, “0 shot” is displayed in the “playing ball” title column. In addition, as shown in [Normal screen (card not inserted)] on the upper right of FIG. 94, “0 ball” and “card balance” titles are displayed in the column of “game ball” title on the display 54 of P units. "0 yen" is displayed in the field. In addition, on the display 312 and the display 43, various data indicating the gaming state of P units at the current time is displayed. For example, in FIG. 94, the number of times of start, the number of big hits, the number of definite variations, and the number of highest consecutive chans are displayed, and the number of starts between special prizes (effective start winnings between a certain big hit and the next big hit) The frequency is displayed as a bar graph. Furthermore, on the CU side display unit 312, an amount display portion for setting the credit amount, an amount display portion for the card balance, a display portion for the number of replayed balls, a display portion for the number of balls, and a display portion for the rate of rental balls. Is provided.

  Furthermore, the display unit 312 on the CU side is configured by the touch panel as described above, and display items of "base information", "setting change" and "order menu" are displayed at the upper left of each display screen By selecting any one and performing a touch operation, the display screen is switched to the touch operated display screen. In FIG. 94, a screen in a state in which “host information” is selected is displayed.

  In addition, the display unit 312 on the CU side is provided with a selection operation display unit for “return”, “lending”, “replay” and “calling” in the lower part of each display screen, and the player can use these display units. A command can be input to the CU by selecting any one and performing a touch operation. For example, when "Return" is touched, the inserted card is returned, and when "Loan" is touched, the game balls from the prepaid balance recorded in the inserted card are lent. Also, if "replay" is touched, replay using balls or balls of the inserted card (membership card) can be performed. When "call" is touched, a notification for calling a game center clerk is made.

  When the card is inserted, the CU transmits a command of no operation request to the P-unit as an operation instruction during the card insertion process. In response to this, the unit P detects that the card insertion process has been started on the CU side. After sending and receiving the command of the operation instruction, it is in a state of inquiring to the upper server (for example, the hall management computer 1). In the state in which this inquiry is in progress, the display 312 on the CU side displays "inquiring" as shown in the second "card balance inquiring screen" from the top, and also displays on the P side In the display unit 54, the server displays an arrow from the server to the IC in the lower left corner of the screen as shown in the second normal screen (during inquiry of card balance), and the server is inquired of the card inserted. The picture is displayed. Note that "IC" in the display screen indicates a card (IC card).

  In P units that have received the above-mentioned operation instruction, while waiting as an operation response, a response of game ball = 0 is sent back to the CU.

  In the CU, if the inserted card is collated by inquiring the server and the balls (= 5000) and the balance (= 7000) of the inserted card are determined, the card is being held as an operation instruction. , Add required ball number = 5000, card balance = send a command to P units. After the transmission of this command, the CU is being displayed in addition. On the P unit that has received this command, the CU detects that the card balance and the balls have been settled, and thereafter, the addition display is in progress.

  During the addition display, "5,000 balls" is displayed in the ball display column as shown on the third "Up in ball lending" screen from the top on the display 312 of the CU, and the game machine is headed. An arrow is displayed, and it is displayed to the player that it is in the middle of transmitting 5,000 balls to the gaming machine. On the other hand, in the P-unit, as shown on the third [Normal screen (during a rental)] from the top by the display 54, an arrow is displayed from the IC toward the game ball display unit and the card balance display unit. The display (during addition display) which is being added with the ball rental is thereby made. Then, "5000 balls" are displayed on the game ball display unit, and "7000 yen" is displayed on the card balance display unit.

  Next, a response including gaming ball = 5000 is transmitted as an operation response from the P unit to the CU. In the CU, when 2-3 seconds have elapsed since the movement display of the ball indicating the addition display is started, the addition display is ended and “member” indicating the card type inserted in the display 312, the game It switches to the state which displays "5000 shots" as a ball. On the other hand, in the P unit, the addition display is ended after a few seconds since the movement display of the ball during the addition display is started, and the movement display of the ball by the display 54 is ended.

  In this way, while the display of the start of the operation process such as during inquiry or addition display is started at the same time with CU and P units, the end of the display of those operation processes is ended from CU to P unit It is possible to terminate at a unique timing on the P-unit side without transmitting a command or the like, and there is no restriction on the end timing on the CU side. As a result, unique display can be performed on the P side.

  FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing control processing in the case where the player divides and transfers the game ball to another person while carrying out the game ball sharing during the game. In FIG. 95 and the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 96 and 97 described later, there is shown control in which the player can divide and transfer the game ball to another person and share the balls while continuing the game.

  Referring to FIG. 95, card A as a membership card with balls = 5000 is first inserted into CU. If this membership card is inserted into the CU, the membership card must be returned to the player at the end of the game even if the gaming value (balls, balls and prepaid balance) of the membership card is all zero. You must.

  After the card A is inserted, the CU transmits a command including the required number of added balls = 5000 to the P base to add “5000” which is the balls held by the card A on the P base side to the P base. In P unit, in response to that, the game ball is updated to 5000, and a response including the game ball = 5000 is transmitted to the CU as an operation response. After that, the game is started in P units, and at the stage when the number of game balls decreases to 4000 along with the execution of the game, the ball sharing of 1000 balls is transferred to another person for sharing balls When the specification operation of "ball" is performed, thereafter, it will be in the state in which the balls are being divided in the CU and the P unit.

  A card B in which balls are to be divided and transferred to another person (ball sharing) is recorded by taking out a stock card stocked in a card stock unit in the CU to a card reader / writer 327 and compensating it. In order to eject the card B by writing, it is necessary to eject the card A already inserted in the card reader / writer 327 in order to eject the card B. At that time, when all the game balls (= 4000) at the current time are written to the card A (member card owned by the player) and discharged, the game balls become 0 and the game can be continued thereafter. It disappears.

  Therefore, in order to make it possible to divide points (share balls) while playing a game, the card A is discharged from the CU in the state of "point = 0", and the game ball corresponding to the points is CU Control to leave it as collateral information. The points of the card may not be recorded directly on the card, but the upper server may store the points in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the card number of the inserted card A and the number of game balls = 0 are sent to the upper server, and the points stored in the upper server are stored in association with the card number received, Update that point to 0. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card A.

  After the card A (point = 0) is ejected from the card reader / writer 327 of the CU, the stock card B (point = 0) in the CU is taken out and compensated for by the card reader / writer 327. At that time, with the continuation of the game on the P unit, the game balls are subtracted, and the game balls are in the state of 3800. Then, a command including an operation request (operation instruction) of the number of subtraction required balls = 1000 is transmitted from the CU to the P unit in order to write 1000 which is the balls having balls to be divided and transferred (shared balls sharing) in the card B. In the P unit, the game ball number 3800 is subtracted from the current game ball number 3800 to make the game ball number 2800, and an operation response including the game ball number 2800 is transmitted to the CU. In response to this, the CU backs up and stores the data of game ball = 2800.

  Next, the CU writes “held ball = 1000” on the card B by the card reader / writer 327, and returns (discharges) the card B. When the player hands over the discharged card B to another person, the game ball can be divided and transferred to other persons (shared balls). In addition, when the points of the card are not directly recorded on the card but the upper server stores the points in association with the card number of the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer A card that shares 1000), which is a point to be shared, is sent to the upper server, and a point = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points that are generated by ball sharing. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

  After discharging the card B, the CU waits for reinsertion of the card A, which is a member card of the player who has been discharged earlier, and causes the display 312 to display a message prompting insertion of the card A (see FIG. 103). Then, the player who has seen it inserts the card A into the CU. At that time, the game ball is 2750. When the card A is inserted into the CU, it is determined whether or not the inserted card A is the same as the card A ejected at the time of the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers are identical) If they do not match, the card A is discharged, while if they match, the processing of the ball division (ball sharing) ends, and the display 312 displays that effect ( See Figure 104).

  In the inserted card A, at the time of returning the card after the end of the game, the game ball is written as a ball and is ejected from the CU.

  FIG. 96 shows a control operation in the case where a player performs a divided transfer of balls (sharing balls) while inserting a visitor card B in which 5,000 balls have been recorded into the CU and playing a game. There is. In this case, the previously inserted card B is a visitor card that does not necessarily need to be returned to the player. It is made to carry out ball sharing by disclosing and discharging the visitor card B to another person.

  First, by inserting the visitor card B (ball ball = 5000) into the CU, an operation request including the addition request ball number = 5000 for adding all the ball balls of 5000 recorded on the inserted card B as game balls (Operation instruction) is transmitted from CU to P units.

  In response to this, the P unit stores the game ball = 5000 and sends back an operation response including the game ball = 5000 to the CU. From that stage, it is possible to play a game with P units and it will be in the state of playing.

  Then, after the game ball is used for the game and the game ball becomes 4,000, the player performs designation of ball sharing (1000 balls) for dividing and transferring 1000 balls worth of balls to others. From this stage, it will be in the state of point division. At this stage, the game ball is further used for the game, and the game ball is 3800. Then, an operation request including the subtraction required ball number = 1000 for subtracting 1000 game balls for divided transfer (shared ball share) from the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P car. In response to that, the P unit subtracts 1000 from the current game ball 3800 to set the game ball = 2800, and returns an operation response including the game ball = 2800 to the CU. In response to that, the CU backs up and stores the data of the game ball = 2800. Then, “ball bearing = 1000” is written to the card B held in the card reader / writer 327, and the card B is returned (discharged). At this stage, the processing of divided transfer of balls (ball sharing) is completed. After that, if the player continues the game on the P platform and the player presses the return button 322 to end the game, the process proceeds to the card return process shown in FIG. 57, and is stored in the CU. The stock card is taken out by the card reader / writer 327, and ball data corresponding to the game ball at that time is recorded in the stock card and discharged.

  In addition, when the points of the card are not directly recorded on the card but the upper server stores the points in association with the card number of the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer Send 1000 to the upper server with the points to be shared), retrieve the stored points in correspondence with the card number received by the upper server, and use the points as the number of game balls received from CU The card is updated to the corresponding value (= 1000 points), and it is stored as a history that the card is a card that has been divided and transferred (point sharing) and 1000 points are points resulting from ball sharing. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B. Then, with regard to the stock card discharged at the end of the game, the card number and the data of the number of gaming balls at the time of card discharge are transmitted to the upper server, and the points = 1000 in correspondence with the card number received by the upper server. And a history that the holder of the card B described above has been changed to the holder of this stock card. The CU then discharges the stock card.

  FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing another example of divided transfer of game balls (sharing balls). The differences from the control processing shown in FIG. 95 will be mainly described. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 97, the same as in FIG. 95, the card A, which is a member card for a player who has already been inserted, is returned first when performing divided transfer of ball (sharing balls). There is, on the occasion of the return, after securing the game ball (200 collateral balls) required to continue the game during the ball division, the remaining game balls are recorded as the ball A on the card A. Is different from FIG.

  Specifically, first, the player operates the display 312 formed of a touch panel to designate sharing of balls for transferring 1000 balls in a divided manner. Then, the CU leaves 1000 shared balls to be divided and transferred and the above-described 200 protected balls in the CU, and calculates the remaining game balls 3800. Specifically, the current game ball (5000) -secured ball (200) -shared ball (1000) = 3800 is calculated. Then, in order to subtract the calculated 3800 game balls, the CU transmits a command of operation request including the subtraction required ball number = 3800 to P units. In response to this, the P unit subtracts 3800 from the current gaming ball 5000, and calculates and stores the remaining gaming balls 1200. Then, an operation response including the game ball = 1200 is sent back to the CU.

  The CU receives the operation response (response), leaves the collateral ball = 200 and the shared ball = 1000 in the CU, and writes the ball = 3800 to the card A held in the card reader / writer 327. Discharge. As described above, in order to carry out divided transfers of balls (sharing balls) while continuing the game in P, return of the card A that has been inserted with CU leaving a playing ball (play: 200 balls) in the CU Do.

  After that, the CU takes out and compensates the stock card (card B with ball 0) stocked in the CU to the card reader / writer 327. In the meantime, the game continues on the P unit, and as a result, the number of added balls = 10 and the number of reduced balls = 60 are generated. As a result, gaming balls = 1200 + 10 (number of added balls) -60 (number of subtracted balls) = 1150.

  Then, in the CU, in order to divide and transfer 1000 shared balls (shared ball share), the command of the operation request including the subtraction required ball number = 1000 is transmitted to the P-unit.

  In the unit P, upon receipt thereof, the subtraction required ball number 1000 is subtracted from the current game ball 1150 to calculate the remaining game ball = 150, and the response of the operation response including the game ball = 150 is transmitted to the CU.

  In the CU, it is received, and "ball = 1000" is written on the card B and returned (discharged). The player can perform divided transfer of the game ball (sharing balls) by giving the discharged card B to another person.

  After the card B has been discharged, the CU causes the display 312 to display a message prompting reinsertion of the membership card A of the player who has been discharged earlier. The player who sees it reinserts the previously ejected card A (ball with ball = 3800) into the CU. In the meantime, the game continues on P units, and as a result, the number of added balls = 10 and the number of subtracted balls = 85 are generated. Therefore, when the card A is reinserted, the game ball is 150 + 10-85 = 75. Then, when the card A is reinserted, the CU determines whether or not the inserted card A is the same as the card A that has been ejected once along with the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers Determines whether they match, and discharges the card A if they do not match, whereas if they match, the CU adds the ball having ball 3800 recorded on the card A to the P unit as a game ball In order to make it possible, the command of the operation request including the addition request ball number = 3800 is transmitted to P units. In response to that, the P-unit calculates game ball = 75 + 3800 = 3875, stores it as the current game ball, and transmits the response of the operation response including the game ball = 3875 to the CU.

  In addition, when the points of the card are not directly recorded on the card but the upper server stores the points in association with the card number of the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer A card that shares 1000), which is a point to be shared, is sent to the upper server, and a point = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points that are generated by ball sharing. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

98 to 115 are screen diagrams displayed by the display 312 of the CU.
First, a display screen displayed on the display unit 312 in the case of performing ball sharing as shown in FIG. 95 will be described based on FIGS.

  Referring to FIG. 98, the player selects and specifies ball sharing from among a plurality of menus displayed by the player touching the “menu” display item (icon) displayed above the left half of the screen. This is the display screen for ball sharing shown in FIG. The ball sharing (divisional transfer of game balls) can be divided transfer from balls owned by the player or divided transfer from balls. For that purpose, a message "Please select a ball sharing source" is displayed first, and a display item (icon) representing a ball to be selected and a display item (icon) representing a ball are displayed.

  On the display screen in the right half of FIG. 98, the status of the currently inserted card is displayed. In FIG. 98, a membership card is inserted, and it is shown that the membership card has a card balance of 0 yen, 0 balls, 500 balls, and 10000 balls at this time.

  Further, as the state of the CU, it is displayed that the lending unit amount when lending the game balls from the card balance is 500 yen, and 125 balls, which is the number of balls for 500 yen, are the number of payout balls. Furthermore, it is shown that the player can insert a bill into the CU and reload the card balance of the inserted card, thus allowing "payment available".

  The player performs a selection input of a ball sharing source by performing touch operation on either “ball” or “ball” in the left half of the screen. Here, the case of selecting “balls with ball” is shown.

  If the player selects "ball-bearing", a screen shown in FIG. 99 is displayed next. The message "Please select the number of balls to share" is displayed in the left half of the screen, and as the selection target of the number of shared balls, 500, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500, 2500, 3000, 3500, and Nine types of 4,000 balls and 5,000 balls are displayed. The player touches one of the nine types to select and input. Here, the case of selecting and inputting "1000 balls" will be described.

  If the player selects and inputs "1000 balls", the screen shown in FIG. 100 is displayed next. On the screen shown in Fig. 100, the message "Your ball will be divided by the above statement. Are you sure?" Is displayed, and the number of balls in your card is 9000 as a statement of the number of shared balls, It is displayed that the number of balls of the shared card to be divided and transferred (shared ball share) is 1000. Then, the display item (icon) of "ball sharing start" and the display item (icon) of "cancel" are displayed. The player touches and selects one of the display items. If "cancel" is selected, ball sharing is canceled. On the other hand, if "ball sharing start" is selected and input, the ball sharing process as shown in the specification of the number of shared balls is started.

  If the player selects and inputs "start ball sharing", a screen shown in FIG. 101 is displayed next. On the screen shown in FIG. 101, a message of “Your own card is ejected” is displayed, and a ball sharing processing status image showing the progress of the ball sharing processing is displayed. The ball sharing processing status image has three types of processing order: 1, 2 and 3. In the first processing, ejection of a card of the player (player), ejection of a shared card as second processing, third processing It is displayed as a reinsertion of his card as ejected. Then, "processing" and "waiting" are displayed from the top in the "status" column, and it is indicated that the first processing is currently being processed. Then, an image in which one's own card is ejected is shown by a broken line from the first process.

  In the screen on the right half of FIG. 101, 10000 balls, which are game balls in P units at the present time, are displayed in a blinking manner.

  When the discharge of one's own card is finished, the screen shown in FIG. 102 is displayed next. In FIG. 102, in the column of “Status”, it is indicated that the ejection of one's own card as the first process is “done”, and then the ejection of the shared card as the second process is being processed. . Then, the state in which the shared card is being ejected from the second process is shown by the arrow.

  When the discharge of the shared card is completed, a screen shown in FIG. 103 is displayed next. On the screen shown in FIG. 103, the first card has been ejected as the first process, and the second shared card has been ejected as the second process, and at present the reinsertion of the own card is in process. It is shown that there is. Then, an image for inserting one's own card is displayed by an arrow in the place of the third process.

  When the player reinserts his card into the CU, the screen of FIG. 104 is displayed next. In FIG. 104, a message of “ball sharing completed” is displayed, and it is indicated that all of the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing have been completed as the ball sharing processing status. Then, since the ball sharing of 1000 balls is completed, it is displayed that the number of game balls in the P unit at the current point is 9,000 balls at 10000-1000 = 9000.

  Next, FIGS. 105 to 111 are diagrams of display screens by the display unit 312 when the control processing of the wagon service shown in FIG. 56 is executed.

  First, referring to FIG. 105, the display screen shown in FIG. 105 is a state in which the player touches and selectively inputs the display item (icon) of the "wagon service" displayed in the upper part of the left half of the screen. First, at the beginning, the message "Please select the type to order" is displayed, and as a wagon menu, "5 items of standard menu", "30 items of drinks", "10 items of food", "sweets" Four kinds of menus of "20 items" are displayed, and an icon of "order status confirmation" is displayed.

  In the screen on the right half of FIG. 105, 1000 balls are displayed as the number of game balls at the current time in P units. The player selects a wagon menu that can be ordered within the range of 1000 balls, taking into consideration that the current number of game balls is 1000 balls. For example, when the player selects “30 drinks”, a screen shown in FIG. 106 is displayed next. In FIG. 106, the message "Please select the product to be ordered" is displayed, and six types of menus included in the drinks are shown, and the number of game balls required when ordering each menu Is displayed. The player touches and selects one of the displayed menu items in consideration of the fact that the number of gaming balls at the current time is 1,000. In addition, on the right side where various menus on the left screen are displayed, an icon of an equilateral triangle and an icon of an inverted triangle are displayed. When the player touches the equilateral triangle icon, the screen is scrolled downward and the upper portion of the screen is displayed. On the other hand, when the player touches the inverted triangle icon shown in FIG. 106, the screen is scrolled upward and the screen lower portion is displayed.

  In FIG. 106, the player selects the menu of coffee requiring 75 balls, and then touches the “Add Product” icon displayed in the title column of “Order Item Details” of FIG. Return to the wagon menu display screen, select the "10 food items" menu in Fig. 105, and with the food items menu displayed, the "burger" that needs 100 balls of game balls from among them The menu is selected, and further, the icon of "product addition" displayed in the title column of "order item details" of FIG. 107 is touched to return to the wagon menu display screen of FIG. 105 again, as shown in FIG. The icon for "20 sweets" was selected and input, and the player selected "ice" requiring 50 game balls from the sweets display screen. The case will be explained.

  In that case, the screen shown in FIG. 107 is displayed next, and the details of the order item selected and input so far are displayed. In the order details, the ordered item name, the number of balls consumed, and the quantity of the ordered item are displayed. In the case of FIG. 107, it is shown that one hamburger with 100 consumption balls, one coffee with 75 consumption balls and one ice with 50 consumption balls are ordered. And, it is displayed that the total number of consumed balls is 225 balls. Furthermore, the "Add" icon is displayed in the column of the quantity of the order item details, and the player touches this additional icon to input, and the quantity is incremented by one each time the player touches. Ru. Also, on the right side of the quantity, a "delete" icon is displayed corresponding to each order prize. By the player touching the icon, it is possible to delete the corresponding product order. For example, touching the top "Delete" will delete the hamburger order, touching the second "Delete" will delete the coffee order, and touching the third "Delete" Ice orders are deleted.

  Furthermore, an icon of "product addition" is shown below this order item description, and when the player touches this, the player returns to the wagon menu display screen of FIG. 105 again as described above, and the player Makes it possible to select additional order items and order items.

  Also, a "cancel" icon is shown below the ordered item description in FIG. 107, and the player can cancel all ordered items ordered up to this point by touching this icon. .

  Furthermore, an "order" icon is shown below the order item description, and the player performs touch operation on the wagon service as indicated in the order item specification by touch operation on the icon. Become.

  When the player touches the “Delete” icon corresponding to the order of “ice” on the display screen of FIG. 107, the screen shown in FIG. 108 is displayed. FIG. 108 shows that the “ice” order has been cancelled.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 107, when the player touches the “order” icon, the screen shown in FIG. 109 is displayed. On the display screen of FIG. 109, the image inquiring the order item is displayed. An arrow is displayed to indicate that transmission / reception is being performed between 225 balls, which is the total of the number of consumed balls, and 1000 game balls in P at the current time, indicating that communication is in progress. Specifically, referring to FIG. 110, an arrow is displayed in the direction from the number of balls consumed "225" to the number "1000" of P units. The word "in querying" is displayed.

  After this display is made, arrows are displayed from "1000" balls of P units to "225" balls in the number of consumed balls, and the characters "in inquiry" are displayed. And both these displays are repeated and displayed several times. After the display, the screen of FIG. 111 is displayed next. On the screen shown in Fig. 111, the message "The order item has been received, and the above-mentioned number of withdrawal balls has been withdrawn from the ball" is displayed, and the order item completion is displayed. The total consumption ball number “225” is displayed as a ball. Then, in the right half of the screen, it is displayed that as a result of the consumption of 225 balls, the gaming balls in the current P cars are “775” balls.

  FIGS. 112 and 113 are display screens during addition display in the card insertion process shown in FIG. 53, and are the third display screens from the top among the display screens of the display 312 on the CU side shown in FIG. Another example is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 112, in the left half of the screen, gaming machine information showing the same contents as the display screen on the CU side of FIG. 94 is shown although the screen configuration is different.

  On the right side of the screen in FIG. 112, it is displayed that all the 1000 balls, which are balls of the card inserted in the CU, are moving from the CU to the P platform to the P platform side.

  Then, at the stage when the ball movement is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 113, and a message of “ball movement complete!” Is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the ball column becomes 0 balls, A 1000 ball is displayed as a game ball in the P unit, and a display is made in which “1000” is displayed in a blinking manner.

  FIGS. 114 and 115 are display screens showing that clear display is in progress in the card return process shown in FIG. First, referring to FIG. 114, in the right half of the screen, it is displayed that the current game ball in P is 1000, and "1000" is displayed in a blinking manner. Then, a state in which the ball is being moved is displayed in the display column of the ball from P to the ball, and the character "during ball movement" is displayed.

  Then, when the movement of the ball is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 115, and a state in which the game ball on the P platform side has become 0 is displayed and 1000 balls are displayed as the ball. And "1000" is displayed blinking.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram showing another example of the back side configuration of the pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. Here, mainly the differences will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 116, various prize ball detection switches 700a to 700h for detecting prize balls are provided in various prize ports provided in the game area 27, and only the out balls collected from the out port 145 are provided. An out ball detection switch 701 for detecting A merging path detection switch 32 is provided on a merging passage path 702 through which the out balls detected by the out ball detection switch 701 and the winning balls detected by the various winning ball detection switches 700 a to 700 h merge and pass. There is.

  Among these various detection switches, only the merging path detection switch 32 is configured by an optical sensor, and the other detection switches are configured by proximity switches. By configuring various detection switches in this way, so-called radio wave goths are generated, illegal radio waves are transmitted, and the proximity switch turns off when an illegal act is made to cause the various winning balls detection switches to output the winning balls detection signal illegally. Although the detection signal is output in response to the illegal radio wave, since only the merging path detection switch 32 is constituted by the optical sensor, no detection signal is output without responding to the illegal radio wave.

  If normal, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches configured by the proximity switch is the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch. However, when a radio wave goto for transmitting an illegal radio wave is generated, the detection signal from the merging path detection switch 32 is not output, and the detection signal from the detection switch configured by another proximity switch is output. The ball detection total by the various detection switches configured by the proximity switch does not match the number of detected balls of the merging path detection switch 32. Based on the occurrence of such an unmatched phenomenon, it can be determined that an unauthorized action has occurred.

  Therefore, the payout control board 17 receives detection signals of various winning balls detection switches 700a to 700h, detection signals of the out ball detection switch 701, detection signals of the far ball detection switch 33, and detection signals of the merging path detection switch 32. Calculate the total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h configured by the proximity switch and the out ball detection switch 701, and whether the total matches the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch 32 Determine if If it is determined that there is no match and there is a predetermined number of gaps, the payout control board 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, and transmits an abnormality display command to the effect control board 53 for a display, and the effect control board 53 for a display Makes an abnormality display on the display 54.

  As still another example, the merging path detection switch 32 shown in FIG. 116 is provided at a lower position than the merging point where the farball detected by the farball detection switch 33 merges into the merging passage path 702, The total of the out ball and the far ball may be detected by the merging path detection switch 32. In that case, the sum of the number of balls detected by various detection switches composed of proximity switches, that is, the prize ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701 and the far ball detection switch 33 is calculated, and the sum and the merging route It is determined whether or not the number of balls detected by the detection switch 32 matches. If it is determined that there is no match and there is a predetermined number of gaps, the payout control board 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, and transmits an abnormality display command to the effect control board 53 for a display, and the effect control board 53 for a display Makes an abnormality display on the display 54.

  As yet another example, the merging path detection switch 32 shown in FIG. 116 is at the same position, and is located at a lower position than the merging point where the balls detected by the far ball detection switch 33 merge into the merging passage path 702 The combined route detection switch may be provided, and the sum of the winning balls, the out balls and the far balls may be detected by another combined route detection switch. In that case, the sum of the number of balls detected by various detection switches composed of proximity switches, that is, the prize ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701 and the far ball detection switch 33 is calculated, and the sum and the merging route It is determined whether or not the number of balls detected by the detection switch 32 matches. If it is determined that there is no match and there is a predetermined number of gaps, the payout control board 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, and transmits an abnormality display command to the effect control board 53 for a display, and the effect control board 53 for a display Makes an abnormality display on the display 54. The above-described abnormality determination is also performed by determining whether or not the total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h and the out ball detection switch 701 matches the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch 32 Run in parallel.

  Next, specific control of the game control means mounted on the main control board 16 and the payout control means mounted on the payout control board 17 will be described. FIG. 117 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the payout control board 17. Note that FIG. 117 also shows the main control board 16, the effect control board for display 53, the power supply board 900, and the like. The payout control board 17 is mounted with a payout control microcomputer (corresponding to payout control means) 170 that performs payout control in accordance with a program. The payout control microcomputer 170 includes a ROM 172 for storing various payout control programs and the like, a RAM 173 as storage means used as a work memory, a payout control CPU 171 for performing control operation according to the program, and an I / O port unit 174. Including. In this embodiment, the ROM 172 and the RAM 173 are incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 170. That is, the payout control microcomputer 170 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to have at least the RAM 173 built-in, and the ROM 172 may be external or built-in. Also, the I / O port unit 174 may be externally attached.

  In the payout control microcomputer 170, the payout control CPU 171 executes control according to a program stored in the ROM 172. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 170 (or the payout control CPU 171) executes (or processes) Specifically, the payout control CPU 171 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the payout control substrate 17.

  In addition, the RAM 173 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit backed up by a backup power supply 910 which is partially or entirely created in the power supply substrate 900. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 2 is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 173 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply 910 is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a difference value between at least the number of game balls fired in the game area 27 and the number of game balls collected by any winning port or out port 145 or far ball return port 150. The value of the floating ball number counter for counting as the floating ball number is stored in the backup RAM. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 173 is backed up by the power supply.

  In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 170 mounted on the payout control substrate 17 includes the merging path detection switch 32, the ball detection switch 33, the glass door closure detector 12, the front frame closure detector 13, and the emission. Detection signals from the motor origin sensor 37, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the ball raising switch (lower) 41b, the game ball excess shortage detection switch 1 (42a) and the game ball excess shortage detection switch 2 (42b) are input (See Figure 16). Further, a control signal from the payout control microcomputer 170 is output to the glass door open solenoid 10, the front frame open solenoid 11, the launch control board 31 and the lift motor 40.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 170 receives a payout control command from the game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 16 and performs various payout control based on the received payout control command. Further, the payout control microcomputer 170 transmits a display effect control command to the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control microcomputer receives the display effect control command. Various display control on the display 54 is performed based on the display effect control command.

  Further, the payout control board 17 is mounted with an external output circuit 175 for outputting a signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 2, and the payout control microcomputer 170 controls the hall management computer via the external output circuit 175. An external signal can be output to 1.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 160 is mounted on the main control board 16. The game control microcomputer 160 executes the lottery process using random numbers, for example, to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, or to determine to control to the big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state Control to shift to the state. Also, for example, whether the microcomputer 160 for game control performs a lottery process using a random number or determines a big hit type to make a high probability state (probability state) or a high base state (time saving state) If it is determined that the game state is not high or high probability state or high base state, control is performed to shift the gaming state to the high probability state or high base state. Therefore, the gaming control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16 implements gaming state control means capable of controlling an advantageous gaming state which is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal gaming state.

  The RAM mounted on the main control board 16 or the game control microcomputer 160 is also configured as a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by the backup power supply 910, a part or all of which is created on the power supply board 900. It is done. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 2 is stopped, the main control board 16 or the game control microcomputer 160 continues for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply 910 is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). The contents of part or all of the RAM installed in are stored. For example, various game control data such as a process flag indicating the progress of the game control process and a flag indicating a probability change state or a time reduction state are stored in the backup RAM.

  In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 170 mounted on the payout control board 17 is common regardless of the model of the pachinko machine 2 (for example, regardless of the model of the pachinko machine 2, the same program operates according to the same program Realized by a microcomputer of the type). On the other hand, the game control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16 differs depending on the model of the pachinko machine 2. As the game control microcomputer 160, microcomputers of different types may be used, or microcomputers of the same type may be operated according to different programs.

  In this embodiment, since the payout control microcomputer 170 mounted on the payout control board 17 is common regardless of the model of the pachinko machine 2, for example, it is arranged on the play frame side of the pachinko machine 2 Even if the game board 26 is replaced and the model is changed, the game board 26 may be reused and used. In addition, the game board 26 may be arranged so that the entire game board 26 can be exchanged at the time of model change.

  FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing game control main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 160 when the pachinko machine 2 is powered on. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 2 and power supply is started, for example, after executing security check processing, which is processing for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, the microcomputer 160 for game control (Specifically, the CPU mounted on the game control microcomputer 160) performs control to transmit a model specification command for specifying the model of the pachinko machine 2 to the payout control microcomputer 170 (step S1). In this embodiment, it is assumed that there are two types of models of the pachinko machine 2, model A and model B, and a model specification command capable of specifying whether it is model A or model B is transmitted. In this case, for example, in the case of model A, a model specification command in which "01" is set as EXT data is transmitted, and in the case of model B, a model specification command in which "02" is set as EXT data is transmitted. Good.

  It should be noted that the model specification command is not transmitted each time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 2, and the model specification is made only when the power is turned on for the first time after the game board 26 is replaced and the model is changed. A command may be sent.

  Next, the microcomputer 160 for game control checks whether data protection processing (for example, processing of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) is performed when backup power supply to the pachinko machine 2 is stopped. (Step S2). If it is confirmed that such protection processing has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S5. Note that whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is checked by, for example, the state of the backup flag (for example, whether the backup flag is set) set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. Ru.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the gaming control microcomputer 160 checks data in the backup RAM area (step S3). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S3, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the gaming control microcomputer 160 executes a power failure recovery process to restore the gaming state to the state when the power supply was stopped based on the data stored in the backup RAM ( Step S4).

  If it is not confirmed in step S2 that the power supply stop processing has been performed (specifically, if the backup flag is not set), or if the check result is not normal in step S3. The game control microcomputer 160 executes an initialization process such as a RAM clear process (step S5). Note that some data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM.

  When the processing of step S4 or step S5 is executed, the gaming control microcomputer 160 executes lottery processing using random numbers to determine whether to control to the big hit gaming state or to control to the big hit gaming state When it is determined, the processing shifts to a loop that repeatedly executes various game control processing (step S6) such as performing control to shift the gaming state to the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a payout control main process executed by the payout control microcomputer 170 when the pachinko machine 2 is powered on. When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 2 and the power supply is started, for example, after executing security check processing, which is processing for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the microcomputer 170 for payout control (Specifically, the payout control CPU 171) confirms whether or not a model designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 160 (step S10A), and if it has not been received, the model designation command is received Wait until. Then, when receiving the model designation command, the payout control CPU 171 stores the received model designation command in, for example, the model designation command storage area provided in the RAM 173, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 2 is stopped. In step S10, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) in the backup RAM area has been performed. If it is confirmed that such protection processing has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S15. Note that whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is checked by, for example, the state of the backup flag (for example, whether the backup flag is set) set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. Ru.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the payout control CPU 171 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S11). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S11, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the payout control CPU 171 sets a recovery threshold as a threshold for abnormality determination (step S12).

  In this embodiment, as described later, the payout control CPU 171 uses the floating ball number counter to count the number of game balls shot in the game area 27 and any one of the winning openings and out holes 145, and the foul ball return opening. The difference value between the number of game balls collected at 150 and the number of floating balls (after playing, the game area 27 in which the game area 27 is collected before being collected at the winning opening or out port 145 and the far ball return port 150 Count the number of balls). Then, when the value of the floating ball number counter reaches the threshold for the abnormality determination, the payout control CPU 171 determines that an abnormality such as ball clogging has occurred in the game area 27, and performs abnormality control.

  FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the threshold for abnormality determination. Among these, FIG. 120 (A) shows a threshold value table for abnormal condition determination for model A in which a threshold value for abnormal condition determination is set when model A is specified as the model of the pachinko machine 2. Further, FIG. 120 (B) shows a threshold value table for abnormal condition determination for model B in which a threshold value for abnormal condition determination is set when model B is designated as the model of pachinko machine 2. As shown in FIG. 120, in this embodiment, there are two types of thresholds for the determination at the time of abnormality, a threshold for the determination at the time of abnormality and a threshold for the determination at the second abnormality. As described later, the payout control CPU 171 performs the first abnormality control when the value of the floating ball number counter reaches the first abnormality determination threshold. Specifically, as the first abnormal control, the display 54 displays a predetermined abnormality notification screen (alert that it will be in the state of stopping the emission shortly) to the effect control microcomputer for the display mounted on the effect control substrate for the display 53 Control for displaying a warning screen), and control for outputting an abnormality signal capable of specifying the occurrence of abnormality to the hall management computer 1 via the external output circuit 175. Further, the payout control CPU 171 performs second abnormality control when the value of the floating ball number counter reaches the second abnormality determination threshold. Specifically, as the second abnormal time control, a launch control signal including a launch prohibition signal is output to the launch control board 31 to control the launch stop state where the launch of the game ball is stopped and effect control for the display Control is performed to cause the display 54 to display a predetermined emission stop notification screen (notification screen for notifying that the emission has been stopped) on the effect control microcomputer for display mounted on the substrate 53.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 120, in this embodiment, different abnormality determination threshold tables are selected according to whether the model of pachinko machine 2 is model A or model B, and the selected abnormality determination is made. The threshold for abnormality determination is set based on the threshold table. That is, generally, in the pachinko machine 2, each collecting portion (each winning opening) after the game ball is fired by the ball striking device depending on how to make the game area 27 (for example, the arrangement of the path of the game ball and the position of nails). Because there is a difference in the time taken to be collected at the out port 145 and the far ball return port 150), the likelihood of floating balls varies depending on the model of the pachinko machine 2. Therefore, regardless of the model of the pachinko machine 2, if the abnormal time control is performed using the same threshold, the timing of the abnormal time control may be too early or too late depending on the model. Therefore, in this embodiment, the abnormal state determination threshold value table in which different threshold values are set according to the type of the pachinko machine 2 is selected and the abnormal state control is performed, so that it is appropriate according to the type of the pachinko machine 2 It is possible to control at the time of abnormality.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (A), when the model of the pachinko machine 2 is the model A, "20" is used as the first abnormality determination threshold at the time of normal when neither power recovery nor big hit is in play. This is set, and "30" is set as the second abnormality determination threshold value. In addition, at the time of recovery from a power failure, a value larger than normal is used as a threshold for abnormality determination, “25” is set as a first abnormality determination threshold, and “35” as a second abnormality determination threshold. It is set. Further, even during the big hit game, a value larger than normal is used as a threshold for determination of abnormality, "25" is set as a threshold for determination of first abnormality, and "35" as a threshold for determination of second abnormality. "Is set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), when the model of the pachinko machine 2 is the model B, the threshold value for the first abnormality determination is "10" at the time of normal when neither power recovery nor big hit is in play. Is set, and “20” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold value. In addition, at the time of recovery from a power failure, a value larger than normal is used as a threshold for abnormality determination, “15” is set as a first abnormality determination threshold, and “25” is set as a second abnormality determination threshold. It is set. In addition, even during the big hit game, a value larger than normal is used as a threshold for determination of abnormality, "15" is set as a threshold for determination of first abnormality, and "25" as a threshold for determination of second abnormality. "Is set.

  Note that the abnormality determination threshold table shown in FIG. 120 is stored in, for example, a predetermined abnormality determination threshold table storage area of the RAM 173, and the initialization processing described later when the pachinko machine 2 is powered on (see step S16). Even if) is executed, it shall not be initialized.

  In step S12, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 identified by the model specification command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model A shown in FIG. 120 (A) is selected, and based on the selected table for determination at abnormality in model A, the threshold for determination at abnormality is shown. As the threshold value for recovery is set, “25” is set as the threshold value for determining the first abnormality, and “35” is set as the threshold value for the second abnormality determination. Also, in the case of model B, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B shown in FIG. 120 (B) is selected, and based on the selected threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B, for abnormality determination. The threshold for recovery is set as the threshold for 、, “15” is set as the threshold for determination for the first abnormality, and “25” is set as the threshold for the determination for the second abnormality.

  In this embodiment, as described later, the abnormality determination threshold value table may be updated based on execution of the abnormality control at a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (see FIG. 127). ). When the abnormal condition determination threshold value table has been updated, the payout control CPU 171 determines in step S12 based on the updated model A abnormal condition determination threshold value table or the model B abnormal condition determination threshold value table. The recovery threshold value is set as the threshold value for the abnormality determination.

  Next, although the value of the floating ball number counter before the power failure is backed up in the RAM 173 which is the backup RAM, the payout control CPU 171 restores the value of the floating ball number counter that was backed up. The number of floating balls is stored in a predetermined return time floating ball number storage area provided in the RAM 173 (step S13). Next, the payout control CPU 171 sets a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) in the post-power-down recovery measurement timer for measuring the elapsed time after power recovery (step S14).

  If it is not confirmed in step S10 that the power supply stop processing has been performed (specifically, if the backup flag is not set), or if the check result is not normal in step S11 The payout control CPU 171 sets a normal time threshold as a threshold for abnormality determination (step S15). In this case, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 specified by the model specification command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model A shown in FIG. 120 (A) is selected, and based on the selected table for determination at abnormality in model A, the threshold for determination at abnormality is shown. As the threshold value for normal time is set, “20” is set as the threshold value for determining the first abnormality, and “30” is set as the threshold value for the second abnormality determination. Also, in the case of model B, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B shown in FIG. 120 (B) is selected, and based on the selected threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B, for abnormality determination. The threshold value for normal time is set as the threshold value, and “10” is set as the threshold value for determining the first abnormality, and “20” is set as the threshold value for the second abnormality determination.

  In this embodiment, as described later, the abnormality determination threshold value table may be updated based on execution of the abnormality control at a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (see FIG. 127). ). When the threshold value table for determination of abnormality is updated, the payout control CPU 171 determines the updated table for determination of abnormality at model A or the threshold table for determination at abnormality of model B in step S15. The normal time threshold is set as the threshold for the abnormal state determination.

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 executes an initialization process such as a RAM clear process (step S16). Various data such as the value of the floating ball number counter is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process. It may be initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 173 may not be initialized, and some data may be left as it is. In this embodiment, of the storage areas of the RAM 173, the initialization threshold value storage area for abnormality determination which stores the threshold value table for abnormality determination shown in FIG.

  When the process of step S14 or step S16 is executed, the payout control CPU 171 reduces the number of game balls in accordance with the firing of the game balls, or increases the number of game balls in accordance with the winning of any winning opening. And the like are transferred to a loop in which various payout control processes (step S17) are repeatedly executed. In the various payout control processes in step S17, abnormality determination processing described later, abnormality determination threshold change processing, abnormality control release processing, firing and lifting control instruction output processing, error processing, abnormality determination Threshold table update processing is also included.

  FIGS. 121 and 122 are flowcharts showing an example of abnormality determination processing executed by the payout control microcomputer 170. In the abnormal condition determination process, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first determines that the value of the abnormal time control inhibition period measurement timer for measuring the abnormal period control inhibition period is 0. It is checked whether there is any (step S200). The abnormal time control inhibition period measurement timer will be described later. If the value of the abnormal control prohibition period measurement timer is not 0, the payout control CPU 171 subtracts one from the value of the abnormal control prohibition period measurement timer (step S201). Then, if the value of the abnormal time control inhibition period measurement timer after subtraction is not 0, the payout control CPU 171 ends the process as it is.

  If the value of the abnormal time control prohibition period measurement timer is 0 in step S200 or step S202, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a has been input ( Step S203). If the detection signal from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is input, the payout control CPU 171 determines that one gaming ball has been fired, and adds 1 to the value of the floating ball number counter (step S204). However, the value of the floating ball number counter after addition will exceed the number of the game balls (50 in this example) in which it is enclosed, for example because the number of floating balls is misrecognized or after power failure recovery In such a case, the payout control CPU 171 does not perform the addition of the value of the floating ball number counter.

  In this embodiment, although it is determined that one game ball has been fired based on the detection of the game ball by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the present invention is not limited to such a case. For example, a sensor or a switch may be provided at a position closer to the hitting position, and it may be determined that one game ball has been fired based on the detection of the game ball by the sensor or the switch.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the game ball is not shot by the hitting device, but is detected based on the detection of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Based on the fact that one game ball has been fired (ie, the game ball has not yet been shot but has only been led to the shootable area). Although the case of adding one is shown, the value of the floating ball number counter may be incremented by one by the actual firing of the game ball. In this case, for example, a sensor is provided at the launch opening of the hitting launcher, and the value of the floating ball number counter is 1 based on detection of the game ball launched by the hitting launcher using the sensor provided at the launch. It suffices to add.

  Further, in this embodiment, there is shown a case where the game ball led to the projectable area is directly detected and the floating ball number counter is incremented by 1, but if it is a method which can detect the launch of the game ball, Instead of detecting the game ball itself, the floating ball number counter may be incremented by one by determining that the game ball has been fired by another method. For example, a sensor capable of detecting the operating state of the bat firing device is provided, and it is determined that one game ball has been fired based on detection by the sensor that the bat firing device has operated once, and the floating ball is suspended. The number counter may be incremented by one.

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the detection signal from the merging path detection switch 32 has been input (step S205). If the detection signal from the merging path detection switch 32 is input, the payout control CPU 171 determines that one game ball has been collected from any of the winning opening or out port 145, and the value of the floating ball number counter 1 is subtracted (step S206). However, if the value of the floating ball number counter after subtraction falls below 0 for reasons such as false recognition of the number of floating balls or after power failure recovery, the payout control CPU 171 selects the number of floating balls counter. Do not subtract the value of.

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the foul ball detection switch 33 has been input (step S207). If the detection signal from the foul ball detection switch 33 is input, the payout control CPU 171 determines that one gaming ball has been collected from the foul ball return port 150 and subtracts one from the value of the floating ball number counter ( Step S208). However, if the value of the floating ball number counter after subtraction falls below 0 for reasons such as false recognition of the number of floating balls or after power failure recovery, the payout control CPU 171 selects the number of floating balls counter. Do not subtract the value of.

  In this embodiment, based on the input of the detection signal from the merging path detection switch 32 or the foul ball detection switch 33 after the game ball has actually passed through each winning hole, out hole 145, and foul ball return port 150. The case where the value of the floating ball number counter is decremented by 1 is shown, but it is always necessary to detect that the game ball has actually passed through each winning hole, out port 145 and far ball return port 150. It is not necessary to subtract one from the value of the number counter. For example, a sensor is provided in each winning opening in the game area 27, the out port 145, the passage just before being led to the far ball return port 150, etc., and the game balls are each based on the input signal of the detection signal from these sensors. It is regarded as having passed through the winning opening, the out opening 145, and the far ball return opening 150 (that is, it is actually led only to the area where it is sure to pass through each winning opening or out opening 145, the far ball return opening 150) The value of the floating ball number counter (which has not yet passed through each winning hole, out port 145 or far ball return port 150) may be decremented by one.

  Also, in this embodiment, the case is shown where the game balls that have passed through each winning hole, out hole 145 and far ball return port 150 are directly detected and the floating ball number counter is decremented by 1. If it is a method that can detect the game ball, it is determined that the game ball has passed through each winning hole, the out hole 145, and the foul ball return hole 150 by another method instead of detecting the game ball itself, and the floating ball number counter May be subtracted by one. For example, each winning opening, the out opening 145, and the far ball return opening 150 are provided with operation boards that operate according to the passage of the game balls (for example, each winning opening or out opening 145, the gaming ball that has passed through the far ball returning opening 150) And the operation plate is operated), and one game ball passes through each winning hole, out hole 145, and far ball return hole 150 based on the fact that the operation plate is detected by the sensor. The number of floating balls counter may be decremented by one.

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether or not a first abnormal control flag indicating that the first abnormal control is being performed is set (step S209). If the first abnormality control flag is not set, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether the value of the floating ball number counter is equal to or more than the first abnormality determination threshold (step S210). If it is equal to or greater than the first abnormality determination threshold, the payout control CPU 171 displays an abnormality notification start designation command for specifying the start of the abnormality notification (alarm notification for warning that the emission will be stopped soon). Control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer for display mounted on the effect control board 53 for dexterity (step S211). In addition, the display effect control microcomputer displays a predetermined abnormality notification screen (a warning screen for warning that it will be in a halted state for coming soon) on the display 54 based on the received notification command to start abnormality notification. Control is performed to start notification of an abnormality. In step S211, the payout control CPU 171, for example, sets the current number of floating balls (specifically, the value of the floating ball number counter) to the EXT data, and transmits an abnormality notification start designation command. Then, the display effect control microcomputer performs control to display an abnormality notification screen including the number of floating balls specified by the received abnormality notification start designation command on the display 54.

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 performs control of outputting an abnormality signal to the hall management computer 1 via the external output circuit 175 (step S212). Then, the payout control CPU 171 sets a first abnormal control time flag (step S213). Further, the payout control CPU 171 adds one to the abnormal control number counter for counting the number of executions of the abnormal control (step S213A).

  If the first abnormal control flag is set, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether the second abnormal control flag is set, which indicates that the second abnormal control is being executed. (Step S214). If the second abnormality control flag is not set, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether the value of the floating ball number counter is equal to or more than the second abnormality determination threshold (step S215). If it is equal to or higher than the second abnormality determination threshold, the payout control CPU 171 sets a release suspension flag indicating suspension of release of the game ball in order to control the release suspension state (step S216).

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether or not a big hit game is in progress (step S216A). It should be noted that, specifically, whether or not the big hit is in progress is determined by checking whether or not the big hit information (see FIG. 16) has been received from the game control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16. it can. If a big hit game is in progress, the payout control CPU 171 displays a big hit firing stop notification specification command for indicating the start of the release stop notification for notifying that the release is stopped during the big hit game. Control is performed to transmit the effect control microcomputer mounted on the display unit 53 (step S216B). It should be noted that the display control device for presentation control ends the abnormal notification on the basis of the received big hit launch stop notification designation command, and the display 54 displays a predetermined big hit launch stop notification screen (during a big hit game Control is performed to display a notification screen for notifying that the emission has been stopped and to start the emission stop notification. On the other hand, if it is not in the big hit game, the payout control CPU 171 specifies the start of the shot stop notification to notify that it has become the shot stop state in the normal game state other than the big hit game. Control is performed to transmit the command to the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the display effect control substrate 53 (step S216C). In addition, the microcomputer for display effect control ends the abnormal notification on the basis of the received normal launch stop notification designation command, and the display 54 displays a predetermined normal launch stop notification screen (in the normal game state) Control is performed to display a notification screen for notifying that the emission has been stopped and to start the emission stop notification. In steps S216B and S216C, for example, the payout control CPU 171 sets the current number of floating balls (specifically, the value of the floating ball number counter) to the EXT data and transmits the firing stop notification start designation command . Then, the display effect control microcomputer performs control to display on the display 54 an emission stop notification screen including the number of floating balls specified by the received emission stop notification start designation command. Then, the payout control CPU 171 sets a second abnormality control time flag (step S217).

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of the abnormal time determination threshold value changing process executed by the payout control microcomputer 170. In the abnormality determination threshold changing process, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first confirms whether or not the value of the post-power-down recovery measurement timer is 0 (step S30). ). If the value of the measurement timer after recovery from power failure is not 0, the payout control CPU 171 subtracts one from the value of the measurement timer after recovery from power failure (step S31). Then, if the value of the post-power failure measurement timer after subtraction is not 0, the payout control CPU 171 ends the process as it is.

  If the value of the measurement timer after power failure recovery after subtraction in step S32 is 0 (that is, if a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) elapses after power failure recovery), the payout control CPU 171 detects an abnormality The threshold for determination is changed to the threshold for normal use (step S33). Specifically, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 identified by the model specification command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model A shown in FIG. 120A is selected, and based on the selected threshold table for determination at abnormality in model A, for first determination at abnormality "20" is set as the threshold value, and "30" is set as the second abnormality determination threshold value. Further, in the case of model B, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B shown in FIG. 120B is selected, and based on the selected threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B, the first abnormality is determined. "10" is set as the determination threshold, and "20" is set as the second abnormality determination threshold.

  In this embodiment, as described later, the abnormality determination threshold value table may be updated based on execution of the abnormality control at a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (see FIG. 127). ). When the threshold value table for determination of abnormality is updated, the payout control CPU 171 determines the updated table for determination of abnormality at model A or the threshold value table for determination at abnormality of model B in step S33. The normal time threshold is set as the threshold for the abnormal state determination.

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 subtracts the value of the returning floating ball number stored in the returning floating ball number storage area in step S13 from the current floating ball number counter (step S34). However, when the value of the floating ball number counter after subtraction falls below 0, the payout control CPU 171 sets the value of the floating ball number counter to 0.

  If the value of the post-power failure recovery timer is 0 in step S30, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether or not a big hit game is in progress (step S35). It should be noted that, specifically, whether or not the big hit is in progress is determined by checking whether or not the big hit information (see FIG. 16) has been received from the game control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16. it can.

  If it is in the jackpot game, the payout control CPU 171 sets the jackpot middle use threshold as the threshold for the abnormality determination (step S36). Specifically, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 identified by the model specification command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model A shown in FIG. 120A is selected, and based on the selected threshold table for determination at abnormality in model A, for first determination at abnormality "25" is set as the threshold value, and "35" is set as the second abnormality determination threshold value. Further, in the case of model B, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B shown in FIG. 120B is selected, and based on the selected threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B, the first abnormality is determined. "15" is set as the determination threshold, and "25" is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Note that the payout control CPU 171 executes step S36 only when it first shifts from the normal gaming state, which is not the big hit gaming state, to the big hit gaming state, and sets the threshold for abnormal determination to the threshold for large hit from the threshold for normal use. It should be changed to

  If it is not in the jackpot game, the payout control CPU 171 sets the normal time threshold as the abnormal time determination threshold (step S37). Specifically, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 identified by the model specification command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model A shown in FIG. 120A is selected, and based on the selected threshold table for determination at abnormality in model A, for first determination at abnormality "20" is set as the threshold value, and "30" is set as the second abnormality determination threshold value. Further, in the case of model B, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B shown in FIG. 120B is selected, and based on the selected threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B, the first abnormality is determined. "10" is set as the determination threshold, and "20" is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. It should be noted that the payout control CPU 171 executes step S37 only when transitioning from the big hit game state to the normal game state first, and changes the threshold value for abnormal condition determination from the big hit threshold value to the normal time threshold value. do it.

  In this embodiment, as described later, the abnormality determination threshold value table may be updated based on execution of the abnormality control at a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (see FIG. 127). ). When the abnormal condition determination threshold value table is updated, the payout control CPU 171 causes the updated model A abnormal condition determination threshold value table or the model B abnormal condition determination threshold value table in steps S36 and S37. Based on this, the jackpot middle use threshold or the normal time use threshold is set as the threshold for the abnormality determination.

  FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing an example of the abnormal time control cancellation process executed by the payout control microcomputer 170. In the abnormal state control release process, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first confirms whether or not the detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is in the on state (see FIG. Step S400A). If the glass door closure detector 12 is in the on state (that is, if the glass door 6 is in the closed state), the dispensing control CPU 171 is set when the open state of the glass door 6 is detected. It is checked whether the flag is set (step S400B). If the glass door open flag is set (that is, if the glass door 6 is opened and then closed again), the glass door open flag is reset (step S400C), and the process proceeds to step S401. . On the other hand, if the glass door open flag is not set in step S400B, the process ends.

  If the glass door closing detector 12 is not in the on state in step S400A (that is, when the open state of the glass door 6 is detected), the payout control CPU 171 counts the number of game balls enclosed in the pachinko machine 2 Control is performed to transmit the enclosed ball number display designation command for designating (the number of enclosed balls) to the effect control microcomputer for display mounted on the effect control substrate for display 53 (step S400D). The payout control CPU 171 may transmit, for example, an enclosed ball number display designation command in which the number of enclosed balls (50 in the present example) grasped by the pachinko machine 2 is designated by the EXT data. Then, the display effect control microcomputer performs control to display the number (50 in the present example) of the sealed balls on the display screen of the display 54 based on the received command to specify the number of sealed balls.

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether or not the glass door open flag indicating that the glass door 6 is being opened is set (step S400E). If the glass door open flag is not set, the payout control CPU 171 sets the glass door open flag (step S400F), and the process ends.

  In step S401, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether the first abnormal control flag or the second abnormal control flag is set (step S401). If the first abnormal control flag or the second abnormal control flag is set (that is, at least the first abnormal control flag is set and the first abnormal control is being executed, or the second abnormality is further performed) When the hour control flag is set and the second abnormality control is also executed), the payout control CPU 171 resets the first abnormality control flag and the second abnormality control flag (step S402).

  Subsequently, the payout control CPU 171 performs control to transmit an abnormality notification end designation command for specifying the end of the abnormality notification or the emission stop notification to the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the display effect control substrate 53 (see FIG. Step S403). In addition, based on the received notification command for indicating abnormal end of display, the microcomputer for effect control for display performs control to erase the predetermined abnormal notification screen from the display 54 and to end the abnormal notification if abnormal notification is in progress. If the release stop notification is being performed, control is performed to erase the predetermined release stop notification screen from the display 54 and to end the release stop notification. Further, the payout control CPU 171 performs control of outputting an abnormality release signal to the hall management computer 1 via the external output circuit 175 (step S404). In addition, if the payout control CPU 171 is set (that is, the second abnormal time control is also being performed, and the firing stop flag is set), the firing stop flag is reset (step S405).

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether or not a big hit game is in progress (step S406A). It should be noted that, specifically, whether or not the big hit is in progress is determined by checking whether or not the big hit information (see FIG. 16) has been received from the game control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16. it can. If it is in the jackpot game, the payout control CPU 171 sets the jackpot middle use threshold as the threshold for the abnormality determination (step S406B). Specifically, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 identified by the model specification command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model A shown in FIG. 120A is selected, and based on the selected threshold table for determination at abnormality in model A, for first determination at abnormality "25" is set as the threshold value, and "35" is set as the second abnormality determination threshold value. Further, in the case of model B, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B shown in FIG. 120B is selected, and based on the selected threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B, the first abnormality is determined. "15" is set as the determination threshold, and "25" is set as the second abnormality determination threshold.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the big hit game, the payout control CPU 171 sets the normal time threshold as the abnormal time determination threshold (step S406C). Specifically, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 identified by the model specification command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model A shown in FIG. 120A is selected, and based on the selected threshold table for determination at abnormality in model A, for first determination at abnormality "20" is set as the threshold value, and "30" is set as the second abnormality determination threshold value. Further, in the case of model B, the threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B shown in FIG. 120B is selected, and based on the selected threshold table for determination at abnormality in model B, the first abnormality is determined. "10" is set as the determination threshold, and "20" is set as the second abnormality determination threshold.

  In this embodiment, as described later, the abnormality determination threshold value table may be updated based on execution of the abnormality control at a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (see FIG. 127). ). When the abnormal condition determination threshold value table is updated, the payout control CPU 171 causes the updated model A abnormal condition determination threshold value table or the model B abnormal condition determination threshold value table in steps S406B and S406C. Based on this, the jackpot middle use threshold or the normal time use threshold is set as the threshold for the abnormality determination.

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the value of the measurement timer after power failure recovery is 0 (step S407). Then, if the value of the measurement timer after recovery from the power failure is not 0 (that is, in a rare case, when abnormal control is still performed during recovery from the power failure), the payout control CPU 171 At the same time as clearing the measurement timer after power failure recovery (step S408), the value of the number of floating balls at return stored in the memory number of floating balls at return at step S13 is subtracted from the current value of the floating ball number counter ( Step S409). However, when the value of the floating ball number counter after subtraction falls below 0, the payout control CPU 171 sets the value of the floating ball number counter to 0.

  After the abnormal state control is started by execution of the processing of steps S400A to S409, the glass door 6 is opened and then further closed (that is, the glass door 6 is opened and the ball is opened by a game clerk etc. After the operation for clearing the clogging is performed, the abnormal control is canceled based on the fact that the glass door 6 is closed again. Also, when canceling the abnormal control, if the game is in the big hit, the big hit middle threshold is set as the threshold for the abnormal time determination, and if it is the normal gaming state other than the big hit game, it is usually used as the abnormal threshold. The time threshold is set.

  Then, the payout control CPU 171 sets a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) in the abnormal-time control prohibition period measurement timer (step S410). It should be noted that after abnormal state control is canceled by executing the processing of steps S200 to S202 in the abnormal state determination processing based on the abnormal state control prohibited period measurement timer set in step S410, a predetermined time (this example In this case, control is performed so that abnormal control is not performed until 10 seconds has elapsed. That is, since it takes a certain amount of time for those gaming balls to return to the launch path again after releasing the ball clogging or the like generated in the game area 27, the abnormal control is immediately performed after canceling the abnormal control. If it is configured to be executable, even if the abnormal control is canceled, it is likely that the abnormal control will be started immediately, and so on. Therefore, after the abnormal control is canceled, a predetermined time will elapse. Abnormal control is configured to be prohibited to prevent such a problem from occurring.

  FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing an example of a control command output process of firing and lifting, which is executed by the payout control microcomputer 170. In the control command output process of firing and lifting, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first confirms whether the game prohibition flag is set (ON) (step S50). The game prohibition flag is turned on by receiving an operation instruction including prohibition request from the CU, and turned off by receiving a game permission request. If the game prohibition flag is not set in step S50, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether or not the launch stop flag is set (step S51). If the launch stop flag is not set either, the payout control CPU 171 executes a process of outputting a launch permission signal to the launch control board 31 (step S52). In response to the touch control signal input by the player operating the hitting operation handle 25, the launch control board 31 receives the signal and controls the hitting and firing motor 18 to hit and launch.

  Next, in accordance with the driving of the hitting and firing motor 18, the signal of the firing motor origin sensor is input. If there is an input of a signal from the firing motor origin sensor 37 (Y in step S53), the payout control CPU 171 executes control for driving the lift motor 40 (step S54).

  On the other hand, when the game prohibition flag or the shooting stop flag is set (in the case of Y in step S50 or step S51), the payout control CPU 171 outputs the shooting control signal including the shooting prohibition signal to the shooting control board 31. To execute the process (step S55). The launch control board 31 having received this stops the driving of the hitting and firing motor 18 and puts it into a firing stop state where no hitting is released.

  FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing an example of error processing executed by the payout control microcomputer 170. In the error processing, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first confirms whether the game prohibition flag is set (ON) (step S60). If the game prohibition flag is not set, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether or not the launch stop flag is set (step S61). If the game prohibition flag or the firing stop flag is set, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (step S62). When a detection signal is output from any of the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the signal is input to the main control board 16, and the detection signal is input from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. In step S62, the payout control CPU 171 determines whether or not the detection signal is input. More specifically, after receiving the operation instruction including the prohibition request from the CU, the above-described operation is performed. When a winning ball detection signal is input after the floating ball processing waiting time (10 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that the winning detection signal is input.

  At this point in time, all the floating balls in the game area 27 should have been collected, and the fact that the prize ball detection signal has been input in spite of this is a so-called radio wave goto that causes the prize to be generated fraudulently by the illegal radio wave. There is a risk of In that case, the payout control CPU 171 performs control to output an error notification signal according to the type of error (step S63).

  On the other hand, when neither the game prohibition flag nor the launch stop flag is set, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the launch motor origin sensor signal has been input (step S64). If the launch motor origin sensor signal is not input (i.e., the launch motor 18 is not driven), the lift motor 40 should also be stopped (see S53 and S54). Nevertheless, when the detection signal from the ball raising detection switch (upper) 41a or the ball raising detection switch (lower) 41b is input (Y in step S65), the payout control CPU 171 determines the type of error. Control is performed to output the corresponding error notification signal (step S63).

  Specifically, the output of the error notification signal according to the type of error is a payout of a signal for causing an error notification by the display 54, a point of a failure notification lamp, or the like (or blinking) or sound from the speaker. The control board 17 outputs. For example, in the case of an abnormality determined to be Y in step S65, an abnormality display such as "the pumping device has been abnormally operated" by the display 54, a point of a lamp for alarming a pumping device abnormality, etc. (or blinking) The payout control microcomputer 170 outputs a signal for causing an alarm notification from the speaker by voice such as "the delivery device has abnormally operated".

  When the firing motor 18 is not driven, that is, when the ball is not fired, an error notification is performed when lifting of the game ball is detected by the ball raising detection switch (upper) 41a or the ball raising detection switch (lower) 41b. The reason is that if the game ball is not being hit and launched but the game ball is being pumped and continued to be supplied, there is a risk that a ball will be clogged in the passage and a failure will occur, and such ball clog failure It is to be able to cope with it.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of the abnormality state determination threshold value table updating process executed by the payout control microcomputer 170. In the abnormal state determination threshold value table update process, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first makes the value of the abnormal state control number counter equal to or more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) Whether or not it is confirmed (step S70). If the value of the abnormal control number counter is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the payout control CPU 171 clears the abnormal control number counter (step S71).

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 adds a predetermined value to each threshold value set in the threshold value table for abnormal state determination stored in the predetermined threshold value table storage area for abnormal state determination of the RAM 173, and determines the threshold value for abnormal state determination. The table is updated (step S72). In this embodiment, for example, the value table “2” is added to each threshold as a predetermined value, and the abnormal condition determination threshold value table is updated. The predetermined value to be added to each threshold is not limited to "2". For example, a value "1" may be added to each threshold as a predetermined value, or a value of "3" or more may be added to each threshold. It is also good.

  In this embodiment, for example, when updating of the threshold is performed first, the threshold for normal time is set to “20” and “30” in the threshold table for determining abnormality at time of model A shown in FIG. ) To (“22” and “32”), the power failure recovery threshold is updated from (“25” and “35”) to (“27” and “37”), and the big hit middle use threshold is It is updated from ("25" and "35") to ("27" and "37"). Also, in the threshold table for determining abnormality at time of model B shown in FIG. 120 (B), the threshold for normal time is updated from (“10” and “20”) to (“12” and “22”), and the power is restored. The hour threshold is updated from ("15" and "25") to ("17" and "27"), and the big hit middle threshold is from ("15" and "25") to ("17" and "27" Updated to).

  In addition, after the value of the abnormal time control number counter becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more and the abnormal time determination threshold value table is updated, the value of the abnormal time control number counter is again predetermined times (for example, 10 times) If the above occurs, the process of step S72 is similarly performed, and a predetermined value ("2" in this example) is added to each threshold value set in the threshold value table for determination of abnormality, thereby determining abnormality. Threshold table is updated. As described above, in this embodiment, the abnormal state control frequently occurs by repeatedly executing the abnormal state determination threshold value table each time the abnormal state control is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Make it possible to correct However, it is desirable to set an upper limit to the number of times that the abnormality determination threshold table can be updated, rather than being able to update the abnormality determination threshold table without limit. For example, the maximum number of times the threshold table for abnormality determination can be updated is five times, and after the fifth threshold value table for abnormality determination is executed, the value of the abnormality control number counter is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) Even if it becomes above, updating of the threshold table for determination of abnormality may not be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, every time the first abnormality control is executed in the abnormality control, the value of the abnormality control number counter is incremented by one (see step S213A), and the value of the abnormality control number counter Although the case where the threshold table for abnormality determination is updated when the number of times exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) (that is, when the first abnormality control is performed a predetermined number of times or more), If the second abnormality control is executed a predetermined number of times or more, the abnormality determination threshold table may be updated. In this case, for example, in the abnormality determination process, the value of the abnormality control number counter is incremented by one each time the second abnormality control process of steps S216 to S217 is performed instead of the process of step S213A. The same processing as steps S70 to S72 may be executed to update the abnormality determination threshold value table each time the value of the abnormality control number counter becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number.

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 resets the abnormality determination threshold value currently used for the abnormality determination on the basis of the updated abnormality determination threshold table (step S73).

  For example, specifically, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 identified by the model specification command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the updated threshold table for abnormality determination for model A is selected, and the threshold is updated first based on the selected threshold table for abnormality determination for model A after update. In this case, if the normal time threshold is set as the abnormal time determination threshold, the first abnormal time determination threshold and the second abnormal time determination threshold may be set from (20 and 30) ((20) and (30)). "22" and "32" are reset, and if the power failure recovery threshold is set, it is reset from ("25" and "35") to ("27" and "37") and a big hit If the threshold value is set, it is reset from ("25" and "35") to ("27" and "37"). Also, in the case of model B, the updated threshold value table for abnormality determination for model B is selected, and based on the selected threshold value table for abnormality determination for model B, threshold updating is first performed. When it is performed, if the normal time threshold is set as the abnormal time determination threshold, the first abnormal time determination threshold and the second abnormal time determination threshold are set to “10” and “20”. From ("12" and "22"), and if the power failure recovery threshold is set, it is reset from ("15" and "25") to ("17" and "27"), If the jackpot middle use threshold is set, it is reset to (17 and 27) from (15 and 25).

  Subsequently, the payout control CPU 171 outputs control for updating the threshold value table for abnormal determination and the threshold for abnormal determination to the hall management computer 1 via the external output circuit 175. (Step S74). In step S74, the payout control CPU 171 also sends a signal capable of specifying whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 is model A or model B to the hall management computer 1 via the external output circuit 175, for example. It shall output against. Further, for example, when the threshold value update signal is configured by a plurality of bits, information for identifying whether it is model A or model B is set in a predetermined bit of the threshold value update signal, and the hall management computer 1 It may be output to.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of signal transmission / reception processing performed by the hall management computer 1. The hall management computer 1 executes signal transmission / reception processing of FIG. 128 for transmitting / receiving various signals to / from each pachinko machine in the game arcade at predetermined time intervals. In the signal transmission / reception process, the hall management computer 1 confirms whether a signal has been received from any of the pachinko machines in the game arcade (step S80). If it has been received, the hall management computer 1 confirms whether the received signal is a threshold update signal (step S81).

  If the threshold update signal is received, the hall management computer 1 specifies the model of the pachinko machine that has transmitted the threshold update signal (step S82). For example, when the pachinko machine is configured to output a signal that can identify the model of the pachinko machine together with the threshold update signal, whether the model of the pachinko machine is the model A or the machine B based on the signal Identify. Further, for example, when information capable of specifying a model is set to a predetermined bit of the threshold update signal, whether the model of the pachinko machine is model A or model B is specified based on the threshold update signal. .

  Then, the hall management computer 1 sets a threshold for abnormality determination with respect to all the pachinko machines of the model specified in step S82 in the game arcade (specifically, the payout control microcomputer included in the pachinko machine). A threshold update instruction signal for instructing update is output (step S83). Thereafter, each pachinko machine (specifically, the payout control microcomputer included in the pachinko machine) that has received the threshold update instruction signal updates the threshold value for the abnormality determination based on the received threshold update instruction signal. Do. For example, each pachinko machine executes the same processing as steps S72 and S73 of the threshold table update process for abnormal condition determination to update the threshold table for abnormal condition determination and also uses the abnormal condition currently used for abnormal condition determination. Reset the threshold for judgment.

  On the other hand, if the signal received in step S81 is not the threshold value update signal, the management computer for holes 1 executes a process according to the received signal (step S84). For example, if an abnormality signal is received, the hall management computer 1 performs processing such as displaying an abnormality notification screen for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, and notifies a gaming clerk of the occurrence of the abnormality.

  Next, the abnormality notification screen and the emission stop notification screen displayed on the display 54 in the abnormal state control will be described. FIG. 129 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the abnormality notification screen and the emission stop notification screen. FIG. 129 (a) shows a specific example of the abnormality notification screen displayed in the first abnormality control. As described above, if the value of the floating ball number counter is equal to or greater than the first abnormality determination threshold, the payout control CPU 171 is for a display on which the effect control substrate 53 for display is mounted with an abnormality notification start designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer is performed (see step S211). Then, the display effect control microcomputer performs control to display an abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 129 (a) on the display 54 and start abnormality notification based on the received abnormality notification start designation command. . In the example shown in FIG. 129 (a), an abnormality notification screen including a character string “Warning !! The number of game balls is abnormal” is displayed, and a case is shown to warn that the launch will be stopped soon. There is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 129 (a), when displaying an abnormality notification screen including a character string "the number of floating balls is 24" based on the number of floating balls specified by the received abnormality notification start designation command. It is shown.

  FIGS. 129 (b) and 129 (c) show specific examples of the emission stop notification screen displayed in the second abnormal control. Among these, FIG. 129 (b) shows a specific example of the shot stop notification screen displayed in the second abnormal control during the big hit game, and FIG. 129 (c) shows the first in the normal game state other than the big hit game. 2 shows a specific example of a launch stop notification screen displayed in the abnormal state control.

  As described above, if the value of the floating ball number counter is equal to or greater than the second abnormality determination threshold, the payout control CPU 171 displays the big hit firing stop notification designation command for the display if it is in the big hit game. Control is performed to transmit to the effect control control microcomputer mounted on the effect control substrate 53 (see step S216B). Then, based on the received big hit firing stop notification designation command, the display control device for display control displays the big hit medium shooting stop notification screen as shown in FIG. 129 (b) on the display 54 and launches the display. Control to start the stop notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 129 (b), a launch stop notification screen including a display of "big hit" is displayed along with the character string "playing ball has been stopped." A case is shown to notify that it has become. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 129 (b), the shot stop notification screen including the character string "the number of floating balls is 36" is displayed based on the number of floating balls specified by the received big hit firing stop notification designation command. The display case is shown.

  Further, if the payout control CPU 171 is not in the big hit game, it performs control to transmit a normal-time shot stop notification designation command to the display effect microcomputer for display control mounted on the display effect control board 53 (step S216C) reference). Then, the display effect control microcomputer displays the normal-time emission stop notification screen as shown in FIG. 129 (c) on the display 54 based on the received normal-time emission stop notification designation command and releases the display. Control to start the stop notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 129 (c), a launch stop notification screen including the character string "The game ball has stopped firing" (not including the display of "big hit") is displayed, and it is not during the big hit game In the normal gaming state of the case where it is notified that it became a state where the firing is stopped is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 129 (c), based on the number of floating balls specified by the received normal shot stop notification designation command, the shot stop notification screen including the character string "the number of floating balls is 32" is displayed. The display case is shown.

  Next, a specific example in the case where the number of enclosed balls is displayed on the display 54 when the opening of the glass door 6 is detected will be described. FIG. 130 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a display screen for displaying the number of enclosed balls. As described above, when it is detected that the glass door closure detector 12 is not in the on state and the glass door 6 is in the open state, the payout control CPU 171 displays an enclosed ball number display designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer for display mounted on the effect control substrate 53 for dexterity (see step S400D). Then, the display effect control microcomputer displays the display screen of the number of sealed balls as shown in FIG. 130 on the display 54 based on the received command of specifying the number of sealed balls. In the example shown in FIG. 130, a display screen is displayed that includes the character string “the glass door is open” and the display of the number of sealed balls (50 in this example), and the glass door 6 is in the open state In addition to informing that it has become, the case where the number of the enclosed balls is displayed is shown.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming board unit 26a in which the gaming board 26 having the gaming area 27 and the transparent member 28 covering the front surface of the gaming area 27 are integrated and fixed The game board unit 26a is attached to the play space (for example, constituted by the front frame 5 and the glass door 6) including the assembling portion and the attachment portion (for example, the turning lever 100 for attaching the game board). Therefore, by unifying the play board 26 having the game area 27 and the transparent member 28, there is no gap where an illegal member such as a piano wire can be inserted, and the play board 26 and the transparent member 28 are removed without trace In addition, it is possible to sufficiently prevent fraudulent acts performed by inserting a fraudulent member.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when configured as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the game board 26 having the game area 27 and the attachment portion for attaching the game board 26 (for example, for one-way screw fixing) The bracket 101) and the play frame including the transparent member 28 covering the front of the game area 27 when the game board 26 is attached to the attachment portion (for example, constituted by the front frame 5 and the glass door 6) It is integrated and fixed using a screw. Therefore, by unifying the game board 26 having the game area 27 and the game frame, it is not possible to remove the game board 26 and the game frame without a trace, by eliminating a gap into which an unauthorized member such as a piano wire can be inserted. In this way, it is possible to sufficiently prevent fraudulent acts performed by inserting a fraudulent member.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game board 26 and the play space or the transparent member 28 are fixed so that a space of a predetermined distance (for example, 2 cm) is generated between the front surface of the game area 27 and the transparent member 28. In the space of a predetermined interval, the nail 90 which changes the flow-down direction of the game ball which flows down on the game area 27 is provided. The nails 90 are arranged vertically to the front of the game area 27, and are movable face members 267a movable toward the transparent member 28 while avoiding the nails 90 on the front side of the game area 27. To 267 e are provided. Therefore, even when the gaming board 26 and the gaming frame or the transparent member 28 are integrated, when the gaming ball is stuck in the nail 90 and can not flow down, the clogging of the gaming ball can be eliminated easily. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, when configured as shown in FIG. 13, the game board 26 and the play space or the transparent member 28 have a predetermined interval (for example, A nail 90 is fixed so as to create a space of 2 cm) and has a nail 90 for changing the flow-down direction of the game ball flowing down the gaming area 27 in the space of a predetermined interval. The nail 90 is disposed vertically standing on the front surface of the game area 27, and it is possible to change the length of the portion of the nail 90 projecting from the front surface of the game area 27. Therefore, even when the game board 26 and the game frame or the transparent member 28 are integrated, when the game ball gets stuck in the nail 90 and can not flow down, the clogging of the game ball can be eliminated easily. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, bolts 269a to 269e for hexagonal wrench for moving the moving surface members 267a to 267e are provided, and each bolt 269a to 269e is provided with the hexagonal wrench 91 from the back side of the game board 26. It is operable using. Therefore, it is possible to operate the bolts 269a to 269e for the hexagonal wrench from the back side of the game board 26, so that it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally touching the bolts 269a to 269e during the normal game. it can.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when configured as shown in FIG. 13, the second layer 26 c of the game board 26 can be moved by sliding the rail member 26 d from the back side of the game board 26. Therefore, since it is possible to move the second layer 26c of the game board 26 from the back side of the game board 26, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally touching the rail member 26d or the like during a normal game. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, pachinko machine in which a predetermined number (50 in this example) of game balls used in one game machine is enclosed in the enclosed area (in this example, in pachinko machine 2) In the game machine 2, a launch port 276a or a hit ball launch apparatus for launching game balls, a launch path 276 connecting the hit ball launch apparatus and the launch port 276a, a recovery unit (in this example, each winning port, out port 145, far A collecting means (in this example, a collecting mechanism after the ball collecting rod 189) collecting the game balls through the ball return port 150), a winning ball flow path 147 connecting the collecting means and the collecting portion, and a merging path 702 Equipped with The launcher 276a, the hitting launcher, a part of the launch path 276 connecting the hit launcher and the launcher, the recovery unit, the recovery means, the winning ball flow down path 147, the merging path 702, the cover member 268c and the cover member It is integrated and attached in the manner covered at 272. Therefore, in the enclosed ball type game machine, it is possible to prevent an act of fraudulently adding a game ball, and to prevent an act of fraud more surely.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game board 26 is provided with an opening for attaching the liquid crystal display device 264, and a glass plate member 266 covering the opening is provided on the front side of the game area 27 There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act that is performed by inserting an unauthorized member from the back side of the opening by using the opening for attaching the liquid crystal display device 264.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a predetermined number (50 in this example) of game balls used in 1 pachinko machine 2 is enclosed in a predetermined enclosed area (in this example, pachinko machine 2) In the present pachinko machine 2, the first detection means (in the present example, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a) for detecting the release of the game ball to the game area 27, The second detection means (in this example, the merging path detection switch 32 and the far ball detection switch 33) for detecting passage of the game ball in the mouth 145 and the far ball return port 150) are provided. Further, the payout control microcomputer 170 recognizes the difference between the game balls fired to the game area 27 and the game balls passed through the collecting unit based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means. Then, it is determined whether or not the difference number has reached a threshold value for determination of abnormality, and based on the determination that the threshold value for determination of abnormality is reached, abnormality control is performed. Therefore, in the enclosed ball type game machine, by performing the abnormality control automatically, it is possible to enable early detection of an abnormality occurrence.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the gaming control microcomputer 160 outputs a model designation command capable of specifying the type of the pachinko machine 2, and the payout control microcomputer 170 is outputted by the gaming control microcomputer 160. The threshold value for abnormality determination is changed according to the model of the pachinko machine 2 specified by the specified model specification command (in this example, the model A abnormality shown in FIG. 120 (A) when the model is A) The threshold value for abnormal condition determination is set using the threshold value table for time determination, and in the case of model B, the threshold value for abnormal condition determination using the threshold value table for abnormal condition determination for model B shown in FIG. To set Therefore, since the threshold for abnormality determination is changed according to the model of the pachinko machine 2, the execution frequency of the abnormality control can be adjusted according to the model of the pachinko machine 2, and according to the model of the pachinko machine 2. It is possible to properly perform abnormal control.

  Further, according to this embodiment, an abnormality is determined based on the determination that the number of differences between the game ball fired in the game area 27 and the game ball passed through the recovery unit has reached the first abnormality determination threshold. Based on the fact that abnormality notification is executed as time control and it is determined that the second abnormality determination threshold exceeding the first abnormality determination threshold has been reached, firing of the game ball to the game area 27 is performed as abnormality control. Control to be in the firing stop state to stop. Then, at least either the first abnormality determination threshold or the second abnormality determination threshold is changed to a different value in accordance with at least either the model of the pachinko machine 2 or the gaming state (in this example, the model A In this case, the threshold for abnormality determination is set using the threshold value table for determination at abnormality in model A shown in FIG. 120A, and in the case of model B, the abnormality for model B shown in FIG. The threshold value for abnormal condition determination is set using the threshold value table for time determination In addition, if it is in the big hit game, the threshold for big hit shown in FIG. 120 is set, otherwise the threshold for normal time shown in FIG. To set Therefore, the execution frequency of the abnormal control can be adjusted according to the model of the pachinko machine and the gaming state, and the abnormal state control is appropriately performed as the abnormal control according to the model and the gaming state of the pachinko machine and to the game area 27 The launch of the game ball can be stopped.

  In this embodiment, the case is shown in which both the first abnormality determination threshold and the second abnormality determination threshold are changed to different values in accordance with both the model of the pachinko machine 2 and the gaming state. However, the first abnormality determination threshold or the second abnormality determination threshold may be changed to different values depending on the model of the pachinko machine 2 or the game state, or the first abnormality Only one of the hour determination threshold and the second abnormality determination threshold may be changed to different values.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 170 counts the number of executions of the abnormal control and the number of executions of the abnormal control reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). Based on the determination, the threshold for the determination at abnormality is changed (in this example, the threshold table for determination at abnormality is updated, and the threshold for determination at abnormality currently used in the determination at abnormality is reset) . Therefore, it becomes possible to detect a state in which abnormal control is being performed more than necessary and to set an appropriate threshold for abnormal determination, and to correct a state in which abnormal control occurs more frequently than necessary. Can.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 170 outputs a threshold update signal indicating that the threshold for abnormality determination has been updated to the hall management computer 1. Then, the hall management computer 1 sends a threshold update instruction signal for instructing the microcomputer for payout control included in a pachinko machine of the same type as the pachinko machine that has received the threshold update signal to update the threshold for abnormality determination. Output. Therefore, it is possible to reflect the update of the threshold for abnormality determination on other pachinko machines of the same model, and to prevent abnormal control from occurring more frequently than necessary among pachinko machines of the same model.

  In this embodiment, on the basis of the fact that the cumulative number of times of abnormal control has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), it is determined that abnormal control is occurring more frequently than necessary. Although the case of changing the threshold value of (1) is shown, the method of determining whether or not abnormal control occurs more frequently than necessary is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, instead of simply counting the number of times of accumulation, a timer is used to measure a predetermined measurement period of the occurrence frequency of abnormal time control, and abnormal time control is performed during the predetermined measurement period (for example, 5 minutes). Based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or more, it may be determined that the abnormality control is occurring more frequently than necessary, and the threshold for abnormality determination may be changed.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, when abnormal control is being executed, a specific abnormal display is made based on the difference between the number of gaming balls to be launched into the game area 27 and the number of gaming balls passing through the collection unit. (Display of the number of floating balls shown in FIG. 129) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp the number of differences between the number of gaming balls the gaming clerk shoots into the gaming area 27 and the number of gaming balls passing the collection unit by the specific abnormal time display (display of the number of floating balls).

  In this embodiment, the difference number (the number of floating balls) itself between the number of game balls to be shot in the game area 27 and the number of game balls passing through the collection unit is shown. Not only when the number of floating balls itself is displayed, for example, it is also possible to display the remaining number of possible firings calculated from the number of floating balls.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the threshold for judging abnormality is changed according to the gaming state (in the present example, when in the big hit game, the threshold for the big hit (in the case of the model A “ Change to 25 "and" 35 ", and" 15 "and" 25 "for model B)). Therefore, since the threshold for abnormality determination is changed according to the gaming state, the execution frequency of the abnormal control can be appropriately adjusted according to the gaming state, and the abnormality control can be appropriately performed according to the gaming state. You can do so.

  Further, according to this embodiment, in the case where the abnormal time control (in this example, the second abnormal time control) is executed to control the firing stop state, it is in the advantageous gaming state (in the present example, the big hit gaming state) In the case of being controlled, the control to the firing stop state is performed at a later timing than in the case of being controlled to the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the enclosed ball type game machine, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfaction by preventing the firing of the game ball to the game area from being stopped more than necessary during the advantageous game state. .

  In this embodiment, specifically, a jackpot threshold larger than the threshold for normal use as a threshold for determination of abnormality (in the case of model A, “25” and “35”, and in the case of model B) By changing to “15” and “25”, it is possible to extend the period until the launch of the game ball is stopped when an abnormality is detected during the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, occurrence of a situation where the game ball can not be fired in the big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, the threshold for the jackpot larger than the threshold for normal use is changed to “25” and “35” for model A, and “15” and “25” for model B. In this case, when an abnormality is detected during a big hit game, it is shown that the period until the game ball is stopped from being extended is extended, but the method for extending the period until the game ball is not stopped is as follows The present invention is not limited to those described in this embodiment. For example, even during a big hit game, the threshold value for the abnormal condition determination is the same value as the normal time, and after detecting that the value of the floating ball number counter has reached the second abnormal condition determination threshold, the firing is actually stopped By providing a delay time before entering the state, it is possible to extend the period until the firing stop state of the game ball is reached when an abnormality is detected during the big hit game. In this case, for example, when it is detected that the value of the floating ball number counter has reached the second abnormality determination threshold in normal time, control is immediately made to the firing stop state, while if in the big hit game, the value of the floating ball number counter After detecting that the second has reached the second abnormality determination threshold, it may be controlled to stop being fired after waiting for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Also, for example, during a big hit game, after detecting that the value of the floating ball number counter has reached the second abnormal time determination threshold, the floating ball number counter again after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. If the value of the floating ball number counter still reaches the second abnormality determination threshold, control may be made to stop the firing. Also, for example, when it is detected that the value of the floating ball number counter has reached the second abnormality determination threshold and it is immediately before the end of the big hit (for example, the final round during the big hit), the big hit game It may be controlled to stop being fired after waiting until the end. In addition, for example, when any round in the jackpot game is in progress, it may be controlled to stop being fired after waiting until the end of the round.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case has been shown in which the period until the launch suspension state is extended during the big hit gaming state is extended as an advantageous state for the player, but not limited to those shown in this embodiment, for example If the game state is advantageous to the player, the period until the firing stop state may be extended when the state is a probability change state (high probability state) or a time saving state (high base state).

  Also, in this embodiment, as a threshold for determination of abnormality during a big hit game, a threshold for jackpot larger than the threshold for normal use (“25” and “35” for model A, for model B) Although the case of changing to “15” and “25” is shown, it may be configured to change to a threshold smaller than the normal time threshold during the big hit game. FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram of another specific example of the threshold for abnormality determination. In the example shown in FIG. 131, a threshold smaller than the normal threshold as the jackpot middle use threshold (in this example, in the case of the model A, the first abnormality determination threshold “15” and the second abnormality determination threshold “25” In the case of model B, by changing to the first abnormality determination threshold value “5” and the second abnormality determination threshold value “15”), when an abnormality such as a ball jam occurs during the big hit game It is made to be able to control at the time of abnormality earlier than the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to early notify of an abnormality when a ball jam or the like occurs in a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which recognition of the abnormality is delayed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the first abnormality determination threshold and the second abnormality determination threshold are set as the abnormality determination threshold, and it is determined that the first abnormality determination threshold is reached. The first abnormal time control (in this example, abnormal notification and external output) is executed based on the output, and the second abnormal time control is determined based on the determination that the second abnormal time determination threshold has been reached. (In this example, control to the firing stop state and firing stop notification) are executed. Therefore, by making the first abnormality determination threshold different from the second abnormality determination threshold, the first abnormality control and the second abnormality control can be executed at different timings, which is appropriate. Abnormal state control can be performed. Specifically, as shown in this example, when the first abnormal control and the second abnormal control are configured to perform abnormal notification and stop the firing of the game ball to the game area, respectively, the abnormal notification and the discharge are performed. It is possible to prevent the stop state and the stop state from occurring at the same time (can be made to be in the shot stop state from the abnormal notification in stages), and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered more than necessary it can.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 includes the glass door 6 installed openably and closably with respect to the main body frame (the main body frame including the wooden frame 4 and the front frame (cell) 5). Then, after the abnormal time control is started, the abnormal time control is canceled based on the fact that the glass door 6 is further closed after the glass door 6 is opened, and the predetermined restriction after the glass door 6 is closed. During the period (in this example, 10 seconds), abnormal control is not performed. Therefore, the abnormal time control is executed again until the difference between the game ball which is released to the game area 27 and the game ball which passes the recovery unit after the abnormal time control is released falls below the threshold for abnormal time determination. Can be prevented, and unnecessary frequent occurrence of abnormal control can be prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that the glass door 6 is opened, control is performed to display the number of game balls enclosed in the enclosed area of the pachinko machine 2. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls sealed when the glass door 6 is opened.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the gaming state changes (in this example, the timing at which the normal gaming state is first changed to the big hit gaming state, and the timing at which the large hitting gaming state is initially changed to the normal gaming state) To set the threshold value for abnormal condition determination. Then, at the timing of transitioning to the advantageous gaming state (in the present example, the big hit gaming state), a large value is set as the threshold value for abnormality determination as compared with the case where the normal gaming state is controlled. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the firing of the game ball to the game area 27 from being stopped more than necessary during the advantageous game state by changing the threshold value for judging the abnormal state.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the emission stop notification is performed when the emission is stopped. Therefore, since it can be easily recognized that the launch stop state has been made by the launch stop notification, it is possible to promptly take action to release the launch stop state. Further, in this case, the firing stop notification is performed in different notification modes depending on whether the game is controlled to the advantageous gaming state (in this example, the big hit gaming state) or the normal gaming state. Therefore, since it can be easily recognized in which gaming state the launch is stopped, even if the launch is halted simultaneously in a plurality of gaming machines, the launch is stopped in the advantageous gaming state It is possible to give priority to dealing with an abnormal situation from the existing gaming machine.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 is a means for releasing the non-launched state after the non-launched state is started (in this example, it is further closed after the glass door 6 is opened. Detect and release). Then, when the release suspension state is released, it is determined whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 is the model A or the model B, or the gaming state is the advantageous gaming state or the normal gaming state, Based on the judgment result, the threshold value for abnormal judgment is reset. Therefore, when the game state has changed (when the game mode has changed from the advantageous game state to the normal game state, or when the normal game state has changed to the advantageous game state) Even if it is, it is possible to reliably reset the threshold value for abnormality determination in accordance with the model of the pachinko machine 2 and the current gaming state.

  In this embodiment, whether the model of pachinko machine 2 is model A or model B or the gaming state is the advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state) when the release suspension state is released. In the case where it is determined whether both are in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 124), only one of the model of the pachinko machine 2 and the gaming state is determined, and an abnormal time is determined according to the determination result. The threshold for determination may be reset.

  Further, according to this embodiment, whether the warning condition established before the difference number between the game ball entering the game area 27 and the game ball passing the collection unit reaches the second abnormality determination threshold is satisfied? (In this example, it is determined whether or not the first abnormality determination threshold has been reached), and a warning notification (in this example, first abnormality control) is determined based on the determination that the warning condition is satisfied Notification of abnormality performed in Therefore, by performing the warning notification, it is possible to respond in advance to prevent the firing stop state.

  In this embodiment, the same condition as the warning condition regardless of whether it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state (in this example, the big hit gaming state) or to the normal gaming state. It may be configured to determine whether or not FIG. 132 is an explanatory view showing still another specific example of the threshold for abnormality determination. In the example shown in FIG. 132, the same as the first abnormality determination threshold in the case of model A regardless of whether it is the jackpot middle use threshold or any other normal use threshold or power failure recovery use threshold. The value “20” is set, and in the case of the model B, the same value “10” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold. Therefore, when the payout control microcomputer 170 executes the determination processing in step S210, the first abnormality determination in which the floating ball number counter always has the same value regardless of whether it is a big hit middle use threshold or not. It will be determined whether or not the threshold value (“20” for model A, “10” for model B) has been reached, and regardless of whether or not a big hit is being played as a warning condition It is always determined whether the same condition is met. By configuring as such, when being controlled to the advantageous gaming state, a warning notification will be issued earlier than when being controlled to the normal gaming state, so that the firing is suspended with a margin. It can respond to avoid that.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, when power supply is started, it is based on the game information (for example, the value of the floating ball counter at the time of the power failure occurrence) stored in the backup RAM (in this example, the RAM 173). Control to restore the control state to the state before the power supply to the pachinko machine 2 is stopped, and until the predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) elapses after the return control is performed. As a threshold for abnormality determination, for recovery use that is larger than the normal use threshold (in this example, “20” and “30” for model A, and “10” and “20” for model B) A threshold (in this example, “25” and “35” for model A, “15” and “25” for model B) is set, and when a predetermined period elapses, a threshold for abnormality determination Is changed from the recovery threshold to the normal threshold, and The difference number (in this example, the current value of the floating ball counter) is the difference number specified by the information included in the game information stored in the backup RAM when the power supply is started (this example) Then, updating is performed by excluding the number of floating balls at the time of return, and it is determined whether the number of differences after the update has reached a threshold for determination of abnormality. Therefore, in the enclosed ball type game machine, it can be easily grasped that the abnormality is occurring due to the abnormality control.

  In addition, since the abnormal state control can be performed by changing the abnormal state determination threshold value to the return time threshold value when the power supply is started, the abnormal state control can be appropriately performed even when the power failure is recovered. . That is, if there is a game ball that does not reach the collection unit until power supply is resumed and remains in the game area 27, there may be game balls that pass through the collection unit during a power failure, so immediately after a power failure recovery It is not limited to reflect the appropriate number of differences in the gaming information backed up in the state of (it is expected to be in a state of recognizing the number of differences that is larger than the actual number of differences) . Therefore, if it is determined whether or not the threshold for abnormality determination has been reached with the normal time threshold, there is a risk that the abnormality control will be performed excessively. Therefore, when power supply is started, the threshold for abnormality determination is changed to a recovery threshold larger than the normal threshold (in this example, in the case of model A, "20" and "30" to "25"). By changing to “35” and “10” and “20” to “15” and “25” in the case of model A) and performing such abnormal control, so that excessive abnormal control In the case of power failure recovery, it is possible to properly perform abnormal control.

  In this embodiment, the second detection means detects the total number of gaming balls passing through each winning hole and out hole 145, and the fail path detecting switch 33 detects only the balls. And the implementation form of the second detection means is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a detection switch capable of individually detecting each winning opening, out outlet 145 and far ball is separately provided, and a second detecting switch is separately provided for each winning opening, out outlet 145 and far ball. A detection means may be realized. Also, for example, one detection switch capable of detecting all of each winning opening, out opening 145 and far ball is provided, and the total number of gaming balls passing through each winning opening, out opening 145 and far ball is detected. The second detection means may be realized by one possible detection switch.

  Further, in this embodiment, the value of the floating ball number counter is updated on the payout control microcomputer 170 side based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, and based on the value of the floating ball number counter Although the case of executing the abnormal time control based on the determination that the difference number between the game ball fired to the game area 27 and the game ball passed through the recovery unit has reached the threshold for the abnormal time determination, The game control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16 may be configured to execute. In this case, for example, on the gaming control microcomputer 160 side, similarly, the value of the floating ball number counter is updated based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, and the value of the floating ball number counter is updated. Based on that it is determined that the difference number between the game ball fired in the game area 27 and the game ball passed through the recovery unit has reached the threshold for the abnormal time determination, the process for executing the abnormal time control is executed It should be configured to

  Further, the method of recognizing the difference between the number of game balls to be shot into the game area 27 and the number of game balls passing through the collection unit is, for example, one counter (in this example, as shown in this embodiment). The floating ball number counter) is used to add 1 to the value of the counter based on the detection of the first detection means (the launch of the game ball to the game area 27), and the detection of the second detection means By subtracting 1 from the value of the counter on the basis of “pass”, the difference number between the game ball fired in the game area 27 and the game ball passed through the recovery unit may be determined (ie, shot in the game area 27) Instead of directly recognizing the number of game balls and the number of game balls passing through the collection unit, it may be recognizable by managing only the increase or decrease of the number of game balls present in the game area 27), which is shown in this embodiment It is not limited to For example, the first counter for counting the number of detections of the first detection means and the second counter for counting the number of detections of the second detection means may be separately provided, and the threshold value may be determined by the value of the first counter. The difference between the value of the second counter and the value of the second counter may be used to determine the number of differences between the game ball fired in the game area 27 and the game ball passed through the recovery unit (ie, shot in the game area 27 The number of gaming balls may be directly counted, and the number of gaming balls passing through the number section may be directly counted to obtain the difference between the directly counted number of gaming balls). As such, by controlling the number of game balls in the game area 27 or managing the number of game balls to be shot in the game area 27 and the number of game balls passing through the number part, the number of game balls to be shot in the game area 27 It may be configured to be able to recognize the number of differences from the number of game balls passing through the collection unit.

  Further, in this embodiment, the value of the floating ball number counter is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the first detection means (the launch of the game ball to the game area 27), and the detection of the second detection means (each winning opening, Although the case where the value of the floating ball number counter is decremented by 1 is shown based on the out port 145 and the passing of the game ball in the far ball return port 150, the counter is based on the detection of the first detection means. The value of the floating ball number counter may be incremented by 1 based on the detection of the second detection means. In this case, for example, "50" is set as the initial value of the floating ball number counter, and the value of the floating ball number counter is decremented by 1 at the time of detection of the first detection means, and the number of floating balls at the time of detection of the second detection means The value of the counter may be incremented by one. Then, when the value of the floating ball number counter decreases to a predetermined value (for example, "30" or "25"), it may be determined that the threshold for abnormality determination has been reached and the abnormality control may be executed. .

  When the number of floating balls is managed by subtraction in this manner, the difference between the number of gaming balls shot in the game area 27 and the number of gaming balls having passed through the collection section reaching the threshold for abnormal determination is: floating balls That is, the value of the number counter is equal to or less than the threshold value for determination of abnormality. Further, the second abnormality determination threshold exceeding the first abnormality determination threshold means that the second abnormality determination threshold is smaller than the first abnormality determination threshold. As described above, if the second abnormality determination threshold is a threshold corresponding to a difference number larger than the first abnormality determination threshold, whether the floating ball number is managed by the addition method or the subtraction method It does not matter.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game information is backed up on the payout control microcomputer 170 side, and the difference between the number of game balls shot into the game area 27 and the number of game balls having passed the collection unit is a threshold for abnormality determination. It has been shown that the abnormal state control is performed by determining whether or not it has reached, but the backup and the abnormal state control may be configured to be executed by a microcomputer mounted on different substrates. For example, the game control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16 may back up the game information, and the payout control microcomputer 170 may perform abnormal control, or the payout control. The game information may be backed up on the microcomputer 170 side, and the abnormality control may be performed on the game control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16. Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 2, only the backup of the gaming state is performed, and the difference number between the game ball fired in the game area 27 and the game ball passed through the collection unit has reached the threshold for abnormal determination. The hall determination computer 1 may be configured to execute the determination process and the abnormality control execution process.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 2 is started, when the return control is executed, the measurement timer after power failure recovery is set immediately (see step S14), and the predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) However, the timing for starting measurement in a predetermined period is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, after the power supply of the pachinko machine 2 is started, at the timing when the detection is first performed by the first detection means or the second detection means, the measurement timer after recovery from power failure is set to start measurement of a predetermined period. You may do so. In addition, for example, at the timing when the first firing of the game ball is detected, the measurement timer may be set after recovery from power failure to start measurement of a predetermined period, that is, the player starts playing after recovery from power failure. It may be made to start measurement of a predetermined period after recognizing that.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown where both the first abnormal time determination threshold and the second abnormal time determination threshold are changed as the abnormal time determination threshold at the time of power failure recovery, but it is not always necessary to change both threshold values. It is not necessary to change, and only one of them may be changed. In this case, for example, only the first abnormality determination threshold may be changed, or only the second abnormality determination threshold may be changed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, a case is shown where the game ball is made to enter the game area 27 by causing the ball to be launched by the ball striking device, but the mode in which the game ball is made to enter the game area 27 is this embodiment. It is not limited to the one that launches the game ball as shown in the form. For example, an opening for supplying game balls may be provided above the game area 27, and the game balls may be made to enter the game area 27 by dropping the game balls from above the game area 27.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the game information stored in the backup RAM is normal, and the game information stored in the backup RAM is normal. The return control is executed based on the determination that In addition, when it is determined that the game information stored in the backup RAM is normal, the recovery time threshold is set as the threshold for determining the abnormality, and the game information stored in the backup RAM is not normal. When it is determined that the threshold value is determined, the normal threshold value is set as the threshold value for the abnormality determination. Therefore, the recovery threshold value is set only when backup data is stored properly, and otherwise the threshold value for abnormal condition determination is reliably set at recovery from a power failure by setting the normal threshold value. It is possible to carry out abnormal state control.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the abnormality control is performed by performing the abnormality notification (in the present example, the predetermined abnormality notification screen is displayed on the display 54) in the predetermined notification mode. Therefore, a game clerk or the like can easily grasp the occurrence of the abnormality by the abnormality notification, and recovery from the abnormal state can be easily performed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the abnormal state control is executed by stopping the firing of the game ball. Therefore, it can be reliably prevented that the game is continued in an abnormal state.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the abnormality control is executed by externally outputting an abnormality signal capable of identifying the abnormality occurrence to the hall management computer 1. Therefore, by confirming using the hall management computer 1, the game clerk or the like can easily grasp the occurrence of the abnormality, and the recovery from the abnormal state can be easily performed. In this case, for example, when the pachinko machine 2 externally outputs an abnormality signal to the hall management computer 1, the hall management computer 1 transmits the abnormality information to the remote controller possessed by each gaming clerk, and the remote control receives the abnormality information. The game clerk who saw the may recognize the occurrence of the abnormality, go to the pachinko machine where the abnormality has occurred, open and close the glass door 2 and perform work such as ball clogging, etc., so that the abnormal state may be cancelled. .

  In this embodiment, as abnormal control, performing abnormal notification in the above-mentioned predetermined notification mode, stopping firing of the game ball, and outputting an abnormal signal to the hall management computer 1 externally. However, the present invention is not limited to the case described in this embodiment, for example, performing abnormal notification in the above-mentioned predetermined notification mode, stopping firing of a game ball, or abnormal It may be configured to execute any one or two of outputting the signal to the hall management computer 1 externally. Further, for example, an error signal may be transmitted to the card unit 3, and may be externally output to an external device such as the hall management computer 1 via the card unit 3. Even if such a configuration is made, it is possible to notify a game clerk or the like of the occurrence of the abnormality even without performing the abnormality notification.

  Further, the mode of abnormal control is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and it is possible to perform abnormal control in various modes. For example, the abnormality control may be performed by lighting or blinking a lamp or an LED provided on the pachinko machine 2 in a predetermined lighting or blinking pattern. Also, for example, the abnormal state control may be performed by outputting a predetermined warning sound from a speaker provided in the pachinko machine 2 or outputting a voice such as "the number of gaming balls is abnormal".

  Moreover, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the abnormality notification and the external output as the first abnormality control and the control to the emission stop state as the second abnormality control and the emission stop notification are always executed. Although the case has been shown, only one of the first abnormal control and the second abnormal control may be executed depending on the game state. For example, in the case of a big hit game, only the first abnormal time control (abnormal notification etc.) may be performed, and the second abnormal time control (control to the firing stop state) may not be performed. With such a configuration, in the big hit gaming state, it is possible to give priority to the digestion of the big hit game so that the player is not disadvantaged.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the abnormal control release means for canceling the abnormal control after the abnormal control is started (in this example, it is detected that the glass door 6 is further closed after being opened) And release). Then, when the abnormal control is released, the threshold for abnormal determination is changed from the recovery threshold to the big hit medium threshold or the normal threshold. Therefore, after the abnormal control is canceled, the return threshold is changed to the big hit medium threshold or the normal threshold with certainty, so that the return threshold can be prevented after the abnormal control is released. It is possible to prevent a situation where normal abnormal control can not be properly performed.

  In this embodiment, a ball effect may be executed so-called to death, for example, by using a game ball that has won in a normal winning opening or the like. For example, after the game balls are won in the normal winning opening etc., the game balls are led to a predetermined circulation path or the like provided in the game area 27, and the game balls are circulated in the circulation path. May be performed. In this case, for example, when the gaming state is a definite change state, the game balls are led to the circulation path at a high rate to cause a ball effect to appear and die, and a sense of expectation is heard whether the game state is a definite change state or not May be increased. And, when it is configured to be able to execute the ball effect to death in this way, the proportion of floating balls in the game area 27 increases by that amount, so the game ball may be able to be replenished for the ball effect for death, The threshold value for abnormal determination may be changed (the value of the threshold value may be increased) in accordance with the number of supplied game balls.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the number of game balls waiting between the recovery unit (in the present example, each winning opening, each out opening 145, and the foul ball return opening 150) and the ball striking device is for abnormality judgment. The apparatus may be configured to include determination means capable of determining whether the number of threshold values is exceeded. For example, the number of waiting game balls is accumulated up to the maximum number of thresholds for abnormal determination (for example, the maximum number “35” that can be taken as the second abnormal determination threshold in the example shown in FIG. 120) In this case, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a may be disposed at a position in the pumping device 190 where the gaming balls corresponding to the maximum value will be located. Then, if the payout control microcomputer 170 inputs a detection signal from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the number of game balls in standby between the collecting unit and the hit ball launching device is for judgment at abnormality It may be determined that the maximum number of thresholds (e.g., "35") is exceeded.

  Further, according to this embodiment, since the number of game balls is managed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide the management function on the P base side, and the cost of the P base can be minimized as much. it can. In particular, the P unit has a short replacement cycle in the game arcade in order to be able to provide more exciting games quickly, and tends to be replaced early in units of several months if it is one year or early. . In addition, while new models are being developed one after another that rapidly incorporate the rapidly changing tastes of players, the cycle of table replacement in game arcades tends to be quicker.

  On the other hand, CUs are rarely replaced from the viewpoint of taste, and in general, equipment is replaced according to a failure, and even when replaced due to a failure, re-sending after appropriate repair It is used. And if failure does not occur, replacement will not be performed for several years.

  For this reason, by providing the management function of the game ball on the CU side instead of the P base side and suppressing the cost of the P base, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game arcade introducing the P base can be reduced.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, a fixed value (in this example, “25” and “35” for model A, and “15” for model B) are set as recovery time thresholds set at the time of power failure recovery. Although the case of setting “25”) has been described, instead of setting a fixed value, for example, a value according to game information stored in the backup RAM may be set. Hereinafter, a second embodiment will be described in which a value corresponding to the game information stored in the backup RAM is set as the recovery time threshold value set at the time of the power failure recovery.

  Note that, in the following, portions different from the first embodiment will be mainly described, and description of the same configuration and processing as the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a payout control main process according to the second embodiment. In the payout control main process, if the check result in step S11 is normal, the payout control CPU 171 sets a return threshold value as an abnormality determination threshold (step S12A).

  FIG. 134 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the threshold for abnormality determination in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 134, at the time of recovery from a power failure, the backup value backed up in the backup RAM (that is, the value of the floating ball number counter at the time of a power failure) is used as the threshold for abnormal condition determination. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a value obtained by adding to “20” and “30” in the case of model A and “10” and “20” in the case of model B is used. . Therefore, in this embodiment, in step S12A, the payout control CPU 171 sets the value of the floating ball number counter backed up in the backup RAM to the value of the normal time threshold (in this example, in the case of model A). A value obtained by adding “20” and “30”, and “10” and “20” in the case of the model B, is set as a threshold value for abnormality determination. For example, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 identified by the model specification command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of the model A, when the value of the floating ball number counter backed up is “3”, it is added to the value of the normal time threshold (“20” and “30” in this example) The first abnormality determination threshold "23" and the second abnormality determination threshold "33" are set as the abnormality determination threshold. In the case of the model B, when the value of the floating ball number counter backed up is “3”, it is added to the value of the normal time threshold (“10” and “20” in this example) The first abnormality determination threshold “13” and the second abnormality determination threshold “23” are set as the abnormality determination threshold.

  However, when the backup value backed up is large, the threshold value for determination of an abnormality at which it is set becomes too large, and there is a possibility that the abnormality control can not be appropriately performed. Therefore, it is desirable to set an upper limit value as a threshold for abnormality determination to be set. For example, when the value of the floating ball number counter backed up exceeds “6”, the upper limit value (model number) is used as the threshold for the abnormality determination regardless of the value of the floating ball number counter backed up. In the case of A, “25” and “35” may be set, and in the case of model B, “15” and “25” may be set.

  The processes other than step S12A are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the recovery threshold value is set based on the game information stored in the backup RAM. Therefore, in addition to the same effect as that of the first embodiment, at the time of power failure recovery, an abnormal recovery control is performed by setting an appropriate recovery time threshold according to the game situation specified by the backed up game information. Can.

Third Embodiment
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the case is shown where the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that performs a variation display game for controlling to a big hit gaming state based on a variation display result of identification information such as a symbol in a variation display device. However, not limited to such a gaming machine, for example, a game ball entering into a variable winning ball device (feature) provided in the game area 27 has won a predetermined specific area in the variable winning ball device The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that performs a bonus game to control to a big hit gaming state based on the above. Hereinafter, a third embodiment applied to a gaming machine that performs a bonus game will be described.

  Note that, in the following, portions different from the first embodiment will be mainly described, and description of the same configuration and processing as the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 135 is a front view of the game area 27 of the pachinko machine 2 in the third embodiment as viewed from the front. In this embodiment, a case is described in which only a so-called bonus game is applied to a game machine configured to be executable. However, for example, it is possible to combine a variable display game and a bonus game into an executable game machine. It may apply.

  Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, an out port, a foul ball return port, etc. are provided in the game area 27, but in FIG. Illustration is omitted. Also in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the game area 27 is provided with the respective winning openings such as the normal winning opening, the large winning opening, and the starting winning opening. May be

  As shown in FIG. 135, in this embodiment, in the game area 27, a variable winning ball device (feature) 200 capable of entering game balls is provided. The variable winning ball device 200 is provided with a winning opening 201 capable of entering a game ball, and provided with a prize winning switch 201a capable of detecting a game ball entering the variable winning ball device 200 from the winning opening 201 There is.

  The winning opening 201 is provided with an openable / closable opening / closing door so that game balls can enter into the variable winning prize ball device 200 only when the opening / closing door is opened. You may comprise so that a game ball may enter easily. In this case, for example, the opening / closing door provided in the winning opening 201 may be opened for a predetermined time or a predetermined number of times based on the fact that the game ball has won in the starting winning opening provided in the gaming area 27. Further, for example, in the case where the variable display game and the bonus game are combined and applied to an executable game machine, the variable display result of the identification information such as the symbol in the variable display device is a predetermined display result (for example, small hit Based on the fact that it becomes the symbol), the open / close door provided in the winning opening 201 may be opened for a predetermined time or a predetermined number of times.

  Below the variable winning ball device 200, a specific winning opening 202 is provided as a specific area where game balls can win, and a specific area switch 202a capable of detecting the winning game balls is provided in the specific winning opening 202. It is done. Further, below the variable winning ball device 200, there are provided two discharge ports 203 to which game balls can enter, and a gift discharge switch 203a capable of detecting the game balls entering the discharge ports 203 is provided. It is done.

  The game balls that have entered the variable winning prize ball device 200 from the prize winning opening 201 are guided to the specific prize winning hole 202 or the outlet 203 via the inside of the variable winning prize ball device 200. In this case, after entering the variable winning prize ball device 200, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state on the basis of the fact that the game ball has finally won in the specific winning prize opening 202. On the other hand, when the game ball finally enters the outlet 203 after entering the variable winning ball device 200, it is discharged out of the variable winning ball device 200 as it is and is not controlled to the big hit gaming state ). In addition, when it becomes a big hit game state, the big winning opening provided separately from the variable winning ball device 200 may be controlled to be open for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, or the variable winning ball device The variable winning ball apparatus 200 may be controlled to be open for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times.

  Further, the variable winning ball device 200 can be configured in various modes. For example, a route of a plurality of game balls is provided in the variable winning ball device 200, and the ease of winning to the specific winning opening 202 is determined depending on which route the game ball entering the variable winning ball device 200 passes through. May be different. Also, for example, a movable member may be provided in the variable winning ball device 200, and the trajectory of the game ball entering the variable winning ball device 200 may be changed by moving the movable member.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the game ball entering each winning opening (large winning opening, starting opening, normal winning opening) and out is detected by the merging path detection switch 32. In this embodiment, in addition to them, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 202 and the game ball that has entered the outlet 203 are also finally detected by the merging path detection switch 32. It shall be. Then, the same processing as steps S205 and S206 of the abnormality determination processing shown in FIG. 121 is executed, whereby the player enters the game ball or the discharge port 203 that has won the specific winning opening 202 in the variable winning ball device 200. Also for the game balls, the value of the floating ball number counter is decremented by one based on the detection by the merging path detection switch 32. The game ball that has won the specific winning opening 202 and the game ball that has entered the outlet 203 pass through a route different from the merging route detection switch 32, for example, the specific area switch 202a and the gift discharge switch 203. The value of the floating ball number counter may be decremented one by one based on the detection signal from.

  FIG. 136 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the payout control board 17 in the third embodiment. Note that FIG. 136 also shows the main control board 16, the effect control board for display 53, the power supply board 900, and the like. As shown in FIG. 136, in this embodiment, in the payout control microcomputer 170 mounted on the payout control substrate 17, in addition to the respective input signals shown in the first embodiment, a prize winning switch Detection signals from the specific area switch 202a and the character discharge switch 203a are input.

  FIG. 137 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the threshold for abnormality determination in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 137, in this embodiment, a bonus in-prize threshold is used instead of the big hit middle use threshold shown in the first embodiment as the threshold for the abnormal state determination. As shown in FIG. 137, in this embodiment, the threshold value for judging abnormality at the time of winning a prize with a game ball entering a variable winning ball device (character) 200. A value larger than that at the time of power failure recovery is used, and in the case of model A, “30” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold, and “40” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. . In the case of the model B, "20" is set as the first abnormality determination threshold, and "30" is set as the second abnormality determination threshold.

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart of an example of the threshold value changing process for abnormality determination in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, in the abnormality determination threshold changing process, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first receives a detection signal from the prize winning switch 201a. (Step S30A). If the detection signal from the prize winning switch 201a is input, the payout control CPU 171 counts the number of gaming balls present in the variable winning ball device (practice) 200. The value of the number counter is incremented by 1 (step S30B).

  In this embodiment, after the game ball actually enters the variable winning prize ball device 200 from the winning opening 201, based on the input of the detection signal from the prize winning switch 201a, Although the case of adding 1 to the value is shown, it is not always necessary to add 1 to the value of the in-game gaming ball counter after detecting that the game ball has actually entered the variable winning ball device 200. For example, a sensor is provided in a passage or the like immediately before being led to the winning opening 201, and the game ball is considered to have passed through the winning opening 201 based on input signals of detection signals from these sensors (ie, the winning opening 201 It is also possible to add 1 to the value of the in-roll game ball number counter that has been led to the area that is certain to pass and has not actually passed through the winning opening 201 yet.

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the specific area switch 202a is input (step S30C). If the detection signal from the specific area switch 202a has been input, the payout control CPU 171 subtracts one from the value of the in-game gaming ball counter (step S30D).

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the character discharge switch 203a is input (step S30E). If the detection signal from the character discharge switch 203a is input, the payout control CPU 171 subtracts 1 from the value of the in-character game ball counter (step S30F).

  The processes of steps S30 to S34 are the same as the processes shown in the first embodiment.

  If it is determined in step S30 that the value of the measurement timer after power failure recovery is 0, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether the value of the in-game gaming ball number counter is 0 (step S34A). If the value of the in-game gaming ball number counter is not 0 (that is, if the gaming ball is present in the variable winning ball device 200), the payout control CPU 171 controls the variable winning ball device ) It is checked whether or not a winning combination flag indicating that game balls are present in 200 is set (step S34B). If the winning combination winning flag is not set, the payout control CPU 171 sets a winning combination winning threshold as a threshold for determination of abnormality (step S34C). Specifically, in the case of the model A, “30” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold, and “40” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Further, in the case of the model B, "20" is set as the first abnormality determination threshold, and "30" is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Then, the payout control CPU 171 sets a winning combination winning flag (step S34D).

  If the value of the in-game gaming ball number counter is 0 (that is, if there are no playing balls in the variable winning ball device 200), the payout control CPU 171 determines whether the in-game winning flag is set It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S34E). If the winning combination winning flag is set, the payout control CPU 171 sets the normal time threshold as the abnormal time determination threshold (step S34F). Specifically, in the case of the model A, “20” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold, and “30” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Further, in the case of the model B, “10” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold, and “20” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Then, the payout control CPU 171 resets the winning combination in-progress flag (step S34G).

  By executing the processing of steps S34A to S34G, the gaming ball enters from the winning opening 201 from the state where there are no gaming balls in the variable winning ball device (characters) 200, and the gaming in the variable winning ball device 200 When the ball is changed to the existing state, the bonus game in progress threshold is set as the threshold value for the abnormal condition determination. On the other hand, from the state where the game balls exist in the variable winning ball device 200, all the game balls are discharged from the specific winning opening 202 or the outlet 203, and the game balls do not exist in the variable winning ball device 202. When changed, a normal time threshold is set as a threshold for abnormal state determination.

  In this embodiment, after the power failure recovery, a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) elapses and after the power failure recovery time out, the processing of steps S34A to S34G is executed, and a prize is being won. Although the case where the threshold value is set may be set, the processing of steps S34A to S34G is executed even before the predetermined period elapses after the power failure recovery, and the bonus character prize threshold value is set. May be settable.

  Also in this embodiment, in addition to the processes of steps S34A to S34G, the same processes as those of S35 to S37 shown in the first embodiment can be executed to be in the big hit game. May be configured to be able to set a big hit middle use threshold.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the gaming machine configured to execute the bonus game, the game ball is in the variable winning ball device (feature) 200. Based on the above, the bonus for in-game prize is set as the threshold for the abnormal case determination, and the abnormal-time control is performed based on the bonus for in-game prize. Therefore, even in the gaming machine configured to execute the feature game, the execution frequency of the abnormal time control is appropriately adjusted according to the gaming state (whether or not the game ball is present in the variable winning ball device 200). It is possible to perform abnormal control appropriately according to the gaming state. Specifically, in a game configured to play a prize game, when a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 200, generally, the time during which the game ball is staying in the variable winning ball device 200 Longer, the number of floating balls tends to increase even during normal operation compared to the normal gaming state, so set a bonus during prize winning value larger than the threshold for normal time, and control the abnormal state By doing this, it is possible to delay the timing at which the abnormality notification is performed and the timing at which the emission stop state is set, and to perform the abnormality control appropriately.

  Next, modifications and feature points in the above-described embodiments will be described below.

  (1) In the above embodiments, the number of gaming balls is displayed by the display 312 provided on the CU side, and the number of gaming balls is displayed by the display 54 on the P side. ing. When the number of gaming balls is displayed by the display on the CU side, there is an advantage that the number of gaming balls can be displayed by applying the CU in each of the above embodiments to P units without a display unit. On the other hand, in the case where the game ball number display unit is provided on the P platform side, the display control may be performed on the CU side. Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the P side. When the display control is performed on the P side, the information on the number of game balls to be displayed is received from the CU side, and the number of game balls managed by CU is displayed on the number display portion of game balls. It is possible to Also, as described above, when the display control is performed on the side of the P, there is an advantage that it becomes possible to display the number of decorative (rendering) high value game balls. When the display control is performed on the side of P, the information on the number of game balls to be displayed is not received from the CU side, but based on the value of the game ball counter stored in P itself, the game balls The display control of the number may be performed.

  (2) In the opening process of the glass door 6 shown in FIG. 58, a case is shown where a weight of 10 seconds is provided for the floating ball processing waiting time on the CU side, but for the floating ball processing waiting time on the P base side A weight of 10 seconds may be provided. Also, instead of providing a weight, it is determined on the P platform side that the number of fired balls-number of balls-number of out balls-number of winning balls = 0, or the number of fired balls-number of far balls-merging path detection switch 32. The number of detected balls may be determined to be zero, and it may be determined that the processing of floating balls is completed.

  (3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the drive of the hitting and firing motor 18 is stopped on the P base which received the command of prohibition request, and the firing is stopped, and the variation display device during fluctuation is stopped or started. Although it has been shown that the fluctuation display device does not stop until the fluctuation of the fluctuation display device based on storage, the fluctuation of the fluctuation display device may also be stopped instead.

  (4) In each of the above embodiments, when game balls are subtracted by wagon service etc., as described based on FIG. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of gaming balls stored on the CU side is sufficiently large compared to the number of balls of the subtraction request (for example, more than 30 balls), without waiting for a response from P units. The CU side alone may carry out the subtraction process of the game ball, and thereafter, the operation instruction of the subtraction request may be transmitted to P units.

  (5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the command is sent from the CU to the P unit, and the P unit responds to it, and a response is sent back to the CU. It may be a communication mode in which the CU sends a response in response to that, and returns a response to the P unit.

  (6) Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, communication is performed between the CU and P units periodically (for example, 200 ms), but instead, when the need for communication arises Data may be transmitted from one of the CUs or the Ps to the other to communicate with each other.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, the operation response including the rejection signal not complying with the request such as addition rejection ON, subtraction rejection ON, clear rejection ON is sent from the P unit to the CU, On the basis of the rejection ON, the side determines that the request has been rejected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the operation response of the rejection ON being sent back by the P unit, the operation response including the addition subtraction ball number and the game ball data not complying with the request from the CU is sent back to the CU. On the CU side, it is determined whether or not the returned data (the number of added balls, game balls, etc.) is in accordance with the request, and it is determined whether or not the request is rejected. It is also good.

  (8) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the power-off at the CU or the communication disconnection between the CU and the P-unit is detected, the ball striking on the P-unit side is stopped and the play is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game may be controlled to be able to continue the game without stopping the hit shot on the P-unit side. In that case, the cumulative subtraction memory of the number of added subtraction balls and the number of starting openings generated with the continued game from the occurrence of the communication interruption until the recovery and activation of these abnormalities is accumulated on P side Alternatively, the data and the game ball data may be transmitted to the CU at startup to correct the backup value of the data on the CU side.

  (9) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the command from the CU is not transmitted for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the P-unit determines that the communication is disconnected by the process of FIG. However, communication disconnection may be determined by the following method.

  The pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection detector for detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 are electrically connected. Referring to FIG. 16, gaming machine communication unit 325 and payout control board 17 are connected by signal lines as described above, but in addition to the signal lines, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) from card unit 3 is provided. Is provided with a signal line for connection detection input to the pachinko machine 2 side. The connection detection signal line and the signal line between the gaming machine communication unit 325 and the payout control board 17 are constituted by the same cable, and the disconnection of the cable or the detachment of the connectors 330 and 20 and the card unit 3 When the power is cut off, the voltage of the connection detection signal line becomes 0 V, so that the connection detector detects it and the detection signal is input to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 determines that the disconnection of the cable or the detachment of the connectors 330 and 20 and the power of the card unit 3 have occurred due to the input of the detection signal.

  (10) In the process of FIG. 49, when receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, P is programmed not to reject the correction request by P. However, in P units, despite receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, there may be a case where a serious error such as a game ball can not be corrected. In consideration of such a severe error condition, the CU side checks the content of the operation response transmitted from P after transmitting the communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, and the P side It may be determined whether or not the game ball or the like is correctly corrected, and if it is not corrected, control may be performed to shift to an error state.

  In other words, after determining that the gaming machine (for example, P units) can not add a game ball or the like even after receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON shown in FIG. It includes error control means for performing control to shift to a defined error state.

  As control to shift to an error state, for example, while giving a severe error notification by the display unit 312, giving a notification that a severe error has occurred to the hall management computer 1, the error notification by the hall management computer 1 It is possible to go there and encourage personnel to take artificial measures.

  (11) In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine is not limited to a pachinko machine, and other gaming machines, for example, slot machines (pachislot machines) Or the like. This type of slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels on the outer peripheral portion of which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn as identification information, and each reel The player starts the rotation by operating the start lever, and the player operates the stop button provided corresponding to each reel, within a predetermined maximum delay time range from the operation timing. Stop rotating at. Then, a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all the reels is stopped.

  As types of winning combinations, there are types such as small roles, special roles, and re-play roles. Here, in the case of a small winning combination, the player can obtain a benefit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small winning combination. In the special part winning, the player can gain the benefit of being transferred from the next game to the player's advantageous gaming state such as regular bonus and big bonus. In the case of winning the replay role, it is possible to obtain the advantage that the next game can be played without consuming new medals in setting the number of bets.

  In order for the winning of each combination to occur, generally, it is a condition to win in an internal lottery which is performed in advance (usually at the time of start lever operation). Then, the combination of the symbols constituting the combination winning the internal lottery is aligned to the effective line, and the combination of the symbols constituting the combination not winning the internal lottery is not aligned to the effective line Reel control is performed.

  In the case of such a slot machine, as a method of game prohibition when receiving a game prohibition command from the CU, for example, the bet number input operation may be disabled.

  When applied to a slot machine, instead of the floating ball processing waiting time described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 59, one game ending waiting time from the start of one game to the end of one game is adopt. The 1 game end waiting time is, for example, a time from when all reels of the slot machine start to rotate until all reels stop and a credit is awarded when a prize is generated. This time may vary depending on the late timing of the stop operation of the reel by the player. Therefore, for example, it is conceivable to set an estimated time in advance.

(12) On the P base side, the number of added balls may be counted as follows.
A counter A and a counter B are provided on the side of P as counters for counting the number of added balls. First, the number of added balls is counted by the counter A. At the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter A is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter A is maintained, and thereafter, the number of added balls is counted by the counter B. At the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter B is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, while maintaining the value of the counter B, the count value of the counter A is cleared to 0, and thereafter, the counter A counts the number of added balls. Thereafter, the above counting by the counters A and B is repeated.

  The above counting method may be used to count the number of subtraction balls on the P-unit side. Alternatively, it may be used to count the number of starting opening 1 winnings and the number of starting openings 2 winnings.

  (13) The P unit does not transmit two pieces of information of the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls to the CU, but transmits one piece of information after adding and subtracting the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls to the CU It is also good. That is, "update information capable of specifying the amount of change" is also configured by such information.

  (14) The communication method is not limited to the above command-response method. The P unit may transmit ball-related information such as game balls to the CU at predetermined time intervals without waiting for a command from the CU. Alternatively, instead of transmitting ball-related information at predetermined time intervals, the P-unit may transmit ball-related information to the CU each time a predetermined amount of information is obtained. For example, in the case of an addition ball, it is conceivable to configure to transmit the number of addition balls to the CU whenever one or two or more predetermined numbers of addition balls are generated.

  (15) In each of the above-described embodiments, two counters, the addition ball number counter and the subtraction ball number count, are provided on the P base side. However, instead of these two counters, one addition / subtraction counter may be used which is added by the increase of the game balls (e.g., the occurrence of winning) and is subtracted by the decrease of the game balls (e.g. In this case, the value of this one addition / subtraction counter is transmitted from P to CU.

(16) Each of the above embodiments includes the following configuration.
After the gaming device transmits a command for instructing subtraction of points to the gaming machine, the gaming device reestablishes a communication connection with the gaming machine before receiving a response to the command. If it has shifted to the above, it is determined whether or not a command for instructing subtraction of points has reached the gaming machine based on the data transmitted from the gaming machine side in the process of reestablishing the communication connection. And the command transmission unit cancels the instruction to subtract the point by the command when it is determined by the arrival determination unit that the command to instruct subtraction of the point has arrived. Command is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the additional point updating means cancels the instruction for subtracting the points by the command for instructing the subtraction of the points. When receiving the command of, whether the points have already been subtracted based on the command for instructing the subtraction of points or the points have not been subtracted due to lack of points, either The point corresponding to the cancellation amount of the subtraction instruction is added to the point stored in the additional point storage means.

  (17) In each of the above embodiments, the operation of the return button 322 causes the CU to input a signal requesting the end of the game. However, the CU may be configured to be able to input a signal requesting game termination from the hall management computer or the like.

(18) The CU and the P may be communicably connected not by wired connection but by wireless.
(19) The payout control board 17 may not be provided on the pachinko machine 2 by providing the function of the payout control board 17 on the main control board 16.

  (20) The payout control board 17 performs control to stop the driving of the bat firing motor 18 when the gaming ball number counter stored on the pachinko machine 2 side becomes 0. However, the payout control board 17 may execute the control when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value other than zero. For example, the player can designate and input the predetermined value in advance using a predetermined operation switch of the gaming machine. The payout control board 17 stops driving the bat firing motor 18 when the gaming ball counter reaches a predetermined value designated by the player. Thus, the player can automatically stop the game when the remaining number of game balls reaches the number of balls specified in advance.

  (21) In each of the above embodiments, although the effect unit 50 is provided on the side of the pachinko machine 2 and various displays are made by the display 54, the pachinko machine 2 does not include the effect unit 50. It may be In that case, even if a command including an operation instruction such as ON during card insertion processing, ON during addition display, ON during clear display ON is transmitted to P base 2, the P base 2 responds to the command. Display control is not performed, and display is performed only by the display unit 312 on the CU side.

  (22) In the ball sharing process shown in FIG. 95 to FIG. 97, a stock card is used in which the card B to be discharged for sharing division (sharing balls) to another person is stocked in CU, Instead, the card B for transfer to another person is inserted from the outside of the CU into the card insertion / ejection slot 309, and balls for division transfer (ball sharing) are recorded and ejected in the inserted card B. You may do it. In that case, on the display screen of the ball sharing processing status shown in FIG. 101 to FIG. 104, between the discharging process of its own card which is the first process and the discharging process of the shared card which is the second process, The process of inserting a shared card will be added.

  (23) In the ball sharing process shown in FIG. 96, the visitor card B is first inserted to start the game, but instead, the player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 of the CU. You may start playing the game. In that case, the card B for transfer used for sharing balls is taken out from the card stock unit in the CU, is discharged in association with the shared points, and is correlated with the number of game balls at the end of the game. The card to be returned to may be taken out from the card stock unit in the CU and discharged. In addition, after the game is started by the insertion of a bill, the number of game balls at that time may be associated with the card taken out from the card stock section at the stage when the number of game balls is generated by the occurrence of winning. In that case, when the number of game balls fluctuates with the game, the number of game balls corresponding to the card is also fluctuated in the same manner. Then, when an operation for sharing balls is performed, the number of gaming balls associated with the card is changed to the number of shared points, the card is ejected as a card for transfer, and removed from the card stock unit again. It is also possible to associate the remainder of the above-mentioned number of game balls minus the share for common points, with the played card.

  (24) In each of the above embodiments, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, it determines that the connection sequence is resumed in a state other than standby (see FIG. 50) and transmits a communication disconnection request by itself to perform communication. When it is determined that the connection sequence restarts after disconnection, or when it is determined that the SQN being backed up by the CU and the SQN transmitted from P do not match, the re-play of FIG. Execute the connection sequence on connection. However, in addition to or instead of any of them, a signal (for example, recovery) indicating that the disconnection of the communication connection has occurred during playing (when not waiting) from P units along with the resumption of the connection sequence Data etc. may be transmitted to the CU, and the CU may execute the connection sequence at the time of reconnection of FIG. 49 based on the signal.

  (25) In the processing of divisional transfer of game balls (sharing balls) shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, divisional transfer is performed on condition that it is determined that the current game ball is more than a predetermined number of game balls to be divided and transferred. (You may be allowed to share balls). In the case of FIG. 95 and FIG. 96, for example, divisional transfer (ball-sharing) is permitted on condition that it is determined that the number of gaming balls at the current time is 200 or more more than the number of gaming balls to be divided and transferred. Further, in the case of FIG. 97, division transfer (ball sharing) is performed on the condition that the value obtained by subtracting the collateral ball (= 200) from the current game ball is determined to be 100 or more more than the game balls to be divided and transferred. Allow

  (26) In the process of dividing and transferring the game balls (sharing balls) shown in FIGS. 95 and 97, the number of game balls in the game is card B until the card A is discharged and then the card B is discharged. If the player is not satisfied with the balls to be written and transferred, control is performed so that the sharing of points is canceled and the card B is not discharged.

  (27) In each of the above embodiments, the units of the number of game balls and the number of balls are the same. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the units of both may be different. For example, when the number of game balls “1” is converted to the number of balls possessed, it may be set to “10”.

  (28) In FIG. 96, a card (stock card) stocked in the card stock unit is taken out when the return operation at the end of the game is made, and the number of game balls is associated with the stock card to be discharged. Although it was shown, instead, the staff of the game arcade should bring in a new card, insert the card into the card insertion / ejection slot 309, associate the number of game balls, and eject the card. Good.

  (29) In the above embodiments, two types of cards, a membership card and a visitor card, are shown. However, the type of card is not limited to this, and for example, only one type of visitor card may be used.

  The following will list the effects obtained from combinations of various means and the like included in the above-described embodiments.

(1-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) which can play a game by holding points and to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, etc.) owned by the player Alternatively, the gaming system includes a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) which adds points by using the number of balls and is communicably connected to the gaming machine (connection wiring with the connectors 330 and 20).
The gaming machine is
Specification means (microcomputer for game machine control, number-of-additions ball counter, number-of-balls counter) for specifying the amount of change of points (number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) according to use for games and occurrence of winnings;
Information transmitting means (payout control board 17) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) capable of specifying the amount of change to the game apparatus;
The gaming device is
Main point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing the number of game balls);
Information receiving means (game machine communication unit 325) for receiving the update information;
And a point update means (control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the main point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(1-2) The gaming machine is
Secondary point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
And a secondary point updating means (a payout control board 17) for updating the points stored in the secondary point storage means according to the change amount.
The game machine performs game control based on the points stored in the additional point storage means (when the number of game balls counter reaches 0, the driving of the ball firing motor 18 is stopped),
When the signal for requesting the end of the game (the operation signal of the return button 322) is input, the gaming device determines the points stored in the main point storage means as the points at the end of the game. It includes point determination means (control unit 323; FIG. 57).

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are decided on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point deciding function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much It can be suppressed.

(1-3) The gaming device is
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the points stored in the main point storage means;
Instruction information transmitting means (game machine communication unit 325) for transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information to the game machine;
The gaming machine is
Including instruction information receiving means (disbursement control board 17) for receiving information for instructing transmission of the update information;
Each time the information transmission means receives the information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmission means updates the amount of change (current ball related information) from the previous reception of the information to the current reception. Information is transmitted (values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter in FIG. 17; FIG. 51).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, the gaming machine transmits, to the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change based on the previous transmission of the update information. . For this reason, the gaming device can perform the latest point management by updating the points by the update information transmitted one by one.

(1-4) The information transmission means transmits the points (the value of the game ball counter) stored in the additional point storage means to the gaming apparatus (the value of the game ball counter in FIG. 17). , Figure 51),
The gaming device is
It includes determination means (FIG. 17; determination of coincidence of the number of game balls) for determining the consistency between the points stored in the main point storage means and the points stored in the additional point storage means. ,
When it is determined by the determination means that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing is performed (error notification by the display unit 312, recovery processing is performed, and the data correction request Bit 2 is “1” data (playing ball correction ON) And a communication start request including data of the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P-unit, and correction of matching the storage of the number of game balls in the P-unit with the number of game balls of the CU is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored in the gaming machine are not consistent with the points stored in the gaming apparatus. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to cope with the processing when there is an inconsistency.

(1-5) The instruction information transmitting unit stores, when the determination unit determines that there is a mismatch, the main point storage unit stores the points stored by the additional point storage unit. Sending correction information (a communication start request including the game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) for correcting to a point to the gaming machine,
The instruction information transmission means transmits the correction information to the gaming machine (transmission of a communication start request including the game ball correction ON and the number of game balls to P).
The gaming machine is a point correction means for correcting the points stored in the additional point storage means based on the correction information. Correction according to.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(1-6) The gaming machine is a ball and ball gaming machine (pachinko machine 2),
The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at an interval (FIG. 45; once in 200 ms) shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at intervals shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball, the change amount of the points notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to finely notify the amount of change in points to the gaming device.

  (1-7) The gaming machine determines whether or not the remaining number of remaining points necessary to continue the game based on the points stored in the additional point storage means (the payout control means (payout control) Substrate 17, FIG. 52).

  According to such a configuration, since the transmission of the update information is not in time at the time of determination, the points stored in the gaming apparatus and the actual points (the number of gaming balls stored in the gaming machine) and Even if there is a gap between them, it is possible to make a judgment based on the actual points.

(1-8) The instruction information transmission unit transmits information for instructing to prohibit the game to the gaming machine (operation instruction (with prohibition request) in FIGS. 58 to 59).
A gaming prohibition means (the payout control board 17 stops the driving of the hitting ball firing motor 18) for making the gaming by the points not be performed when the gaming machine receives the information for instructing the gaming prohibition, 58 to 59) are included.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming apparatus can control the prohibition of the game by the gaming machine.

(1-9) The instruction information transmitting means transmits information for instructing the gaming machine to set the value of the points stored in the additional point storage means to the initial value (FIG. 57, Operation instruction (clear request present)) of FIGS. 91 and 93)
In the gaming machine, the additional point storage means stores the information based on the reception of information for instructing the value of the points stored in the additional point storage means to be an initial value. The point initialization means (FIG. 57, FIG. 91, FIG. 93 (the payout control board 17 initializes the value of the game ball number counter to 0)) which sets the value of the point to the initial value is included.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to instruct the gaming apparatus side to initialize the points stored in the gaming machine.

(1-10) A connection portion (connector 330) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) capable of playing a game with points and having points added according to the occurrence of a prize is provided. A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that adds points by using game-owned value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by a player,
Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing "the number of game balls");
Information receiving means (game machine communication unit 325) for receiving, from the gaming machine, update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize;
And a point updating means (control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  (1-11) Points that the points stored in the point storage means are determined as points at the end of the game when a signal (operation signal of the return button 322) requesting the end of the game is input A determination means (control unit 323; FIG. 57) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are decided on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point deciding function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much It can be suppressed.

(1-12) When points received by the gaming machine are received from the gaming machine according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize, the received points and the point storage means Including determination means (FIG. 17; determination of the number of game balls to determine the consistency) with the stored points;
When it is determined by the determination means that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing is performed (error notification by the display unit 312, recovery processing is performed, and the data correction request Bit 2 is “1” data (playing ball correction ON) And a communication start request including data of the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P-unit, and correction of matching the storage of the number of game balls in the P-unit with the number of game balls of the CU is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored in the gaming machine are not consistent with the points stored in the gaming apparatus. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to cope with the processing when there is an inconsistency.

  (1-13) The correction information for correcting the points stored in the gaming machine to the points stored in the point storage means when the determination means determines that the points are inconsistent It includes correction information transmission means (transmission of game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) to be transmitted to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(1-14) The gaming apparatus has an information for instructing transmission of the update information at an interval (FIG. 45; 200 ms) shorter than a firing time interval (one shot at 0.6 s) of the gaming machine in the gaming machine. 1) to the gaming machine in sequence.
The point updating means sequentially updates the points stored in the point storage means on the basis of the update information sequentially received (control unit 323, FIG. 51).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball, the game device has the change in the points on the game machine side reflected finely. Point management becomes possible.

(2-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a player plays a game, and the gaming machine are communicably connected (connectors with the connectors 330 and 20) (connection wires with the connectors 330 and 20), and the gaming value (prepaid balance owned by the player) A gaming system (card unit 3) that enables playing on the gaming machine using the number of balls held or the number of balls stored,
The gaming device is
Control means (control unit 323) for performing operation control of the gaming apparatus;
Display means (display 312) for displaying on the player a situation according to the control executed by the control means in response to the operation of the player;
And transmission means (game machine communication unit 325) for transmitting a display instruction for causing the game machine to display a status according to the control executed by the control means.

  According to such a configuration, in the case of a gaming machine provided with a display means, in the case of a gaming machine provided with no display means while enabling unique display in a mode matching the game machine. Even if there is, the player can recognize the situation according to the control executed on the gaming apparatus side in accordance with the operation of the player.

  (2-2) While the transmission means transmits the display instruction in accordance with the timing to start the display of the situation according to the control by the display means (FIGS. 53 to 57, FIG. 94; Start the display operation and send an operation instruction of ON during display to P units), and do not transmit an end instruction to end the display of the situation according to the control by the gaming machine (FIG. 94; instructs the end of the display) End the display without sending a command).

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine provided with the display means while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the deviation of the display start timing when both the gaming apparatus and the game machine have the display means. This makes it possible to execute unique display unique to the gaming machine without being restricted by the end timing of display on the gaming apparatus side.

(2-3) The gaming device receives a recording medium (card) in which information capable of specifying the gaming value owned by the player is recorded.
The control means executes control for authenticating the received recording medium (FIG. 53, FIG. 94; inquiry to the upper server).
The display means displays to the player that the recording medium is being authenticated.
The transmission means transmits a display instruction for causing the gaming machine to display that the recording medium is being authenticated (FIG. 53, FIG. 94; transmits an operation instruction including card holding and card insertion processing in progress) ).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the authentication of the received recording medium is in progress.

(2-4) The control means adds points by using gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls stored) owned by the player (FIG. 53 to FIG. 55, FIG. 94; addition present, Send operation instruction including required number of added balls = 5000),
The display means displays to the player that the points are being added.
The transmission means transmits a display instruction to cause the gaming machine to display that the addition of the points is being made (FIGS. 53 to 55, FIG. 94; during addition display).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the points are being added.

(2-5) The gaming machine can play a game with points,
The gaming device adds points by using the gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls stored) owned by the player (FIGS. 53 to 55, FIG. 94; for example, addition present, addition request) Send operation instruction including ball number = 5000),
The gaming machine is
Specifying means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball number counter, subtraction ball number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for games and occurrence of prizes;
Information transmitting means (disbursement control board 17) for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the game apparatus;
The gaming device is
Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing "the number of game balls");
Information receiving means (game machine communication unit 325) for receiving the update information;
And a point updating means (control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(2-6) A connection portion (connectors 330 and 20 and connection wiring) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a player plays a game is provided, and a gaming value (prepaid owned by the player) A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables playing on the gaming machine using the balance, the number of balls held, or the number of balls stored,
Control means (control unit 323) for performing operation control of the gaming machine;
Display means (display 312) for displaying on the player a situation according to the control executed by the control means in response to the operation of the player;
And transmission means (game machine communication unit 325) for transmitting a display instruction for causing the game machine to display a status according to the control executed by the control means.

  According to such a configuration, in the case of a gaming machine provided with a display means, in the case of a gaming machine provided with no display means while enabling unique display in a mode matching the game machine. Even if there is, the player can recognize the situation according to the control executed on the gaming apparatus side in accordance with the operation of the player.

  (2-7) While the transmission means transmits the display instruction in accordance with the timing to start the display of the situation according to the control by the display means (FIGS. 53 to 57, FIG. 94; Start the display operation and send an operation instruction of ON during display to P units), and do not transmit an end instruction to end the display of the situation according to the control by the gaming machine (FIG. 94; instructs the end of the display) End the display without sending a command).

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine provided with the display means while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the deviation of the display start timing when both the gaming apparatus and the game machine have the display means. This makes it possible to execute unique display unique to the gaming machine without being restricted by the end timing of display on the gaming apparatus side.

(2-8) The control means executes control for authenticating the recording medium when a recording medium (card) on which the information capable of specifying the game value owned by the player is recorded is received. (FIG. 53, FIG. 94; confirmation to the upper server),
The display means displays to the player that the recording medium is being authenticated (FIG. 94).
The transmission means transmits a display instruction for causing the gaming machine to display that the recording medium is being authenticated (FIG. 53, FIG. 94; transmits an operation instruction including card holding and card insertion processing in progress) ).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the authentication of the received recording medium is in progress.

(2-9) The gaming device receives a recording medium (card) in which information capable of specifying the gaming value owned by the player is recorded.
The control means uses the game owned value of the player specified by the recording medium when the recording medium on which the information capable of specifying the game owned value of the player is recorded is received. (FIG. 53 to FIG. 55, FIG. 94; presence of addition, an operation instruction including the number of addition request balls = 5000 is transmitted),
The display means displays to the player that the addition of the points is being made (FIGS. 53 to 55, FIG. 94; during addition display).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the points are being added.

(2-10) The connection unit is communicably connected to a gaming machine capable of playing games with points and adding points according to the occurrence of a winning,
Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing "the number of game balls");
Information receiving means (game machine communication unit 325) for receiving, from the gaming machine, update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize;
And a point updating means (control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(3-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) which can play a game by holding points and to which points are added according to the occurrence of winnings, and gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, etc.) owned by the player Alternatively, the gaming system is provided with a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) which adds points by using the number of balls and is communicably connected (connecting with the connectors 330 and 20) to the gaming machine (card unit 3).
The gaming machine is
Specifying means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball number counter, subtraction ball number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for games and occurrence of prizes;
Backup means for backing up stored data when communication with the gaming apparatus is disconnected (when connectors 330 and 20 are disconnected, when connection wiring is disconnected, when CU is powered off) (recovery data in FIGS. 69 and 76 to 93) And the RAM of the payout control board 17 for storing
The update information capable of specifying the amount of change specified by the specifying means is transmitted to the gaming machine (the payout control board 17 transmits the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the gaming machine communication unit 325);
The gaming device is
Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing "the number of game balls");
A point update means (control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information transmitted from the gaming machine;
At the start of communication with the gaming machine, it is determined whether or not disconnection of communication with the gaming machine immediately before the start of communication is based on the normal termination of communication (a. Waiting (see FIG. 50). B) resumption of the connection sequence after sending a communication disconnection request and disconnecting the communication (see FIG. 69), or c. CU is a backup It is judged whether the normal SQN and the SQN sent from P are inconsistent or not, and it is judged that the normal communication is not ended (abnormal end) when it is judged as any of a to c. ), When it is determined that it is based on the end of normal communication, while the instruction to initialize the stored data backed up by the backup means is transmitted (FIG. 48; SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 0 , Game Send a communication start request including ball = 0 to P), and when it is determined that it is based on an abnormal end, send a correction request for correcting the stored data backed up by the backup means to normal data. (FIG. 49; SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 3, and a communication start request including game ball = 300 is transmitted to P unit),
When the game machine receives a command to initialize the stored data, it initializes the stored data backed up by the backup means (FIG. 48; “sequence number” backed up by P units and Set "game ball" to 0 in accordance with CU information), when the correction request is received, perform correction processing of the stored data backed up by the backup unit (Fig. 49; backed up by P units) Match "sequence number" and "playing ball" to the information of CU).

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  Furthermore, in the case of normal termination of communication, initialization of stored data backed up in the gaming machine is performed, while in the case of abnormal termination, correction processing of stored data backed up in the gaming machine is performed. Therefore, it is possible to solve the problem of data inconsistency between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine accompanying abnormal termination of communication.

(3-2) The gaming apparatus selects and designates a target of storage data to be corrected among the plurality of types of storage data backed up by the backup means, and transmits a correction request (FIG. 23; Select and specify sequence numbers and game balls with Bit 1 and Bit 2),
When the game machine receives the correction request, the game machine performs a correction process of memory data selected and specified among the memory data backed up by the backup unit (FIG. 49).

  According to such a configuration, in the case of abnormal termination of communication, storage data which needs correction can be selected, designated and corrected, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of performing unnecessary correction processing.

(3-3) The backup means backs up the data of the change amount of the point and the data of the point specified by the specifying means (playing ball number counter, addition ball number counter, subtraction ball number counter)
The gaming device transmits a transmission request for storage data backed up by the backup means to the gaming machine (sends a recovery request to P).
In response to the transmission request, the gaming machine transmits, to the gaming apparatus, update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points backed up by the backup unit (including the number of balls in the previous time and the number of balls currently) Send recovery data to CU as recovery response),
The gaming device is
When it is determined that disconnection of communication with the gaming machine immediately before the start of the communication is based on abnormal termination, the point storage means stores based on the update information transmitted from the gaming machine Hold point correction means (FIG. 49; control unit 323 for correcting a game ball or the like according to the contents of recovery response) for performing a point correction process, and
When it is determined that disconnection of communication with the gaming machine immediately before the start of communication is based on abnormal termination, the data of the points among the stored data backed up by the backup means is corrected by the point correction means. Send a correction request for correction to a processed point (FIGS. 23 and 49; send a communication start request including data of “1” in Bit 2 of data correction request to P),
The gaming machine, when receiving the correction request, performs correction processing of the data of the points among the stored data backed up by the backup means (FIG. 49).

  According to such a configuration, when it is necessary to correct important data called data of points due to abnormal termination of communication, data of the points can be selected, designated and corrected.

  (3-4) The gaming device checks whether the number is updated and communication is properly performed whenever data transmission / reception is performed between the gaming machine and the gaming device. When the communication number for the communication is transmitted from the gaming machine at the start of communication, the abnormal termination is judged based on the fact that the communication number is an abnormal value (FIG. 82, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, when it is necessary to correct the communication number due to abnormal termination of communication, the data of the communication number can be selected, designated and corrected, and the resumed communication is properly performed. It can be confirmed based on the appropriate communication number whether or not it is received.

(3-5) A connection portion (connector 330) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) capable of playing a game by points and having points added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize is provided. A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that adds points by using game-owned value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by a player,
Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing "the number of game balls");
Point updating means (control unit 323) for updating the points stored by the point storage means based on the update information based on the update information transmitted from the gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) And further,
At the start of communication with the gaming machine, it is determined whether or not disconnection of communication with the gaming machine immediately before the start of communication is based on normal termination of communication, and based on the normal termination of communication. When it is determined that the game machine side sends a command to initialize stored data backed up from the time of communication disconnection (FIG. 48; SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 0, game ball Send a communication start request including = 0 to P), and when it is determined that it is based on an abnormal end, send a correction request for correcting stored data backed up on the gaming machine side to normal data. (FIG. 49; SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 3, game ball = 300 sending a communication start request including P).

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  Furthermore, in the case of normal termination of communication, initialization of stored data backed up in the gaming machine is performed, while in the case of abnormal termination, correction processing of stored data backed up in the gaming machine is performed. Therefore, it is possible to solve the problem of data inconsistency between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine accompanying abnormal termination of communication.

  (3-6) The gaming apparatus transmits a correction request by selecting and designating a target of storage data to be corrected among a plurality of types of storage data backed up on the gaming machine side (FIG. 23; data correction request) Select and specify the sequence number and the game ball with Bit 1 and Bit 2 of

  According to such a configuration, in the case of abnormal termination of communication, storage data which needs correction can be selected, designated and corrected, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of performing unnecessary correction processing.

(3-7) The gaming apparatus transmits a transmission request of stored data backed up on the side of the gaming machine to the gaming machine (sends a recovery request to P).
When it is determined that the disconnection of communication with the gaming machine immediately before the start of the communication is due to an abnormal end, the gaming device is backed up transmitted from the gaming machine in response to the transmission request. Point correction means for correcting the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information that can identify the change amount of the points (FIG. 49; game ball in accordance with the contents of the recovery response) , Etc., and further,
When it is determined that disconnection of communication with the gaming machine immediately before the start of communication is based on abnormal termination, data of the points among the stored data backed up on the side of the gaming machine by the point correction means A correction request for correction to the correction-processed point is sent (FIG. 49).

  According to such a configuration, when it is necessary to correct important data called data of points due to abnormal termination of communication, data of the points can be selected, designated and corrected.

  (3-8) The gaming device checks whether the number is updated and communication is properly performed whenever data transmission / reception is performed between the gaming machine and the gaming device. When the communication number for the communication is transmitted from the gaming machine at the start of communication, the abnormal termination is judged based on the fact that the communication number is an abnormal value (FIG. 82, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, when it is necessary to correct the communication number due to abnormal termination of communication, the data of the communication number can be selected, designated and corrected, and the resumed communication is properly performed. It can be confirmed based on the appropriate communication number whether or not it is received.

(4-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) which can play a game by holding points and to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, etc.) owned by the player Alternatively, the gaming system is provided with a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) which adds points by using the number of balls and is communicably connected (connecting with the connectors 330 and 20) to the gaming machine (card unit 3).
The gaming machine is
Specification means (microcomputer for game machine control, number-of-additions ball counter, number-of-balls counter) for specifying the amount of change of points (number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) according to use for games and occurrence of winnings;
Secondary point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
And D. point updating means (game ball counter) for updating the points stored in the additional point storage means according to the amount of change.
The update information capable of specifying the amount of change specified by the specifying means is transmitted to the game apparatus (the operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls is transmitted to the CU),
The gaming device is
Recording medium receiving means (card insertion and discharge port 309, card reader / writer 327) for receiving a recording medium having recorded therein information capable of specifying the game value owned by the player;
Main point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing the number of game balls);
Main point updating means (control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the main point storage means according to the update information, based on the update information transmitted from the gaming machine;
Return processing means for transmitting return information to the gaming machine when there is a return operation of the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means (FIG. 57; operation instruction including prohibition request existence to P unit) A control unit 323 and a gaming machine communication unit 325) for transmitting;
Recording medium discharge processing means (card reader / writer 327) for discharging the recording medium when the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means is returned.
The gaming machine further includes a game prohibition means (a launch control board 31 for stopping the launch motor 18) for setting a game prohibited state in which a game with a point is not performed when the return time information is received,
In the gaming machine, when the gaming prohibition means is in the gaming prohibition state and a predetermined condition is satisfied (FIG. 57; when floating ball processing waiting time (10 seconds) has elapsed), The initialization enable information indicating that it is possible to receive the information for instructing initialization of the points stored in the secondary memory storage means is transmitted (FIG. 57; the operation response including the game completion ON is set to CU Sent to),
The gaming machine transmits information for instructing initialization of the points to the gaming machine when the initialization enable information is received (FIG. 57; transmits an operation instruction including clear request to P) ),
The additional point updating means initializes the points stored in the additional point storage means when information for instructing initialization of the points is transmitted from the gaming device ( Set the number of game balls = 0).

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  Furthermore, the gaming machine is in the game prohibited state when the return time information is received, and transmits the initializeable information to the gaming apparatus when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming apparatus can be initialized. When information is received, information for instructing initialization of the points is transmitted to the gaming machine, and when the information is transmitted from the gaming apparatus, the gaming machine performs the game to initialize the points. Device will initialize the points in the unconfirmed stage when executing the initialization of the points stored in the gaming machine at the time of the return of the recording medium received in the device for It is possible to prevent the inconvenience as much as possible.

(4-2) The specifying means specifies the amount of change even when the points are changed while the game prohibited state is in the game prohibited state by the game prohibiting means (the number of added balls is determined based on winning of floating balls). Add and update),
When the amount of change in points is specified by the specifying means while the game prohibiting means is in the game prohibited state, the gaming machine may be provided with update information capable of specifying the amount of change. (FIG. 57; even in the floating ball processing waiting time, an operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls is transmitted to the CU).

  According to such a configuration, update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points while in the game prohibited state is also transmitted to the gaming device, and the amount of change in points while in the game prohibited state Even the game device can be grasped.

(4-3) While the game machine performs game control based on the points stored in the additional point storage means (when the game ball counter reaches 0, the driving of the bat firing motor 18 is stopped),
The recording medium discharge processing means, after receiving the initializeable information, corresponds to the information capable of specifying the game value corresponding to the holding points stored in the main points storage means and the correspondence with the recording medium After the attachment, the recording medium is discharged (FIG. 57; after receiving the operation response including the game completion ON, the number of game balls stored by the CU is stored in the card as the number of balls held (or the upper server And updating the points stored in association with the card number of the card to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU)).

  According to such a configuration, after waiting until the point of the gaming machine is determined, the game value corresponding to the determined point is associated with the identifiable information and the recording medium accepted. The recording medium can be discharged, and the problem that the recording medium associated with the information that can specify the point in the middle of the fluctuation before the final determination can be prevented from being discharged.

(4-4) The game device is
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the points stored in the main point storage means;
Transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information to the gaming machine (the gaming machine communication unit 325 transmits the operation instruction);
Each time the gaming machine receives information for instructing transmission of the update information, update information indicating the amount of change (current ball related information) from the previous reception of the information to the current reception (Values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter in FIG. 17; FIG. 51).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, the gaming machine transmits, to the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change based on the previous transmission of the update information. . For this reason, the gaming device can perform the latest point management by updating the points by the update information transmitted one by one.

(4-5) The gaming machine transmits the points (the value of the game ball counter) stored in the additional point storage means to the gaming machine (the value of the game ball counter in FIG. 17; Figure 52),
The gaming device is
It includes determination means (FIG. 17; determination of coincidence of the number of game balls) for determining the consistency between the points stored in the main point storage means and the points stored in the additional point storage means. ,
When it is determined by the determination means that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing is performed (error notification by the display unit 312, recovery processing is performed, and the data correction request Bit 2 is “1” data (playing ball correction ON) And a communication start request including data of the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P-unit, and correction of matching the storage of the number of game balls in the P-unit with the number of game balls of the CU is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored in the gaming machine are not consistent with the points stored in the gaming apparatus. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to cope with the processing when there is an inconsistency.

(4-6) The gaming machine is a point which the main point storage means stores the points stored by the secondary point storage means when it is determined by the determination means to be inconsistent. Sending correction information (a communication start request including the game ball number correction ON of FIG. 49 and the game ball number shown in FIG. 49) to the game machine.
The gaming machine includes point correction means (payout control board 17; corrects the number of game balls according to a correction instruction command) for correcting the points stored in the additional point storage means based on the correction information.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(4-7) The gaming machine is a ball and ball gaming machine (pachinko machine 2),
The ball and ball game machine sequentially transmits the update information at an interval (FIG. 45; once in 200 ms) shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at intervals shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball, the change amount of the points notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to finely notify the amount of change in points to the gaming device.

  (4-8) The gaming machine determines whether or not the remaining number of remaining points required to continue the game based on the points stored in the sub-point storage means (the payout control means (payout control) Substrate 17, FIG. 52).

  According to such a configuration, the transmission of the update information is not in time at the time of determination, so that the points stored in the gaming apparatus and the actual points (points stored in the gaming machine) Even if there is a gap between them, it is possible to make a determination based on the actual points.

(4-9) A connection unit for communicably connecting to a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that adds points by using gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by a player It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) provided with a (connector 330), capable of playing games with points, and adding points according to the occurrence of winnings,
Specification means (microcomputer for game machine control, number-of-additions ball counter, number-of-balls counter) for specifying the amount of change of points (number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) according to use for games and occurrence of winnings;
Point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
Point updating means (game ball counter) for updating the points stored in the point storage means according to the amount of change;
Return time information receiving means for receiving return time information transmitted from the gaming device when there is a return operation of the recording medium received by the gaming device (FIG. 57; operation instruction including prohibition required) And a payout control board 17) for receiving from the CU,
A game prohibition means (a launch control board 31 for stopping the launch motor 18) for setting a game prohibition state in which a game is not performed by a point when the return time information receiving means receives the return time information; further,
The update information capable of specifying the amount of change specified by the specifying means is transmitted to the gaming device (the action response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls is transmitted to the CU), and the game prohibition means is the game In the prohibited state, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied (FIG. 57; when the floating ball processing waiting time (10 seconds) has elapsed), the points stored in the point storage means are stored Transmitting initialization enable information indicating that reception of information for instructing initialization is possible (FIG. 57; transmits an operation response including game completion ON to the CU);
The point updating means initializes the points stored in the point storage means when information for instructing initialization of the points is transmitted from the gaming apparatus Make the number = 0).

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  Furthermore, the gaming machine is in the game prohibited state when the return time information is received, and transmits the initializeable information to the gaming apparatus when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming apparatus can be initialized. When information is received, information for instructing initialization of the points is transmitted to the gaming machine, and when the information is transmitted from the gaming apparatus, the gaming machine performs the game to initialize the points. Device will initialize the points in the unconfirmed stage when executing the initialization of the points stored in the gaming machine at the time of the return of the recording medium received in the device for It is possible to prevent the inconvenience as much as possible.

(4-10) The specifying means specifies the amount of change even when the points are changed while the game is prohibited by the game prohibiting means (the number of added balls based on the winning of the floating ball) Add and update),
When the amount of change in points is specified by the specifying means while the game prohibiting means is in the game prohibited state, the gaming machine can update information for specifying the amount of change to the gaming machine Send (FIG. 57; even in the floating ball processing waiting time, an operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls is transmitted to the CU).

  According to such a configuration, update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points while in the game prohibited state is also transmitted to the gaming device, and the amount of change in points while in the game prohibited state Even the game device can be grasped.

(4-11) Two change amount storage means for storing the change amount specified by the transmitted update information and storing the change amount specified by the update information transmitted one time ago (FIG. 17; An addition ball number counter storing the current addition ball number, a subtraction ball number counter counting the current subtraction ball number, an area storing the previous addition ball number as the previous ball related information, and an area storing the previous subtraction ball number)
Arrival determination means (disbursement control board 17, FIG. 64) for determining the arrival of the update information to the gaming device based on predetermined information (SQN) transmitted from the gaming device;
The gaming machine may use update information capable of specifying the total value of the change amounts stored in the two change amount storage means when the arrival determination means does not determine that the update information has arrived. Send to the device (FIG. 64).

  According to such a configuration, when it is not determined that the update information has arrived, the update information capable of specifying the total value of the change amounts stored in the two change amount storage means is transmitted to the gaming apparatus Therefore, it becomes possible to collect information on points in the gaming apparatus reliably and efficiently.

(4-12) Every time information (operation instruction) instructing transmission of update information capable of specifying the amount of change is received from the gaming device, the updating information is transmitted to the gaming device Send an operation response including the and the number of balls to the CU),
Change amount storage means for storing the amount of change specified by the transmitted update information as the update information (FIG. 17; addition ball number counter storing the current addition ball number, subtraction ball number counting the current subtraction ball number) Further includes a counter, an area for storing the number of previously added balls as the last ball related information, and an area for storing the number of previously subtracted balls);
The change amount storage means sequentially changes the change amounts specified by the specifying means while the state in which the information instructing the transmission of the update information can not be received continues even if a predetermined period has elapsed since the transmission of the update information. Cumulative storage (Figure 63),
The gaming machine may store the change amount storage unit in the change amount storage unit when the information instructing to transmit the update information is received in a state where the change amounts sequentially specified by the specification unit are accumulated and stored in the change amount storage unit. Update information capable of specifying the accumulated amount of change stored is transmitted (FIG. 63).

  According to this configuration, the amount of change sequentially specified by the specifying unit while the state in which the information instructing the transmission of the update information can not be received continues even if a predetermined period has elapsed since the transmission of the update information. Is accumulated and stored on the gaming machine side, and when the information instructing the transmission of the update information is received, the update information capable of specifying the accumulated amount of change is transmitted. Even when the communication between the game machine and the gaming machine is interrupted, it is possible to reliably collect information on points in the gaming machine even when the state of continuing the communication between the game machine and the gaming machine continues.

(4-13) It further includes addition information receiving means (disbursement control board 17) for receiving point addition information indicating addition of points equivalent to the value deducted from the gaming value.
The point updating means receives, when receiving point addition information (operation instruction including addition present and the number of requested balls for addition) indicating addition of a point equivalent to a value equivalent to the value withdrawn from the gaming value Add a point according to the point addition information to the point stored in the point storage means (FIG. 54, FIG. 55; add to the number of game balls);
The gaming machine transmits, to the gaming apparatus, information capable of specifying the amount of change in the points specified by the specifying means during the point addition by the point update means and the points after the addition ( 54, FIG. 55: An operation response including the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, and the number of game balls is transmitted to the CU).

  According to such a configuration, the point after the point change amount of the point is updated based on the identifiable information and the point after the addition transmitted from the gaming machine are compared with the identifiable information. It is possible to make the game device check whether or not it matches.

(5-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) capable of playing a game by holding points, and holding points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, etc.) owned by the player Alternatively, the gaming system is provided with a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) which adds points by using the number of balls and is communicably connected (connecting with the connectors 330 and 20) to the gaming machine (card unit 3).
The gaming machine is
Including specific means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball number counter, subtraction ball number counter) to specify the amount of change in points according to use for games and occurrence of winnings,
The communication information (sequence number (SQN)) for confirming whether the communication between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine is properly performed or the update information capable of specifying the variation (The payout control board 17 transmits the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the gaming machine communication unit 325)
While storing the amount of change specified by the specifying means from the transmission of the update information to the next transmission of the update information as the amount of change this time, the change amount is also backed up as the amount of change last time after transmission. Change amount storage means for storing (FIG. 17: addition ball number counter storing current addition ball number, subtraction ball number counter counting current subtraction ball number, area storing the previous addition ball number as previous ball related information, and last time Further includes an area for storing the number of subtracted balls),
The gaming device is
Includes point storage means (RAM for storing "the number of game balls") for storing points
While receiving the update information, it transmits predetermined information including the communication number to the gaming machine (gaming machine communication unit 325).
A point update unit (control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage unit according to the update information;
While adding and updating the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine and transmitting information including the updated communication number to the gaming machine, the communication number last transmitted or received is backed up and stored (see FIG. 17; RAM of control unit 323),
The gaming machine adds and updates the communication number transmitted from the gaming apparatus, transmits the updated communication number, and backs up and stores the last transmitted communication number (FIG. 17; payout control) RAM of the substrate 17), at the start of communication with the gaming device, the stored last transmitted communication number, and update information capable of specifying both the current change amount and the previous change amount (FIG. 76 to FIG. 93; the recovery data including the final SQN, the previous ball related information, and the current ball related information is transmitted as a recovery response),
In the gaming machine, at the start of communication with the gaming machine, the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is larger than the communication number transmitted or received last in the memory. When there is a correction, the point stored in the point storage means is corrected using the current change amount specified by the received update information and the previous change amount (FIGS. 78 and 83, 87), when the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is a small value or the same value, the point storage means using the current change amount specified by the received update information Correction of the points stored in the image (FIGS. 76, 77, 82, 86, 90).

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  Furthermore, in the gaming apparatus side and the gaming machine side, the communication number last transmitted or received is backed up and stored, and the gaming apparatus is backed up and stored at the start of communication with the gaming machine. By comparing the communication number and the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine, if the information transmitted by the gaming machine is not received, correction of the points is performed using the current variation and the previous variation. On the other hand, when the gaming machine does not receive the information transmitted by the gaming apparatus, and when the other receives the information transmitted by one of the gaming machine and the gaming machine, the current variation is used. Make corrections for points. As a result, when the communication control is resumed, the problem that the communication proceeds while the data that should have been transmitted on the transmitting side is not received on the receiving side can be resolved.

(5-2) The gaming machine includes sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points, and transmits the points stored in the sub-point storage means to the gaming device. (Send the operation response including the number of game balls to the CU),
The gaming device is
It includes determination means (FIG. 17; determination of coincidence of the number of game balls) which determines the consistency between the points stored in the point storage means and the points stored in the additional point storage means. ,
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, a predetermined mismatch processing is executed (error indicator and recovery processing are performed by the display unit 312, and the data correction request Bit2 is "1" (game ball) A correction start request and a communication start request including data of the number of gaming balls stored in the CU are transmitted to the P unit, and correction of matching the storage of the number of gaming balls in the P unit with the number of gaming balls in the CU is performed).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored in the gaming machine are not consistent with the points stored in the gaming apparatus. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to cope with the processing when there is an inconsistency.

(5-3) The point at which the point storage means stores the points stored by the secondary point storage means when the game apparatus determines that the determination means is inconsistent. Sending correction information (a communication start request including the game ball number correction ON of FIG. 49 and the game ball number shown in FIG. 49) to the game machine.
The gaming machine includes point correction means (payout control board 17; corrects the number of game balls according to a correction instruction command) for correcting the points stored in the additional point storage means based on the correction information.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(5-4) The change amount storage means stores the change amount of the point specified by the specifying means as the current change amount between the occurrence of the incommunicable state and the start of communication. (Figures 76-93),
The gaming machine transmits accumulated update information that can specify the current change amount accumulated and stored in the change amount storage means to the gaming device by communication being started after the occurrence of the incommunicable state. (FIGS. 76 to 93; transmitting recovery data including the current number of balls),
The gaming device updates the points stored in the point storage means on the basis of the accumulated update information (FIGS. 76 to 93).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to update the points reflecting the amount of change in the points that has fluctuated between the occurrence of the incommunicable state and the start of the communication.

(5-5) A connection portion (connector 330) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) capable of playing a game by points and having points added according to the occurrence of a prize, A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that adds points by using game-owned value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by a player,
Includes point storage means (RAM for storing "the number of game balls") for storing points
While transmitting predetermined information including a communication number (sequence number (SQR)) for confirming whether communication between the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine is properly performed, to the gaming machine (A game machine communication unit 325), receiving from the gaming machine update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to the use for a game and the occurrence of a prize (the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls Received from 17),
A point update means (control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information;
The communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is added and updated, and information including the communication number updated and added is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the communication number transmitted or received last is stored back (see FIG. 17) RAM of the control unit 323, and, further, at the start of communication with the gaming machine, a point of the gaming machine after the transmission of the communication number last transmitted by the gaming machine and the previous update information The update information that can specify both the current change amount that is the change amount of the current change amount and the previous change amount that is the change amount transmitted as the update information before the current change amount is received (from the payout control board 17 Receive the subtraction ball number),
In the gaming machine, at the start of communication with the gaming machine, the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is larger than the communication number transmitted or received last in the memory. When there is a correction, the point stored in the point storage means is corrected using the current change amount specified by the received update information and the previous change amount (FIGS. 78 and 83, FIG. 87) When the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is a small value or the same value, the point storage means uses the current change amount specified by the received update information. The stored points are corrected (FIG. 76, FIG. 77, FIG. 82, FIG. 86, FIG. 90).

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  Furthermore, in the gaming apparatus side and the gaming machine side, the communication number last transmitted or received is backed up and stored, and the gaming apparatus is backed up and stored at the start of communication with the gaming machine. By comparing the communication number and the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine, if the information transmitted by the gaming machine is not received, correction of the points is performed using the current variation and the previous variation. On the other hand, when the gaming machine does not receive the information transmitted by the gaming apparatus, and when the other receives the information transmitted by one of the gaming machine and the gaming machine, the current variation is used. Make corrections for points. As a result, when the communication control is resumed, the problem that the communication proceeds while the data that should have been transmitted on the transmitting side is not received on the receiving side can be resolved.

(5-6) When points received by the gaming machine are received from the gaming machine according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize, the received points and the point storage means Including determination means (FIG. 17; determination of the number of game balls to determine the consistency) with the stored points;
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, a predetermined mismatch processing is executed (error indicator and recovery processing are performed by the display unit 312, and the data correction request Bit2 is "1" (game ball) A correction start request and a communication start request including data of the number of gaming balls stored in the CU are transmitted to the P unit, and correction of matching the storage of the number of gaming balls in the P unit with the number of gaming balls in the CU is performed).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored in the gaming machine are not consistent with the points stored in the gaming apparatus. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to cope with the processing when there is an inconsistency.

  (5-7) Correction information for correcting the points stored in the gaming machine to the points stored in the point storage means when the determination means determines that the points are inconsistent A communication start request including the 49 game ball number correction ON and the game ball number is transmitted to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(5-8) Between the occurrence of the incommunicable state and the start of the communication, the accumulated update information capable of specifying the amount of change in the accumulated points stored accumulated on the gaming machine side is received (FIG. 76) ~ Figure 93; Receive recovery data including current number of balls),
The gaming device updates the points stored in the point storage means on the basis of the accumulated update information (FIGS. 76 to 93).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to update the points reflecting the amount of change in the points that has fluctuated between the occurrence of the incommunicable state and the start of the communication.

(6-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) capable of playing a game by holding points and in which the points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and the gaming machine connected so as to be communicable with the gaming machine A gaming system comprising: a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables playing on the gaming machine using value for use (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls stored);
The gaming device is
Point storage means (the RAM of the control unit 323 for storing “the number of game balls”) for storing the points;
One insertion discharge port (card insertion / discharge port 309) for inserting and discharging a recording medium (card) to which a game owned value owned by a player is associated;
The game value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted into the insertion / discharge port and accepted is added to the points stored in the point storage means while being withdrawn, and the gaming machine Point addition / subtraction means (control unit 323) for adding to the points stored in the above-mentioned point storage means by the occurrence of a prize in the above, and further subtracting the points used for the game;
According to the game end operation, the correspondence processing of correlating the points stored in the point storage means with the recording medium inserted in the insertion and discharge port is performed to discharge the recording medium from the insertion and discharge port Recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 57)
The recording medium processing means receives the recording received without performing the association process in accordance with an operation (FIG. 95; ball sharing designation) sharing the points stored in the point storage means. While the medium is discharged from the insertion and discharge port (FIG. 95; card A (with ball = 0) is returned), the shared point share is subtracted from the point stored in the point storage means (see FIG. 95; set game ball = 3800 and set game ball = 2800), and discharge the recording medium associated with the deducted points from the insertion / discharge port (Fig. 95; card B (ball = 1000) return) sharing process Run.

  According to such a configuration, the recording medium, which has been inserted into and accepted from the insertion / discharge port according to the operation of sharing the points, is associated with the points stored in the point storage means. Because it is discharged from the insertion discharge port without doing, it is possible to continue the game using the points stored in the point storage means even after the discharge of the recording medium, and it is not necessary to interrupt the game temporarily In addition, it is possible to prevent the decline in the operating rate.

  (6-2) The recording medium processing means prohibits sharing of points when the number of points stored in the point storage means is smaller than a value obtained by adding a predetermined number (200) to the shared points. Do.

  According to such a configuration, sharing of the points is permitted on the condition that the points stored in the point storage means have a predetermined number of allowances as compared to the points to be shared. It is possible to more reliably prevent the inconvenience of temporarily stopping the game due to lack of points.

  (6-3) The recording medium processing means stores the shared point share in the point storage means after the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port without performing the association process. The point stored in the point storage means is the point shared by the point storage means until the recording medium associated with the point for subtraction is subtracted from the point and discharged from the insertion / discharge port. When the condition is not satisfied, the sharing of points is canceled and subtraction of the shared points from the points stored in the point storage means is not performed (FIG. 95; the card B is ejected after the card A is ejected). If the number of gaming balls in the game is less than the number of balls written in the card B to be shared until it is reached, control is performed so that the sharing of points is not canceled and the card B is not discharged).

  According to such a configuration, after the recording medium is discharged from the insertion and discharge port without performing the association processing, the shared holding points are subtracted from the holding points stored in the holding point storage unit, and the subtraction is performed. Even when a situation occurs in which the points stored in the point storage means do not reach the shared points until the recording medium associated with the points of the minute is discharged from the insertion / discharge port, The action is taken by canceling the sharing of points.

(6-4) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) capable of playing a game by holding points and having points added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a game owned by a player, connected communicably to the gaming machine A gaming system comprising: a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables playing on the gaming machine using value for use (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls stored);
The gaming device is
Point storage means (the RAM of the control unit 323 for storing “the number of game balls”) for storing the points;
One insertion discharge port (card insertion / discharge port 309) for inserting and discharging a recording medium (card) to which a game owned value owned by a player is associated;
The game value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted into the insertion / discharge port and accepted is added to the points stored in the point storage means while being withdrawn, and the gaming machine Point addition / subtraction means (control unit 323) for adding to the points stored in the above-mentioned point storage means by the occurrence of a prize in the above, and further subtracting the points used for the game;
According to the game end operation, the correspondence processing of correlating the points stored in the point storage means with the recording medium inserted in the insertion and discharge port is performed to discharge the recording medium from the insertion and discharge port Recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 57)
In accordance with the game end operation, the recording medium inserted in the insertion and discharge port is an acquired game value corresponding to a point at the game end time added and subtracted by the processing performed by the point addition and subtraction processing means. Recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 57) which ejects from the insertion / discharge port in a state where identifiable information is recorded;
The recording medium processing means performs sharing from the points stored in the point storage means in accordance with an operation (FIG. 97; designated ball sharing designation) for sharing the points stored in the point storage means. Calculate the remaining points obtained by subtracting the holding points to be held and securing holding points (Fig. 97; collateral ball 200) to be secured to enable the game during the sharing process, and insert the inserted points into the insertion and discharge port. The recording medium received and received is associated with the remaining points, and discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 97; card A (ball with ball = 3800) returned), and the shared holding The recording medium associated with the points is discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 97; card B (ball with ball = 1000) return) sharing processing is executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing process is executed in a state in which securing points for enabling gaming during the sharing process are secured, the game can be continued using the securing points. Since it is not necessary to interrupt the game temporarily, it is possible to prevent a drop in the operating rate.

  (6-5) After the sharing process is performed by the recording medium processing means, a notification for reinserting the recording medium discharged without performing the association process by the sharing process into the insertion and ejection port is provided. Furthermore, the notification means (display 312 which displays the screen of FIG. 103) to perform is further included.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player forgets to reinsert the recording medium discharged by the sharing process.

  (6-6) The recording medium processing means executes the sharing process, and when the recording medium discharged without performing the association process by the sharing process is reinserted into the insertion and ejection port, It is determined whether the recording medium is the same as the ejected recording medium, and when it is determined that the recording medium is not the same, the recording medium is ejected, and when it is determined that the recording medium is the same, the recording medium , And performs the association process according to the game end operation to eject the recording medium from the insertion and ejection port.

  According to such a configuration, by reinserting the recording medium of the player that has been discharged once by the sharing process, it is possible to discharge the points acquired by the player in association with the recording medium.

(6-7) The gaming machine is
Secondary point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
Specifying means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball number counter, subtraction ball number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for games and occurrence of prizes;
Information transmitting means (ball number control board 17) for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is
Including information receiving means (game machine communication unit 325) for receiving the update information;
The point addition / subtraction means adds / subtracts / updates the point stored in the point storage means based on the update information (control unit 323).

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(6-8) Connections (connectors 330, 20, connection) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can play a game by holding points and is added points according to the occurrence of winnings A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) having a wiring) and enabling gaming with the gaming machine using gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by a player,
Point storage means (RAM of the control unit 323) for storing the points;
One insertion discharge port (card insertion / discharge port 309) for inserting and discharging a recording medium (card) to which a game owned value owned by a player is associated;
A process for securing points for use in the game by the gaming machine by deducting the acquired gaming value specified by the information recorded in the recording medium inserted and accepted in the insertion discharge port Holding point securing processing means (a control unit 323 for transmitting an operation instruction including data of the number of requested addition balls to P);
The game value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted into the insertion discharge port is withdrawn and added to the points stored in the point storage means, and a prize is won in the gaming machine. Point addition and subtraction means (control unit 323) for adding to the points stored in the point storage means by generating and further subtracting the points used in the game;
According to the game end operation, the correspondence processing of correlating the points stored in the point storage means with the recording medium inserted in the insertion and discharge port is performed to discharge the recording medium from the insertion and discharge port Recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 57)
The recording medium processing means receives the recording received without performing the association process in accordance with an operation (FIG. 95; ball sharing designation) sharing the points stored in the point storage means. While the medium is discharged from the insertion and discharge port (FIG. 95; card A (with ball = 0) is returned), the shared point share is subtracted from the point stored in the point storage means (see FIG. 95; set game ball = 3800 and set game ball = 2800), and discharge the recording medium associated with the deducted points from the insertion / discharge port (Fig. 95; card B (ball = 1000) return) sharing process Run.

  According to such a configuration, the recording medium, which has been inserted into and accepted from the insertion / discharge port according to the operation of sharing the points, is associated with the points stored in the point storage means. Because it is discharged from the insertion discharge port without doing, it is possible to continue the game using the points stored in the point storage means even after the discharge of the recording medium, and it is not necessary to interrupt the game temporarily In addition, it is possible to prevent the decline in the operating rate.

  (6-9) The recording medium processing means prohibits sharing of points when the number of points stored in the point storage means is smaller than a value obtained by adding a predetermined number (200) to the shared points. Do.

  According to such a configuration, sharing of the points is permitted on the condition that the points stored in the point storage means have a predetermined number of allowances as compared to the points to be shared. It is possible to more reliably prevent the inconvenience of temporarily stopping the game due to lack of points.

  (6-10) After the recording medium processing means ejects the recording medium from the insertion and discharging port without performing the association process, the shared point share is stored in the point storage means. The point stored in the point storage means is the point shared by the point storage means until the recording medium associated with the point for subtraction is subtracted from the point and discharged from the insertion / discharge port. When the condition is not satisfied, the sharing of points is canceled and subtraction of the shared points from the points stored in the point storage means is not performed (FIG. 95; the card B is ejected after the card A is ejected). If the number of gaming balls in the game is less than the number of balls written in the card B to be shared until it is reached, control is performed so that the sharing of points is not canceled and the card B is not discharged).

  According to such a configuration, after the recording medium is discharged from the insertion and discharge port without performing the association processing, the shared holding points are subtracted from the holding points stored in the holding point storage unit, and the subtraction is performed. Even when a situation occurs in which the points stored in the point storage means do not reach the shared points until the recording medium associated with the points of the minute is discharged from the insertion / discharge port, The action is taken by canceling the sharing of points.

(6-11) A connection (connectors 330, 20, connection) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) capable of playing games with points and having points added according to the occurrence of a prize A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) having a wiring) and enabling gaming with the gaming machine using gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by a player,
Point storage means (RAM of the control unit 323) for storing the points;
One insertion discharge port (card insertion / discharge port 309) for inserting and discharging a recording medium (card) to which a game owned value owned by a player is associated;
The game value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted into the insertion / discharge port and accepted is added to the points stored in the point storage means while being withdrawn, and the gaming machine Point addition / subtraction means (control unit 323) for adding to the points stored in the above-mentioned point storage means by the occurrence of a prize in the above, and further subtracting the points used for the game;
According to the game end operation, the correspondence processing of correlating the points stored in the point storage means with the recording medium inserted in the insertion and discharge port is performed to discharge the recording medium from the insertion and discharge port Recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 57)
In accordance with the game end operation, the recording medium inserted in the insertion and discharge port is an acquired game value corresponding to a point at the game end time added and subtracted by the processing performed by the point addition and subtraction processing means. Recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 57) which ejects from the insertion / discharge port in a state where identifiable information is recorded;
The recording medium processing means performs sharing from the points stored in the point storage means in accordance with an operation (FIG. 97; designated ball sharing designation) for sharing the points stored in the point storage means. Calculate the remaining points obtained by subtracting the holding points to be held and securing holding points (Fig. 97; collateral ball 200) to be secured to enable the game during the sharing process, and insert the inserted points into the insertion and discharge port. The recording medium received and received is associated with the remaining points, and discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 97; card A (ball with ball = 3800) returned), and the shared holding The recording medium associated with the points is discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 97; card B (ball with ball = 1000) return) sharing processing is executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing process is executed in a state in which securing points for enabling gaming during the sharing process are secured, the game can be continued using the securing points. Since it is not necessary to interrupt the game temporarily, it is possible to prevent a drop in the operating rate.

  (6-12) After the sharing process is performed by the recording medium processing means, a notification for causing the recording medium discharged without performing the association process by the sharing process to be reinserted into the insertion and ejection port Furthermore, the notification means (display 312 which displays the screen of FIG. 103) to perform is further included.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player forgets to reinsert the recording medium discharged by the sharing process.

  (6-13) The recording medium processing means executes the sharing process, and when the recording medium discharged without performing the association process by the sharing process is reinserted into the insertion and ejection port, It is determined whether the recording medium is the same as the ejected recording medium, and when it is determined that the recording medium is not the same, the recording medium is ejected, and when it is determined that the recording medium is the same, the recording medium , And performs the association process according to the game end operation to eject the recording medium from the insertion and ejection port.

  According to such a configuration, by reinserting the recording medium of the player that has been discharged once by the sharing process, it is possible to discharge the points acquired by the player in association with the recording medium.

(6-14) Includes information receiving means (game machine communication unit 325) for receiving from the gaming machine update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize,
The point addition / subtraction means adds / subtracts / updates the point stored in the point storage means based on the update information (control unit 323).

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(7-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) capable of playing a game by holding points and having points added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a game owned by a player, connected communicably to the gaming machine A gaming system comprising: a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables playing on the gaming machine using value for use (prepaid balance, number of balls held, or number of balls stored);
The gaming device is
Point storage means (the RAM of the control unit 323 for storing “the number of game balls”) for storing the points;
One insertion discharge port (card insertion / discharge port 309) for inserting and discharging a recording medium (card) to which a game owned value owned by a player is associated;
The game value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted and accepted into the insertion discharge port is withdrawn and added to the points stored in the point storage means, and the game Point addition / subtraction means (control unit 323) for adding to the points stored in the above-mentioned point storage means by the occurrence of winning on the machine, and further subtracting the points used for the game;
Recording medium processing means (card return in FIG. 57) for performing correspondence processing of correlating the points stored in the point storage means with the recording medium according to the game end operation and discharging the recording medium from the insertion and ejection port Processing) and
The recording medium processing means performs an operation of sharing the points stored in the point storage means in the state where the recording medium inserted into the insertion and ejection port is received (FIG. 96; ball sharing designation) In response to this, the shared point share to be shared is subtracted from the point stored in the point storage means, and the association process of correlating the point of the subtracted point to the accepted recording medium is performed, The visitor recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 96; card B (with balls = 1000) return) sharing processing is executed, and the point storage stored in the point storage means according to the game end operation. The recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port by performing a matching process in which points are associated with other recording media.

  According to such a configuration, in a state where the recording medium is inserted into and accepted from the insertion and ejection port, the share of shared points is stored in the point storage means according to the operation of sharing the shared points. In order to perform subtraction processing from the points and to associate the points for the subtraction with the received recording medium, the recording medium is discharged as a recording medium for sharing points from the insertion / discharge port. Of the points stored in the point storage means, the game can be continued using the remaining points obtained by subtracting the shared points, and since the game does not have to be interrupted temporarily, the decline in the operating rate is prevented. it can. In addition, since the points stored in the point storage means are associated with another recording medium and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion and discharge port in accordance with the game ending operation, the player can use the recording medium. Earn points by obtaining them.

  (7-2) The recording medium processing means prohibits sharing of points when the number of points stored in the point storage means is smaller than a value obtained by adding a predetermined number (200) to the shared points. Do.

  According to such a configuration, sharing of the points is permitted on the condition that the points stored in the point storage means have a predetermined number of allowances as compared to the points to be shared. It is possible to more reliably prevent the inconvenience of temporarily stopping the game due to lack of points.

(7-3) The gaming apparatus includes a recording medium stock unit (card stock unit) for stocking recording media,
The recording medium processing means performs an associating process of correlating the points stored in the point storage means with the recording medium taken out from the recording medium stock unit in response to the game ending operation, and carries out the recording medium as the recording medium Eject from the insertion outlet.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to save the trouble of inserting the recording medium into the insertion and discharging port at the end of the game.

(7-4) The gaming machine is
Secondary point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
Specifying means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball number counter, subtraction ball number counter) for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for games and occurrence of prizes;
Information transmitting means (ball number control board 17) for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is
Including information receiving means (game machine communication unit 325) for receiving the update information;
The point addition / subtraction means adds / subtracts / updates the point stored in the point storage means based on the update information (control unit 323).

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(7-5) A connection (connectors 330, 20, connection) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) capable of playing games with points and having points added according to the occurrence of a prize A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) having a wiring) and enabling gaming with the gaming machine using gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by a player,
Point storage means (the RAM of the control unit 323 for storing “the number of game balls”) for storing the points;
One insertion discharge port (card insertion / discharge port 309) for inserting and discharging a recording medium (card) to which a game owned value owned by a player is associated;
The game value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted and accepted into the insertion discharge port is withdrawn and added to the points stored in the point storage means, and the game Point addition / subtraction means (control unit 323) for adding to the points stored in the above-mentioned point storage means by the occurrence of winning on the machine, and further subtracting the points used for the game;
Recording medium processing means (card return in FIG. 57) for performing correspondence processing of correlating the points stored in the point storage means with the recording medium according to the game end operation and discharging the recording medium from the insertion and ejection port Processing) and
The recording medium processing means performs an operation of sharing the points stored in the point storage means in the state where the recording medium inserted into the insertion and ejection port is received (FIG. 96; ball sharing designation) In response to this, the shared point share to be shared is subtracted from the point stored in the point storage means, and the association process of correlating the point of the subtracted point to the accepted recording medium is performed, The recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 96; card B (ball number = 1000) return) shared processing is executed, and the points stored in the point storage means are stored according to the game end operation. An associating process of associating with another recording medium is performed, and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port.

  According to such a configuration, in a state where the recording medium is inserted into and accepted from the insertion and ejection port, the share of shared points is stored in the point storage means according to the operation of sharing the shared points. In order to perform subtraction processing from the points and to associate the points for the subtraction with the received recording medium, the recording medium is discharged as a recording medium for sharing points from the insertion / discharge port. Of the points stored in the point storage means, the game can be continued using the remaining points obtained by subtracting the shared points, and since the game does not have to be interrupted temporarily, the decline in the operating rate is prevented. it can. In addition, since the points stored in the point storage means are associated with another recording medium and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion and discharge port in accordance with the game ending operation, the player can use the recording medium. Earn points by obtaining them.

  (7-6) The recording medium processing means prohibits sharing of points when the number of points stored in the point storage means is smaller than a value obtained by adding a predetermined number (200) to the shared points. Do.

  According to such a configuration, sharing of the points is permitted on the condition that the points stored in the point storage means have a predetermined number of allowances as compared to the points to be shared. It is possible to more reliably prevent the inconvenience of temporarily stopping the game due to lack of points.

(7-7) The gaming apparatus includes a recording medium stock unit (card stock unit) for stocking recording media,
The recording medium processing means performs an associating process of correlating the points stored in the point storage means with the recording medium taken out from the recording medium stock unit in response to the game ending operation, and carries out the recording medium as the recording medium Eject from the insertion outlet.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to save the trouble of inserting the recording medium into the insertion and discharging port at the end of the game.

(7-8) Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing the number of game balls);
Information receiving means (game machine communication unit 325) for receiving from the gaming machine update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize,
The point addition / subtraction means adds / subtracts / updates the point stored in the point storage means based on the update information (control unit 323).

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(8-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine) in which gaming media (game balls) are shot in a gaming area (playing area 27) and points are added in accordance with the occurrence of a winning,
Point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
Game medium firing means (launch unit 38) for launching game media to the game area;
A firing permitting means (firing control board 31) which allows firing of gaming media by the gaming media launching means on condition that the points which can be used for gaming are stored in the point storage means;
Points deducted from the points stored in the point storage means are deducted from the points stored in the point storage means, and points according to the occurrence of winning are stored in the point storage means Point addition / subtraction means for adding to the existing points (the payout control board 17 counts the number of game balls based on the winning detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, starting opening winning information, and foul ball detection signal And the payout control substrate 17 subtracts the number of gaming balls from the number of gaming balls based on the firing detection signal transmitted from the gaming ball control unit 34 to the payout control substrate 17).
Determining means for determining the presence or absence of points usable for the game (Fig. 52; detecting game ball = 0);
When the determination means determines that there is no point, the emission inhibiting means for prohibiting the emission of the game medium by the game medium emission means (FIG. 52; the number of game balls becomes 0, In the P unit, no ball is detected, and the payout control board 17 automatically stops the driving of the ball hitting and firing motor 18 to control the game prohibited state in which the ball can not be hit in the game area),
Abnormality notification means (indicator 54) for performing abnormal notification when a signal generated by execution of a game using gaming media is detected in the firing prohibition state of gaming media by the launch prohibition means (steps S60 and S63 in FIG. 126) And an alarm notification lamp, or the like (or blinks) or an alarm notification from the speaker.

  According to such a configuration, when an illegal act of causing a prize to be generated illegally by transmission of radio waves is performed in the launch prohibited state, the effect of the radio waves is influenced by execution of a game using a game medium When a signal to be generated is output, the signal is detected and an abnormality notification is performed by the abnormality notification means. Therefore, it is possible to cope with an injustice in which a prize is generated illegally by transmission of a radio wave.

(8-2) A point is added using the gaming value owned by the player, and the point stored in the point storage means is transmitted to the gaming apparatus communicably connected to the gaming machine. Information transmission means (the payout control board 17 transmits an operation response including the number of game balls);
When it is determined by the gaming machine that the points updated based on the updated information transmitted by the information transmitting means do not match the points transmitted by the information transmitting means (see FIG. 17). Determining the match of the number of game balls) point correction information transmitted from the game device (performs a recovery process and transmits a command of a communication start request to P, and a data correction request included in the command Information receiving means (disbursement control board 17) for receiving Bit 2 of data of “1” (game ball correction ON)),
Point correction means for correcting the points stored in the point storage means based on the point correction information received by the information receiving means (Payout control board 17; P according to data of Bit 1 of data correction request The game ball number (game ball total number information) is corrected to the game ball number after correction on the CU side (game ball total number information).

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(8-3) Lifting means (lift motor 40, lift device 190) which lifts the game medium collected from the game area to the hitting position when the game medium emitting means is operating ,
The game machine further comprises: lift game medium detection means (ball lift switch (upper) 41a, ball lift switch (lower) 41b) for detecting game media pumped by the lift means;
The abnormality notifying means notifies of abnormality when the detection signal of the transported game medium detecting means is outputted when the game medium emitting means is not operated (“the transporting device is operated abnormally by the display 54. "Abnormal display such as", a point of a lamp for alarming a device abnormality, or the like (or blinking), or "alarm notification from a speaker by voice such as" the device has a malfunction ".

  According to such a configuration, when an abnormal situation occurs in which the detection signal of the transporting game medium detecting means is outputted at the time of non-operation of the game medium launching means which should normally not be operating the transporting means. Abnormality notification is performed by the abnormality notification means, and an abnormality can be found early.

(8-4) A winning opening (a big winning opening, a normal winning opening, a starting opening) in which gaming media launched into the gaming area can win
Winning detection means (FIG. 116; winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h) for detecting gaming media that has won in the winning opening;
Ejection detecting means (FIG. 116; out-of-ball detection switch 701) for detecting gaming media ejected into the gaming area and ejected from the gaming area without winning in the winning opening;
Merged route detecting means (a merging medium detecting means for detecting gaming media in a passing route (FIG. 116; merging passing route 702) for merging and passing gaming media detected by the winning detection means and gaming media detected by the discharge detection means 116 further comprising a merging path detection switch 32),
The winning detection means and the merging path detecting means are respectively constituted by detecting means of different systems (the winning balls detection switches 700a to 700h are constituted by proximity switches, the merging path detection switch 32 is constituted by an optical sensor) ),
The point addition / subtraction means adds a point corresponding to the occurrence of the winning to the point stored in the point storage means based on the fact that the winning of the game medium is detected by the prize detection means Based on the winning detection signal, starting opening winning information, and foul ball detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, the payout control board 17 adds to the number of gaming balls),
Abnormality judging means (jumping balls by the payout control board 17) judging the consistency between the number detected by the prize detecting means, the number detected by the discharge detecting means and the number detected by the merging route detecting means Calculating the sum of the number of balls detected by the detection switches 700a to 700h and the out-of-ball detection switch 701, and determining whether or not the number matches the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch 32;
The abnormality notifying means performs abnormality notification when it is determined that the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determining means (when it is determined that there is not a match due to the payout control board 17 and a predetermined number of gaps or more). , And transmits an abnormality display command to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and the effect control substrate 53 for display performs abnormality display on the display 54).

  According to such a configuration, the winning detection means and the merging path detection means are respectively constituted by detection means of different systems when an illegal act of causing a prize to occur illegally by transmission of radio waves is performed. Since the influence of the illegal radio waves is different, the consistency between the number of detections by the winning detection means, the number of detections by the discharge detection means and the number of detections by the merging route detection means is broken, and it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred. It is possible to cope with the fraudulent act of generating prizes by sending fraudulently.

(8-5) It further comprises a foul detection means (FIG. 116; foul ball detection switch 33) for detecting a foul game medium which is fired by the launch prohibiting means but has not reached the game area.
In the passage route, the game media of the foul detected by the foul detection means are also merged and passed (FIG. 116).
The foul detection means and the merging path detection means are respectively composed of detection means of different systems (the foul ball detection switch 33 is composed of a proximity switch, the merge path detection switch 32 is composed of an optical sensor),
The abnormality determination means determines the consistency between the number of detections by the foul detection means, the number of detections by the winning detection means, the number of detections by the discharge detection means, and the number of detections by the merging path detection means. The sum of the number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701, and the foul ball detection switch 33 is calculated by the payout control board 17, and the sum and the ball detection by the merging path detection switch 32 are determined. It is determined whether or not the numbers match.

  According to such a configuration, the winning detection means, the foul detection means, and the merging route detection means are different in detection method from each other when an illegal act of causing a prize to occur illegally by transmission of radio waves is performed. Because the influence of the illegal radio waves is different, the consistency between the number of detections by the foul detection means, the number of detections by the prize detection means, the number of detections by the discharge detection means and the number of detections by the merging route detection means is broken It is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to cope with an injustice that causes a prize to be generated illegally by transmission of radio waves.

  It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  In the present invention, a predetermined number of game media used in one game machine is enclosed in the enclosed area, the game medium is made to enter the game area provided in the game machine, and the game medium passed through the game area is The present invention can be suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that is circulated through the enclosed area in order to cause the collected gaming media to be recovered through the recovery unit and to enter the gaming area again.

1 Hall management computer 2 Pachinko machine 3 card unit 4 wooden frame 5 front frame 6 glass door 10 glass door open solenoid 11 front frame open solenoid 12 glass door closed detector 13 front frame closed detector 145 out port 150 fal ball return port 16 Main Control Board 160 Microcomputer 17 for Game Control Payout Control Board 170 Payout Control Microcomputer 171 Payout Control CPU
172 ROM
173 RAM
174 I / O
175 external output circuit 18 hitting ball firing motor 20 connecting unit 26 game board 26a game board unit 267a-267e moving surface member 268a-268d cover member 27 game area 272 cover member 28 transparent member 309 card insertion / ejection slot 312 indicator 319 Replay Button 321 loan button 312 display 322 return button 323 control unit 324 external communication unit 325 game machine communication unit 327 card reader / writer 330 connection unit 32 merging path detection switch 33 false ball detection switch 41 a ball raising switch (upper)
41b Ball lift switch (bottom)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 50 production part 53 production | presentation control board 54 for displays indicator 900 power supply board 910 backup power

Claims (1)

A predetermined number of game media are enclosed, and the game media is made to enter the game area, the game media having passed through the game area is collected through the collection unit, and the collected game media is made to enter the game area again. It is a gaming machine that is circulated to
A game board having the game area;
The game machine comprises: an attachment portion for attaching the game board; and a play frame including a transparent member covering a front surface of the game area when the game board is attached to the attachment portion,
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming board and the gaming frame are fixed in such a manner that they can not be removed without a trace.